Professional Documents
Culture Documents
International Codes V8i
International Codes V8i
Pro
V8i (SELECTseries 6)
Copyright Information
Trademark Notice
Bentley, the "B" Bentley logo, STAAD.Pro are registered or nonregistered trademarks of Bentley
Sytems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc. All other marks are the property of their respective
owners.
Copyright Notice
2015, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may only be used pursuant to applicable
software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Bentley Systems,
Incorporated and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may
not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.
Acknowledgments
Windows, Vista, SQL Server, MSDE, .NET, DirectX are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Table of Contents
About STAAD.Pro
Examples Manual
Graphical Environment
Batch Design
Design Modes
1 Australian Codes
12
13
14
14
17
1B.1 General
17
19
20
20
23
23
24
27
33
35
36
36
2 British Codes
2A. British Codes - Concrete Design per BS8110
45
47
47
50
50
50
52
53
54
63
2B.1 General
63
64
64
64
67
70
81
81
81
82
84
85
85
iv STAAD.Pro
89
89
89
89
89
90
90
92
93
93
94
95
95
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
97
97
97
98
102
107
3 Canadian Codes
115
117
117
117
117
118
119
121
121
123
123
123
123
124
127
128
134
138
138
139
140
157
157
157
159
165
165
165
165
166
167
170
172
173
173
174
183
183
183
183
184
184
184
vi STAAD.Pro
193
196
4 Cypriot Codes
231
233
235
5 Danish Codes
239
241
243
6 Dutch Codes
245
247
247
7 European Codes
251
253
253
253
253
253
7A.5 Columns
254
7A.6 Beams
254
7A.7 Slabs
255
255
7B. European Codes - Steel Design per Eurocode 3 [DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992]
259
259
260
261
261
261
264
7B.7 CodeChecking
271
7B.8 MemberSelection
272
7B.9 TabulatedResultsofSteelDesign
272
275
275
277
277
277
278
301
7C.7 CodeChecking
315
315
316
319
319
320
322
334
335
345
352
359
367
375
382
389
394
399
399
401
406
viii STAAD.Pro
409
8 Finnish Codes
417
419
421
423
423
9 French Codes
427
429
429
430
431
431
431
432
435
435
435
435
436
436
438
438
440
10 German Codes
445
447
447
447
447
448
449
449
450
453
453
453
454
457
457
457
460
460
11 Indian Codes
11A. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS 456
461
463
463
463
463
469
470
472
473
474
481
x STAAD.Pro
453
483
483
483
483
493
496
497
498
503
503
503
504
506
510
510
510
510
511
511
511
513
517
521
521
521
522
524
524
525
525
525
526
529
530
11E. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code
11E.1 Cross-Sectional Properties
537
537
537
538
539
545
545
545
555
556
559
12 Japanese Codes
12A. Japanese Codes - Concrete Design per 1991 AIJ
561
563
563
563
563
564
565
567
567
571
12B.1 General
571
571
575
579
581
585
12C.1 General
585
585
12C.3 MemberPropertySpecifications
585
585
590
xii STAAD.Pro
595
595
599
600
600
13 Mexican Codes
603
605
605
605
605
606
610
613
614
614
615
617
13B.1 General
617
617
618
618
618
619
619
620
620
621
621
625
625
14 Norwegian Codes
14A. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 / NPD
627
629
629
630
634
637
645
648
664
668
683
683
693
697
697
697
699
701
701
15 Russian Codes
15A. Russian Codes - Concrete Design Per SNiP 2.03.01-84*
705
705
709
711
15A.1 General
711
712
15A.3 Beams
726
15A.4 Columns
731
735
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1990)
15B.1 General
xiv STAAD.Pro
737
737
737
740
742
749
753
15C.1 General
753
754
755
758
763
767
15D.1 General
767
768
15D.3 Beams
772
15D.4 Columns
775
775
16 Singaporian Codes
779
781
783
787
789
789
791
792
793
795
17B.1 General
795
795
795
795
799
799
801
804
805
805
807
810
812
17C.1 General
815
815
815
815
816
816
824
827
18 Spanish Codes
18A. Spanish Codes - Steel Design per NBE-MV103-1972
18A.1 Design Parameters
18A. Spanish Codes - Concrete Design per EHE
18A.2 Design Parameters
19 Swedish Codes
19A. Swedish Codes - Steel Design per BSK 99
19A.1 Design Parameters
19B. Swedish Codes - Concrete Design per BBK 94
19C.1 Design Parameters
xvi STAAD.Pro
829
831
831
833
833
837
839
839
841
843
847
847
848
848
848
856
856
857
21A. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE 10-97
859
859
859
860
860
864
21B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and
Reports
865
865
865
866
868
871
871
872
876
879
880
880
881
883
887
889
889
890
23A.3 Examples
896
905
905
909
909
912
23B.5 Examples
912
925
925
929
929
933
24A.5 Example
933
935
935
939
940
943
24B.5 Example
943
947
947
951
952
956
24C.5 Example
956
xviii STAAD.Pro
959
959
963
964
967
968
971
971
Technical Support
973
This documentation has been prepared to provide information pertaining to the various
international codes supported by STAAD. These codes are provided as additional codes by Bentley
Sytems, Incorporated. In other words, they do not come with the standard license package. Hence,
information on only some of the codes presented in this document may be actually pertinent to
the license package available to you.
This document is to be used in conjunction with the STAAD Technical Reference Manual and the
STAAD Application Examples Manual. Effort has been made to provide some basic information
about the analysis considerations and the logic used in the design approach. A brief outline of the
factors affecting the design along with references to the corresponding clauses in the codes is also
provided. Examples are provided at the appropriate places to facilitate ease of understanding of the
usage of the commands and design parameters. You are urged to refer to the Examples Manual for
solved problems that use the commands and features of STAAD. Since the STAAD output contains
references to the clauses in the code that govern the design, we recommend that you consult the
documentation of the code of that country for additional details on the design criteria.
About STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro is a general purpose structural analysis and design program with applications primarily
in the building industry - commercial buildings, bridges and highway structures, industrial
structures, chemical plant structures, dams, retaining walls, turbine foundations, culverts and other
embedded structures, etc. The program hence consists of the following facilities to enable this task.
1. Graphical model generation utilities as well as text editor based commands for creating the
mathematical model. Beam and column members are represented using lines. Walls, slabs
and panel type entities are represented using triangular and quadrilateral finite elements.
Solid blocks are represented using brick elements. These utilities allow the user to create the
geometry, assign properties, orient cross sections as desired, assign materials like steel,
concrete, timber, aluminum, specify supports, apply loads explicitly as well as have the
program generate loads, design parameters etc.
2. Analysis engines for performing linear elastic and pdelta analysis, finite element analysis,
frequency extraction, and dynamic response (spectrum, time history, steady state, etc.).
3. Design engines for code checking and optimization of steel, aluminum and timber
members. Reinforcement calculations for concrete beams, columns, slabs and shear walls.
Design of shear and moment connections for steel members.
4. Result viewing, result verification and report generation tools for examining displacement
diagrams, bending moment and shear force diagrams, beam, plate and solid stress contours,
etc.
5. Peripheral tools for activities like import and export of data from and to other widely
accepted formats, links with other popular softwares for niche areas like reinforced and
prestressed concrete slab design, footing design, steel connection design, etc.
6. A library of exposed functions called OpenSTAAD which allows users to access STAAD.Pros
internal functions and routines as well as its graphical commands to tap into STAADs
database and link input and output data to third-party software written using languages like
C, C++, VB, VBA, FORTRAN, Java, Delphi, etc. Thus, OpenSTAAD allows users to link inhouse or third-party applications with STAAD.Pro.
Examples Manual
This book offers examples of various problems that can be solved using the STAAD engine. The
examples represent various structural analyses and design problems commonly encountered by
structural engineers.
Graphical Environment
This document contains a detailed description of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of STAAD.Pro.
The topics covered include model generation, structural analysis and design, result verification, and
report generation.
Batch Design
Using this method, code checks and/or member selection is performed directly by the analysis and
design engine when an analysis is performed.
The contents of this manual, along with those in the Technical Reference manual, are all used for
batch design.
Design Modes
Code checks and member selection is performed in a post-processing module for either Steel
Design or Concrete Design. These modes are available in the Graphical User Interface.
Refer to the Steel Design mode and Concrete Design mode help sections for additional
information.
Table 14.1-Available steel design codes
in the Steel Design mode
Country/Region
Code
Egypt
205 2001
Europe
EC3 DD
Great Britain
BS5950 2000
India
IS800
United States
AISCASD
Note: Design per the Chinese steel code GB50017-2003 must be performed per the localized
STAADSSDD interface. Please download and install this application from Bentley SELECT.
Table 14.2-Available design codes in the
Concrete Design codes
Country/
Region
Code
Australia
AS 3600
China
GB50010
Egypt
ECCS 203
Country/
Region
Code
Eurocode 2 - 1991
Europe
Eurocode 2 - 2004
France
BAEL
Germany
DIN 1045-1
Great Britain
BS 8110
India
IS456
Japan
AIJ
Norway
NS3473
Russia
SP52-101-03
Singapore
CP65
Spain
EHE
Turkey
TS 500
ACI 318-99
United States
5 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
6 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
1
Australian Codes
1 Australian Codes
8 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and
the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular
with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not provide the cross section area
(AX) as an input.
Default Value
-
Description
Must be specified as
AUSTRALIAN to invokes design
per AS 3600 - 2001.
Design Code to follow.
See section 5.52.2 of the
Technical Reference Manual.
CLB
40 mm
CLS
40 mm
CLT
40 mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
FC
FYMAIN
30 N/mm 2
400 N/mm 2
10 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Parameter Name
FYSEC
Default Value
400 N/mm 2
Description
Yield Stress for secondary
reinforcing steel. Applicable
values per Table 6.2.1 of AS
3600-2001:
250
400
450
500
MAXMAIN
12 mm
MINMAIN
12 mm
MINSEC
12 mm
Minimum secondary
reinforcement bar size.
MMAG
RATIO
4.0
NSECTION
12
SFACE
Parameter Name
TRACK
Default Value
0.0
Description
For beam design:
0.0 = output consists of
reinforcement details at the
member start, middle, and
end
1.0 = critical moments are
printed in addition to
TRACK 0.0 output
2.0 = required steel for
intermediate sections
defined by NSECTION are
printedin addition to
TRACK 0.0 output
For column design:
0.0 = reinforcement details
are printed
WIDTH
ZD
12 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on
the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be
provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically.
1A.5.1 DesignforFlexure
Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating
tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the above
mentioned sections. Each of these sections is designed to resist both of these critical sagging and
hogging moments. Currently, design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section
dimensions are inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be permitted in the
output. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the
sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and
reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen
from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again
in a second pass taking into account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the
basis of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provisions of flexural
reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for the curtailment of
reinforcements as per AS 3600. Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in
the design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of
other practical consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at
13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be prepared.
MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6
TRACK 1.0 MEMB 2 TO 9
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
14 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
16 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
1B.1 General
1B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state design.
Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they
would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength
and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are
used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading
conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without
exceeding the limit states of strength, stability, and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic
section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the designer in
specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code
checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are
met and identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of AS 4100. A
detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is
available in the specification document.
1B.1 General
Code
Reference
Stability
AS 4100 3.3
Serviceability
AS 4100 3.5
Brittle Fracture
AS 4100 3.7
Fire
AS4100 3.9
Other Design
Requirements
AS 4100 3.11
18 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Description
WB, WC
UB, UC
T-SECTION
BT, CT
CHANNEL
PFC
ANGLE
EA, UA
TUBE
SHS, RHS
PIPE
CHS
Note: STAAD.Pro will not design the following section types to AS 4100: Double Profiles (D),
Composite Sections (C), Top Cover Plates (TC), Bottom Cover Plates (BC), and Top & Bottom
Cover Plates (TB), Double Channels (D, BA, & FR) and Double Angles (LD & SD). Refer to Section
Profile Tables in the Graphical Environment for these options.
Tip: When adding and assigning sections using the built-in steel section library through the
Graphical Environment, STAAD.Pros default tables are American. To change the default tables to
Australian, select File > Configuration from the STAAD.Pro Start page (no input file open). Set
the Default Profile Table to Australian on the Configure Program dialog Section Profile Table.
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.
20 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
1B.4.1 UB Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB150X14.0
36 TO 46 TA ST UB180X16.1
1B.4.2 UC Shapes
The designation for the UC shapes is similar to that for the UB shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST UC100X14.8
23 56 TA ST UC310X96.8
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back-to-back double channel PFC230 with no spacing
in between. Member 17 is a double channel PFC300 with a spacing of 0.5 length units between the
channels.
1B.4.7 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified
as follows:
16 20 TA ST A30X30X6
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30 mm and a leg thickness of 6 mm. This
specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If
the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
17 21 TA RA A150X150X16
Note: Single angles must be specified with an RA (Single Angle w/Reverse Y-Z Axis) in order to
be designed to AS 4100. This is to ensure that the major and minor principal axes align with the
local member z and y axes respectively, similar to other section profiles.
In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For example,
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of 0.5
length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE sections
specified in this latter manner.
In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE followed by the
outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
22 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and inside diameter of 20 length units.
Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed on pipes specified in this latter
manner.
change the steel material through the input file or GUI for each file created
The nominal section capacity refers to the capacity of a cross-section to resists applied loads, and
accounts for cross-section yielding and local buckling effects. The nominal member capacity on the
other hand refers to the capacity of a member to resist applied loads, and includes checks for global
member buckling effects including Euler buckling, lateral-torsional buckling, etc.
24 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area Nt
section axial tension capacities are calculated (Cl.7.2). Through the use of the NSF parameter (see
Table 1B.1), you may specify the net section area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a
member based on these two limit states per Cl.7.1 and Cl.7.2 respectively of AS 4100. Eccentric end
connections can be taken into account using the KT correction factor, perCl.7.3. The f yield stress is
y
based on the minimum plate yield stress. Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for these
calculations.
Nominal member capacity, Nc, is a function of nominal section capacity and member slenderness
reduction factor (Cl.6.3.3). This value is calculated about both principal x and y axes. Here, you are
required to supply the value of b (Cl.6.3.3) through the ALBparameter (see Table 1B.1). The
effective length for the calculation of compressive strength may be provided through the use of the
parameters KY, KZ, LY, and LZ (see Table 1B.1).
1B.7.3 Bending
Bending capacities are calculated to AS 4100 Section 5. The allowable bending moment of members
is determined as the lesser of nominal section capacity and nominal member capacity (ref. Cl.5.1).
The nominal section moment capacity, M , is calculated about both principal x and y axes and is
s
the capacity to resist cross-section yielding or local buckling and is expressed as the product of the
yield stress of the material and the effective section modulus (ref. Cl.5.2). The effective section
modulus is a function of section type (i.e., compact, noncompact, or slender) and minimum plate
yield stress f . The nominal member capacity depends on overall flexural-torsional buckling of the
y
member (ref.Cl.5.3).
Note: For sections where the web and flange yield stresses (f
and f
respectively) are
y,web
y.flange
different, the lower of the two yield stresses is applied to both the web and flange to determine
the slenderness of these elements.
Member moment capacity, Mb , is calculated about the principal x axis only (ref. Cl.5.6). Critical
flange effective cross-section restraints and corresponding design segment and sub-segments are
used as the basis for calculating capacities.
1B.7.5 Shear
Section web shear capacity, Vv, is calculated per Cl.5.11, including both shear yield and shear
buckling capacities. Once the capacity is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross
section to the shear capacity of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Zaxes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 1B.1), the
section is considered to have failed under shear.
Table 1B.6-1 below highlights which shear capacities are calculated for different profile types.
Table 1B.3-Section Type Shear Checks
General Profile Type
I-SECTION
(i.e., parallel to minor
principal y-axis)
Australian
Section
WB, WC,
UB, UC
Shear Checks
T-SECTION
BT, CT
CHANNEL
PFC
ANGLE
EA, UA
No checks performed
TUBE
SHS, RHS
PIPE
CHS
Note: Only unstiffened web capacities are calculated. Stiffened webs are not considered. Bearing
capacities are not considered.
26 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
1B.7.6 Torsion
STAAD.Pro does not design sections or members for torsion for AS4100.
Default Value
Design
Scope
Description
Must be specified as
AUSTRALIAN to invoke
design per AS 4100 - 1998.
Design Code to follow.
See section 5.48.1 of the
Technical Reference
Manual.
ALB
2.0
ALM
0.0
Moment modification
factor (refer cl. 5.6.1.1)
If ALM is 0.0, it is
automatically calculated
based cl.5.6.1.1; otherwise
the input value is used.
Parameter
Name
Default Value
BEAM
Design
Scope
0.0
Description
DFF
Analytical
members
only
Deflection Length/
Maximum Allowable
local deflection.
DJ1
DJ2
DMAX
45.0 [in.]
Maximum allowable
depth (Applicable for
member selection)
DMIN
0.0 [in.]
Minimum required
depth (Applicable for
member selection)
FU
500.0 [MPa]
Ultimate strength of
steel.
FYLD
250.0 [MPa]
IST
28 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Design
Scope
Description
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LHT
Physical
members
only
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
0.0
MAIN
Parameter
Name
NSC
Default Value
Design
Scope
1.0
Description
NSF
PBRACE
1.0
None
PHI
0.9
RATIO
1.0
Permissible ratio of
actual load effect to the
design strength.
SGR
SKL
1.0
SKR
1.0
A lateral rotation
restraint factor given in
Table 5.6.3(3)
SKT
1.0
TRACK
0.0
Output detail
0.0 = report only
minimum design
results
1.0 = report design
strengths in addition
to TRACK 0.0 output
2.0 = provide full
details of design
30 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Design
Scope
Description
UNB
Member Length
Unsupported length in
bending compression of
the bottom flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
UNT
Member Length
Unsupported length in
bending compression of
the top flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
1B.8.1 Notes
a. DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 Deflection calculations
Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2 - DX1)2 + (DY2 - DY1)2 + (DZ2 - DZ1)2)
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end node, as the
case may be.
Note: Deflection calculations are not applicable to PMEMBERs.
a. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local
deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four
joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be
equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should
be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1
and DJ2 should be 4.
b. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length
SGR Value
Steel
Grade
Used
0 (Normal)
300
1 (High)
400
0 (Normal)
300
1 (High)
350
0 (Normal)
250
1 (High)
350
Note: If a value for theFYLDparameter has been specified, then that value will be used.
Otherwise, the SGR value will be used to determine the yeild strength and tensile strength
values for the steel. based on maximum thickness of the individual elements of the
32 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
section. Only for shear capacity calculation web thickness is used. Similarly, Tensile
Strength is determined either from FU parameter or from SGR parameter.
Caution: A check is introduced to see if yield stress is more than 450 MPa or not. If it is, a
warning is issued and the yield stress is set to 450 MPa.
The following example uses the Member design facility in STAAD.Pro. However, it is strongly
recommended to use the Physical member design capabilities for AS4100:
PARAMETER 1
CODE AUSTRALIAN
ALB 0.0 MEMBER ALL
ALM 1.13 MEMBER ALL
BEAM 1.0 MEMBER ALL
DFF 250.0 MEMBER ALL
DMAX 0.4 MEMBER ALL
DMIN 0.25 MEMBER ALL
FU 400.0 MEMBER ALL
FYLD 310.0 MEMBER ALL
IST 2.0 MEMBER ALL
KT 0.85 MEMBER ALL
KX 0.75 MEMBER ALL
KY 1.0 MEMBER ALL
LX 4.5 MEMBER ALL
LY 6.0 MEMBER ALL
MAIN 1.0 MEMBER ALL
NSC 0.9 MEMBER ALL
NSF 1.0 MEMBER ALL
PHI 0.9 MEMBER ALL
RATIO 0.9 MEMBER ALL
SGR 1.0 MEMBER ALL
SKT 1.0 MEMBER ALL
SKL 1.0 MEMBER ALL
SKR 1.0 MEMBER ALL
TRACK 2.0 MEMBER ALL
UNB 3.4 MEMBER ALL
UNT 6.8 MEMBER ALL
CHECK CODE MEMBER ALL
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking.
Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code
Checking command.
Note: Code checking cannot be performed on composite and prismatic sections.
Example of commands for code checking:
UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER
CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4
34 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Note: As per AS 4100 1.4, the TRACK 2.0 detailed level of output for PMEMBER Design uses x and
y subscripts to refer to major and minor principal axes respectively. These differ to STAAD.Pro
local member axes, where z and y refer to major and minor principal axes.
automated tensile stress (f ) and yield stress (f ) values based on plate thicknesses;
Thus, it is strongly recommended that PMEMBER Design be used, even for the design of single
analytical members.
STAAD.Pro Editor - Directly specify physical members in the input file. Refer to Section
5.16.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
Graphical Environment - Using the tools in the Steel Design toolbar, members can be
manually or automatically formed. Refer to Section 1.4 of the Graphical Environment manual
for additional information.
Note: When creating PMEMBERs for AS 4100, this must be performed in STAAD.Pros Modeling
mode. Do not use the Steel Design mode.
36 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Restraint Type
Most Stiff
FR
PR
Least Stiff
None
Once the effective restraints have been determined, the PMEMBER is divided into segments
bounded by F, P, FR, PR or U effective restraints. These segments are then further divided
into sub-segments by effective L restraints.
Note: Sub-segment lengths are not automatically checked to determine if they provide full lateral
restraint as per AS 4100 5.3.2.4.
For design of cantilevers, the free tip should have user-defined U restraints applied to both top
and bottom flanges.
Note: If the effective restraints for any load case consist of U or L restraints only, an error will
be reported.
General Format
PBRACE { TOP | BOTTOM } f1 r1 f2 r2 f52 r52 (PMEMB pmember-list)
Where:
f is a fraction of the PMEMBER length where restraint condition is being specified.
n
This value is any ratio between 0.0 and 1.0.
r is one of the possible restraint condition as in the following:
n
38 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Restraint
Type
Description
Fully
restrained
Partially
restrained
Laterally
restrained
Unrestrained
FR
Fully and
rotationally
restrained
PR
Partially and
rotationally
restrained
Example
PBRACE TOP 0.85 FR 0.33 PR 0.33 PR 0.25 F 0.75 L 0.5 PR 1.0 U 0.0 U
PBRACE BOTTOM 0.75 L 0.0 U 0.25 P 0.5 L 1.0 U PMEMB 3 7
Description
Refer to AS 4100 Section 5.5 for a full definition of the critical flange. Typically this will be the
compression flange, except for segments with U restraint at one end, then it will be the tension
flange (as is the case for cantilever portion at the end).
l
when gravity loads are dominant (i.e., negative local y-axis direction), the critical flange of a
segment shall be the top flange (i.e., tension).
when upward wind loads are dominant (i.e., positive local y-axis direction), the critical
flange shall be the bottom flange (i.e., tension).
Design physical members are divided into segments by F, P, FR, PR or U effective section
restraints. Segments are further broken down into sub-segments by L restraints, but only if the
L restraints are deemed to be effective. L restraints are only considered to be effective when
positioned on the critical flange between F, P, FR or FP restraints. If an L restraint is
positioned on the non-critical flange it shall be completely ignored. Further, if an L restraint is
positioned between a U and an F, P, FR or PR restraint, it shall be ignored (regardless of
whether it is on the critical or non-critical flange).
Design members must have either a F, P, FR, PR, or U restraint specified at both ends, for both
flanges.
l
If UNL is not specified, segment length is used as UNL and used as L in effective length
calculation as per 5.6.3.
If ALM i.e., _m is not provided, automatic calculation of ALM is done based on moments
within the segment.
If SKR i.e., Kr is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on table 5.6.3(3)
considering restraint conditions are the end of the segment. If FR or PR is found at only one
of the end, Kr is assumed to be 0.85; if FR or PR is found at both the ends, 0.70 is used as Kr.
If SKT i.e., Kt is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on Table 5.6.3(1)
considering end restraints of the segment and section geometric information and segment
length.
If SKL i.e., Kl is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on Table 5.6.3(2)
considering end restraints of the segment, Load Height Position parameter, LHT and shear
force variation within the segment.
Notes
a. If PMEMBER list is not provided, all the PMEMBERS are restrained by same configuration.
b. It is not necessary to provide the restraint locations in sequence as the program sorts them
automatically.
c. Unless specified, PMEMBER ends are assumed to be Fully Restrained (F).
d. While designing any section of the member, effective restraints are searched on each side of
the section along the critical flange.
40 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
e. The types of restraints applied to the top and bottom flanges at each location determines the
effective section restraints. These are outlined in the table below:
Table 1B.8-Restraint Meanings in Critical and Noncritical Flanges
Case
Flange
Restraint on
a Critical
Flange
Restraint on
a Non-Critical
Flange
Effective
Section
Restraint
Nothing
Nothing
None
P or F
Nothing or U
Nothing or U
P or F
PR or FR
Nothing or U
FR
Nothing or U
PR or FR
PR
L, P or F
L, P, F, FR or
PR
FR or PR
L, P, F, FR or
PR
FR
I
II
III
IV
Note: The critical flange can change for each load case considered.
PMEMBER
Design
Parameter
compression member
b
section constant per AS
4100 6.3.3.
ALB
moment
m
modification factor per
AS 4100 5.6.1.1.
ALM
Comments
Automated Design
Calculations
PMEMBER
Design
Parameter
Comments
FU
FYLD
IST
KT
LHT
PBRACE
SGR
SKT
SKL
k lateral rotation
r
restraint factor as per AS
4100 Table 5.6.3(3).
SKR
42 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
1B.12.6 Example
PARAMETER 1
CODE AUSTRALIAN
DMAX 0.4 PMEMBER ALL
DMIN 0.25 PMEMBER ALL
KX 0.75 PMEMBER ALL
KY 1.0 PMEMBER ALL
LX 4.5 PMEMBER ALL
LY 6.0 PMEMBER ALL
LHT 0.0 PMEMBER ALL
NSC 0.9 PMEMBER ALL
NSF 1.0 PMEMBER ALL
PBRACE BOTTOM 0.0 F 1.0 F PMEMBER ALL
PBRACE TOP 0.0 P 0.5 L 1.0 P PMEMBER ALL
SGR 0.0 PMEMBER ALL
TRACK 2.0 PMEMBER ALL
CHECK CODE PMEMBER ALL
44 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
2
British Codes
2 British Codes
46 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Default
Value
-
Description
BRACE
0.0
CLEAR
20 mm
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
ELY
1.0
ELZ
1.0
FC
30 N/mm 2
FYMAIN
FYSEC
MAX
MAIN
50mm
MINMAIN 8mm
MINSEC
8mm
MMAG
1.0
NSE
CTION
10
48 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Parameter
Name
SERV
Default
Value
0.0
Description
Serviceability checks:
0.0 = No serviceability check
performed.
1.0 = Perform serviceability check
for beams as if they were
continuous.
2.0 = Perform serviceability check
for beams as if they were simply
supported.
3.0 = Perform serviceability check
for beams as if they were cantilever
beams.
SFACE
0.0
SRA
0.0
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x 300mm width) and
the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular
with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear area areas (
AY & AZ ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also
note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate them from YD and
ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition above.
50 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
program will also consider the provisions of BS8110 - Part 2 -section 2.4. A table of shear and/or
combined torsion is then provided with critical shear.
Stirrups not bent up bars are assumed in the design. The example output below shows a sample
output of an actual reinforcement pattern developed by STAAD. The following annotations apply:
LEVEL
Serial number of the bar center which may contain one or more bar groups.
HEIGHT
Height of bar level from the soffit of the beam in relation to its local y axis.
BAR INFO
Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and their size.
FROM
Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcing bar.
TO
Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcing bar.
ANCHOR
States whether anchorage, either a hook or
(STA,END)
continuation, is needed at start (STA) or at the end (END).
The following is an example TRACK 2.0 beam design output:
====================================================================
B E A M
LEN -
N O.
1500. mm
13
D E S I G N
FY - 460.
FC - 30.
R E S U L T S SIZE -
300. X
FLEXURE
300. mm
LEVEL
HEIGHT
BAR INFO
FROM
TO
ANCHOR
mm
mm
mm
STA END
------------------------------------------------------------------1
2
29.
264.
4- 8
4- 8
MM
MM
0.0/
0.0/
0.0/
0.0/
0.0/
0.0/
0.0/
117.0/
117.0/
184.4
157.2
129.9
117.0
117.0
117.0
117.0
0.0
0.0
467.
0.
1500.
1158.
MOMENTS(+VE/-VE)
(KN-METER)
0.00/
0.00/
0.00/
0.00/
0.00/
0.00/
0.00/
2.15/
5.25/
19.71
16.80
13.89
10.98
8.07
5.16
2.25
0.00
0.00
NO
YES
YES
NO
LOAD(+VE/-VE)
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
1/
1/
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
1125.
1250.
1375.
1500.
B E A M
117.0/
117.0/
136.3/
165.3/
N O.
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
8.36/
11.46/
14.57/
17.67/
13 D E S I G N
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
R E S U L T S -
1/
1/
1/
1/
0
0
0
0
SHEAR
8J____
|
|
||=========================================================
|
| 4No8 H 264.
0.TO 1158
|
|
|
|
| 5*8 c/c187
|
|
|
5*8 c/c187
|
|
4No8 H |29. 467.TO 1500
|
|
|
====================================================||
|
|
|___________________________________________________________________________|
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
oooo
|
|
oooo
|
|
oooo
|
|
|
| 4T8
|
| 4T8
|
| 4T8
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 4T8
|
| 4T8
|
| 4T8
|
|
|
|
oooo
|
|
oooo
|
|
oooo
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|_______________|
|_______________|
|_______________|
|_______________|
N O.
FC -30. N/MM2
52 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
D E S I G N
SQRE SIZE -
R E S U L T S
300. X
300. MM,
940.
SQ. MM.
BAR CONFIGURATION
REINF PCT.
LOAD
LOCATION
---------------------------------------------------12
10 MM
1.047
1
EACH END
(PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS AT EACH FACE)
Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce Wood & Armer moments into the design
replacing the pure Mx, My moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to be
considered when designing the section. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered. SRA
set to -500 will assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle is
given in degrees measured anticlockwise (positive) from the element local x-axis to the
reinforcement bar. The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and shown in the design
format.
The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16 mm in both directions with the longitudinal
bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior face. Typical output is as follows:
ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY-BASED ON 16mm BARS
----------------------------------------MINIMUM AREAS ARE ACTUAL CODE MIN % REQUIREMENTS.
PRACTICAL LAYOUTS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
FY=460, 6No.16mm BARS AT 150mm C/C = 1206mm2/metre
FY=250, 4No.16mm BARS AT 250mm C/C = 804mm2/metre
ELEMENT
LONG. REINF
(mm2/m)
MOM-X /LOAD
(kN-m/m)
TRANS. REINF
(mm2/m)
MOM-Y /LOAD
(kN-m/m)
195.
229.
0.00 /
-11.71 /
0
1
195.
329.
0.00 /
-14.62 /
0
1
54 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Default
Value
460
Mpa
Description
30 Mpa
HMAX
36
VMIN
36
FC
HMIN
VMAX
EMIN
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
36
LMIN
LMAX
16
CLEAR
25 mm
EMAX
TWOLAYERED
KSLENDER
1.5
1. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface boundary node-to-node segments
will be subdivided into 12 fragments prior to finite element mesh generation.
2. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES command.
3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For instance, the
line 2 TO 5GEN PIN assigns pinned supports to all nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As the
node-to-node distances were previously subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12 command,
there will be an additional 11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all 13 nodes will be
assigned pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are not individually
accessible to the user. They are created by the program to enable the finite element mesh
generation and to allow application of boundary constraints.
4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE PROPERTY and
SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively.
5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START SHEARWALL DES and
END. The CODE command selects the design code that will be the basis for the design. For
British code the parameter is BRITISH. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST command is
followed by a list of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or shear
wall components.
56 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Design for in-plane bending (denoted by Mz in the shear wall force output)
Walls are assumed to be cantilever beams fixed at their base and carrying loads to the foundation.
Extreme compression fibre to centroid of tension (concentrated) reinforcement distance, d, is taken
as 0.8 horizontal length of the wall. Flexural design of the wall is carried out in accordance with
the provisions of clause no. 3.4.4. The flexural (concentrated vertical ) reinforcing is located at both
ends (edges) of the length of the wall. The edge reinforcement is assumed to be distributed over a
length of 0.2 times horizontal length on each side. This length is inclusive of the thickness of the
wall. Minimum reinforcements are according to table 3.25.
Design for in-plane shear (denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force output)
Limit on the nominal shear strength, v is calculated as per clause no. 3.4.5.2.
Nominal shear strength of concrete is computed as per table 3.8.
The design shear stress is computed as per clause no. 3.4.5.12 taking into consideration the effect of
axial load. The area of reinforcement is calculated and checked against the minimum area as per
clause no. 3.12.7.4.
Design for out-of-plane shear (denoted by Qy in the shear wall force output)
The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The design shear stress is calculated as per
3.4.5.2 and shear strength of concrete section is calculated as per table 3.8 considering vertical
reinforcement as tension reinforcement.
Shear reinforcements in the form of links are computed as per table 3.7 and the provisions of clause
3.12.7.5.
Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending (denoted by Mx in the shear wall force output)
The horizontal reinforcement already calculated from in-plane shear is checked against the whole
section subjected to out-of-plane bending and axial load. The axial load in this case is the in-plane
shear. The section is again designed as axially loaded column under uni-axial bending as per the
provisions of clause 3.8.4. Extra reinforcement in the form of horizontal bars, if necessary, is
reported.
2A.7.3 Example
The following partial example starts from the definition of shear wall and ends at the shear wall
design.
SET DIVISION 12
SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
SURFACE PROPERTY
1 TO 4 THI 18
SUPPORTS
1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 to 5 gen pin
6 to 10 gen pin
11 to 15 gen pin
19 to 16 gen pin
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 3150
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 8.68e-005
ALPHA 5.5e-006
58 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
EMIN 12
DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4
END
Note: If the sd1, ..., sdj or the od1, ..., odk list does not include all node-to-node
segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then the corresponding
division number is set to the default value (=10, or as previously input by the SET
DIVISION command).
Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set as follows:
SURFACE DIVISION X xd
SURFACE DIVISION Y yd
Where:
xd - number of divisions along X axis,
yd - number of divisions along Y axis.
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of the surface where output
is requested. The output is provided for sections located between division segments. For example,
if the number of divisions = 2, then the output will be produced for only one section (at the
center of the edge).
60 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
62 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
2B.1 General
2B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in BS5950:2000 is built around the concept of limit state design,
used today in most modern steel design codes. Structures are designed and proportioned taking
into consideration the limit states at which they become unfit for their intended use. Two major
categories of limit state are recognized - serviceability and ultimate. The primary considerations in
ultimate limit state design are strength and stability while that in serviceability limit state is
deflection. Appropriate safety factors are used so that the chances of limits being surpassed are
acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation of BS5950:2000, members are proportioned to resist the design loads
without exceeding the limit states of strength and stability. Accordingly, the most economic
section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. This procedure is controlled by the
designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type or other such
parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that code requirements for each
selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The complete B.S.C. steel tables for both hot rolled and hollow sections are built into the program
for use in specifying member properties as well as for the actual design process. See section 2B.4 for
information regarding the referencing of these sections. In addition to universal beams, columns,
joists, piles, channels, tees, composite sections, beams with cover plates, pipes, tubes, and angles,
there is a provision for user provided tables.
STAAD.Pro 2006 and later have the additional option to design tapered I shaped (wide flange)
beams according to Annex G of BS5950. See Section 2B.13 for a complete description.
RAangle
64 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Almost all BSI steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the sections available in
the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface.
Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections available:
2B.4.3 Channels
All rolled steel channel sections from the BSI table have been incorporated in STAAD. The
designation is similar to that of the joists. The same designation scheme as in BSI tables may be
used with the weight omitted.
10 TO 15 TA ST CH305X102
55 57 59 61 TA ST CH178X76
2B.4.6 Angles
All equal and unequal angles are available for analysis. Two types of specifications may be used to
describe an angle section, either a standard, ST specification or reversed angle, RA specification.
Note, however, that only angles specified with an RA specification can be designed.
The standard angle section is specified as follows:
15 20 25 TA ST UA200X150X18
This specification may be used when the local STAAD z-axis corresponds to the V-V axis specified
in the steel tables. If the local STAAD y-axis corresponds to the V-V axis in the tables, type
specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
35 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18
(specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units)
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
66 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Example:
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB160808.0
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and not by
any table designations.
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
(a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units)
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE sections specified this
way.
2B.5.1 AxialTension
In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity of the
member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of the effective area as
outlined in Section 4.6 of the code. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member per
this procedure, based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but
may be altered by changing the input value - see Table 2B.1), proceeding with member selection or
code check accordingly. BS5950 does not have any slenderness limitations for tension members.
2B.5.2 Compression
Compression members must be designed so that the compression resistance of the member is
greater than the axial compressive load. Compression resistance is determined according to the
compressive strength, which is a function of the slenderness of the gross section, the appropriate
design strength and the relevant strut characteristics. Strut characteristics take into account the
considerable influence residual rolling and welding stresses have on column behavior. Based on
data collected from extensive research, it has been determined that sections such as tubes with low
residual stresses and Universal Beams and Columns are of intermediate performance. It has been
found that I-shaped sections are less sensitive to imperfections when constrained to fail about an
axis parallel to the flanges. These research observations are incorporated in BS5950 through the use
of four strut curves together with a selection of tables to indicate which curve to use for a
particular case. Compression strength for a particular section is calculated in STAAD according to
the procedure outlined in Annex C of BS5950 where compression strength is seen to be a function
of the appropriate Robertson constant (representing Strut Curve) corresponding Perry factor,
limiting slenderness of the member and appropriate design strength.
A departure from BS5950:1990, generally compression members are no longer required to be
checked for slenderness limitations, however, this option can be included by specifying a MAIN
parameter. Note, a slenderness limit of 50 is still applied on double angles checked as battened
struts as per clause 4.7.9.
2B.5.3 AxiallyLoadedMembersWithMoments
In the case of axially loaded members with moments, the moment capacity of the member must be
calculated about both principal axes and all axial forces must be taken into account. If the section is
plastic or compact, plastic moment capacities will constitute the basic moment capacities subject to
an elastic limitation. The purpose of this elastic limitation is to prevent plasticity at working load.
For semi-compact or slender sections, the elastic moment is used. For plastic or compact sections
with high shear loads, the plastic modulus has to be reduced to accommodate the shear loads. The
STAAD implementation of BS5950 incorporates the procedure outlined in section 4.2.5 and 4.2.6 to
calculate the appropriate moment capacities of the section.
For members with axial tension and moment, the interaction formula as outlined in section 4.8.2 is
applied based on effective tension capacity.
For members with axial compression and moment, two principal interaction formulae must be
satisfied Cross Section Capacity check (4.8.3.2) and the Member Buckling Resistance check (4.8.3.3
). Three types of approach for the member buckling resistance check have been outlined in
BS5950:2000 - the simplified approach (4.8.3.3.1), the more exact approach (4.8.3.3.2) and Annex I1
for stocky members. As noted in the code, in cases where neither the major axis nor the minor axis
moment approaches zero, the more exact approach may be more conservative than the simplified
approach. It has been found, however, that this is not always the case and STAAD therefore
68 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
performs both checks, comparing the results in order that the more appropriate criteria can be
used.
Additionally the equivalent moment factors, m m and m , can be specified by the user or
x y
yx
calculated by the program.
Members subject to biaxial moments in the absence of both tensile and compressive axial forces are
checked using the appropriate method described above with all axial forces set to zero. STAAD also
carries out cross checks for compression only, which for compact/plastic sections may be more
critical. If this is the case, COMPRESSION will be the critical condition reported despite the
presence of moments.
2B.5.4 Shear
A member subjected to shear is considered adequate if the shear capacity of the section is greater
than the shear load on the member. Shear capacity is calculated in STAAD using the procedure
outlined in section 4.2.3, also 4.4.5 and Annex H3 if appropriate, considering the appropriate shear
area for the section specified.
A2
4(B t )
2D(B t )
1 n
+ n 1
A
For n 2t(B-2t)/A
S ry =
A2
2B(D t )
1 n
+ n 1
A
4(D t )
Default Value
Description
Must be specified as BS5950
CODE
AD
Depth at end/2
BEAM
3.0
70 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
Deflection check method. See Note 1
below.
CAN
CB
DFF
DJ1
None
(Mandatory for
deflection check,
TRACK 4.0)
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX *
100.0cm
DMIN *
0.0 cm
ESTIFF
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
0.0
LEG
Maximum of Lyy
LVV *
and Lzz
(Lyy is a term
used
by BS5950)
LY *
Member Length
LZ *
Member Length
MLT
1.0
MX
1.0
MY
1.0
MYX
1.0
NSF
1.0
72 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
Transverse stiffener spacing (a in
Annex H1)
PNL *
0.0
0.0 = Infinity
Any other value used in the
calculations.
PY *
Set according to
steel grade (SGR)
MAIN
0.0
RATIO
1.0
SAME**
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
Identify Section type for section
classification
0.0 = Rolled Section
SBLT
0.0
1.0 = Built up Section
2.0 = Cold formed
section
SWAY
none
SGR
0.0
TB
0.0
0 = Mc limit 1.5pyZ
1= Mc limit 1.2 pyZ
Output details
0.0 = Suppress all
member capacity info.
TRACK
0.0
UNF
74 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
1.0
Parameter
Name
UNL *
Default Value
Member Length
Description
Unsupported Length for calculating
Lateral Torsional Buckling resistance
moment section 4.3.6.7 of BS5950.
Weld Type
1.0 closed
WELD
2.0 open
2B.6.1 Notes
1. CAN, DJ1, and DJ2 Deflection
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The
first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local
displacement. Local displacement is described in Section 5.44 of the Technical
Reference Manual.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection.
Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node
defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly,
(DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the
member.
Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2 - DX1)2 + (DY2 - DY1)2 + (DZ2 - DZ1)2)
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end node,
as the case may be.
Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta
Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff
b. If CAN = 0, deflection length is defined as the length that is used for calculation of
local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
Deflection Length will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some
situations, the Deflection Length may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and
DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four
joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be
equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should
be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1
and DJ2 should be 4.
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length
and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not perform a
deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no default value for
DFF.
e. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for
steel design.
2. LEG follows the requirements of BS5950 table 28. This table concerns the fastener restraint
conditions for angles, double angles, tee sections and channels for slenderness. The following
values are available:
Table 2B.2- LEG Parameter values
Clause
Bold
Configuration
Leg
LEG
Parameter
short leg
1.0
long leg
3.0
short leg
0.0
long leg
2.0
(a) - 2 bolts
4.7.10.2
Single Angle
(b) - 1 bolts
76 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Clause
Bold
Configuration
Leg
LEG
Parameter
short leg
3.0
long leg
7.0
short leg
2.0
long leg
6.0
long leg
1.0
short leg
5.0
long leg
0.0
short leg
4.0
(a) - 2 bolts
(b) - 1 bolts
4.7.10.3 Double
Angles
(c) - 2 bolts
(d) - 1 bolts
(a) - 2 or more rows of bolts
1.0
0.0
1.0
0.0
4.7.10.4 Channels
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified in BS 5950
table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the member. To define the
appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned to the member.
The following list indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the BS5950
connection definition:
Clause 4.7.10.2 Single Angle:
a. 2 Bolts: Short leg = 1.0, Long Leg = 3.0
b. 1 Bolt: Short Leg = 0.0, Long Leg = 2.0
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b as well as
the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as:
La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ
The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the compression strength
p for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified angles). The
c
maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to calculate the compression strength
p for the stronger principal axis.
c
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not
appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two
principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25. In
addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical Reference Manual section 5.19)
an eleventh value, r , should be supplied at the end of the ten existing values corresponding
vv
to the radius of gyration of the single angle making up the pair.
3. PY Steel Design Strength
The design parameter PY should only be used when a uniform design strength for an entire
structure or a portion thereof is required. Otherwise the value of PY will be set according to
the stipulations of BS5950 table 9 in which the design strength is seen as a function of cross
sectional thickness for a particular steel grade (SGR parameter) and particular element
considered. Generally speaking this option is not required and the program should be
allowed to ascertain the appropriate value.
4. UNL, LY, and LZ Relevant Effective Length
The values supplied for UNL, LY and LZ should be real numbers greater than zero in current
units of length. They are supplied along with or instead of UNF, KY and KZ (which are
factors, not lengths) to define lateral torsional buckling and compression effective lengths
respectively. Please note that both UNL or UNF and LY or KY values are required even
though they are often the same values. The former relates to compression flange restraint for
lateral torsional buckling while the latter is the unrestrained buckling length for
compression checks.
5. TRACK Control of Output Formats
When the TRACK parameter is set to 0.0, 1.0, or 2.0, member capacities will be printed in
design related output (code check or member selection) in kilonewtons per square meter.
TRACK 4.0 causes the design to carry out a deflection check, usually with a different load
list to the main code check. The members that are to be checked must have the parameters
DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 set.
78 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Additionally for the MLT parameter, the joint can be defined as having the upper flange
restrained (positive local Y) with the a U setting or the lower flange restrained (negative
local Y) with a L setting.
For example, consider a series of 5 beam elements as a single continuous member as shown
below:
To enable the steel design, the beam needs to be defined as a group, called MainBeam:
START GROUP DEFINITION
MEMBER
_MainBeam 11 2 38 12 3
END GROUP DEFINITION
Note: This can be done in the User Interface by selecting Tools > Create New Group.
Therefore, this 5 beam member has 6 joints such that:
Joint 1 = Node 3
Joint 2 = Node 1
Joint 3 = Node 33
Joint 4 = Node 14
Joint 5 = Node 7
Joint 6 = Node 2
a. Consider MX, MY and MYX
Say that this member has been restrained in its major axis (local Y) only at the ends.
In the minor axis (local Z) it has been restrained at the ends and also at node number
33 (joint 3). For local flexural buckling, it has only been restrained at its ends.
Hence:
For the major axis, local Y axis:
MX _MainBeam J1 J6
For the minor axis, local Z axis:
MY _ MainBeam J1 J3 J6
For the lateral flexural buckling, local X axis:
MYX _ MainBeam J1 J6
b. Consider MLT
Say that this member has been restrained at its ends against lateral torsional buckling and
the top flange has been restrained at node number 33 (joint 3) and only the lower flange at
node number 7, (joint 5). Hence:
MLT _MainBeam J1 T3 L5 J6
To split the beam into two buckling lengths for L at joint 14:
y
MY _groupname J1 J4 J6
7. SWAY Sway Loadcase
This parameter is used to specify a load case that is to be treated as a sway load case in the
context of clause 4.8.3.3.4. This load case would be set up to represent the k
M
amp s
mentioned in this clause and the steel design module would add the forces from this load
case to the forces of the other load case it is designed for.
Note that the load case specified with this parameter will not be designed as a separate load
case. The following is the correct syntax for the parameter:
Parameter
Default Value
Description
Name
SWAY
(load case
number)
ALL
MEMBER (member list)
_(group name)
Example
SWAY 5 MEM 1 to 10
SWAY 6 _MainBeams
80 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Specify the load cases to be considered in the design; the default is all load cases.
Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection along with the list of
members.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design
requirements.
fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected will be of the same
type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be
constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits the maximum and minimum depth
of the members.
Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the same limitations as
defined in section 2B.8 Code Checking.
Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created table, will be
limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as prismatic
or as above limitations for code checking.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of
the Member Selection command.
82 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
LOCATION
specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design
forces govern.
TRACK
If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table and will
print the allowable bending capacities in compression (MCY & MCZ) and reduced
moment capacities (MRY & MRZ), allowable axial capacity in compression (PC) and
tension (PT) and shear capacity (PV). TRACK 2.0 will produce the design results as
shown in section 2B.9.
An example of each TRACK setting follows:
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS
179.66 C
BS-4.3.6
0.00
0.769
334.46
3
0.00
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS
BS-4.3.6
0.769
3
179.66 C
0.00
334.46
0.00
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB
1 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 |
|MCZ= 519.4 MCY= 234.3 PC= 2455.9 PT=
0.0 MB= 435.0 PV= 600.1|
| BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT = 1.00, mx = 1.00, my = 1.00, myx = 1.00 |
| PZ= 3975.00
FX/PZ =
0.05
MRZ= 516.9
MRY= 234.3
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS
BS-4.3.6
0.769
3
179.66 C
0.00
334.46
0.00
=======================================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel
= S 275
Modulus of elasticity
= 210 kN/mm2
Design Strength (py)
= 265 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)
Member Length =
600.00
Gross Area = 150.00 Net Area =
127.50
Eff. Area =
150.00
Moment of inertia
Plastic modulus
Elastic modulus
Effective modulus
Shear Area
DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m)
Section Class
Squash Load
Axial force/Squash load
:
:
:
:
:
z-z axis
27700.004
1960.000
1761.526
1960.000
103.471
y-y axis
9060.001
895.000
589.460
895.000
37.740
BS5950-1/2000
:
PLASTIC
:
3975.00
:
0.045
z-z axis
3551.7
519.4
516.9
1645.2
y-y axis
2455.9
234.3
234.3
600.1
y-y axis
77.203
7.772
6.000
Compression Capacity
Moment Capacity
Reduced Moment Capacity
Shear Capacity
LTB
LTB
mLT
Mlt
:
:
:
:
435.00,
:
:
myx =
My =
6.000
1.00
0.00
VY
VZ
MZ
MY
85.6
85.6
334.5
85.6
0.0
334.5
0.0
334.5
0.0
334.5
0.0
334.5
0.0
considered in the design.
84 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
The section is then checked for shear buckling resistance using clause 4.4.5.2 - Simplified method
and the result is included in the ratio checks.
75 25 4 25 4
You must specify the effective length of unrestrained compression flange using the parameter UNL.
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in accordance with
BS 5950-1:2000. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION
command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and
a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of
detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
The beam is designed as other wide flange beams apart from the Lateral Torsional Buckling check
which is replaced by the Annex G.2.2. check.
P is the compression resistance from 4.7.4 for a slenderness . , see G.2.3, based on
c
TC y
the properties of the minimum depth of cross-section within the segment length L
y=
2
2
1
+
(2a
/
h
)
+
0.05(
/
x
)
s
0.5
= Ly/ry
Where:
a is the distance between the reference axis and the axis of restraint,
h is the distance between the shear centers of the flanges;
s
4a / h s
vt =
2
2
1
+
(2a
/
h
)
+
0.05(
/
x
)
Where:
86 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
3
x 9
D max
D min
2/ 3
Where:
D
D
max
min
is the maximum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure G.3;
is the minimum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure G.3;
88 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Default
Value
Description
ESTIFF
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
90 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
1.0
Description
NSF
1.0
PY
RATIO
SBLT
1
0.0
SGR
0.0
TRACK
1.0
UNL
Member
Length
WET
0.0
2C.7.2 I Section
The same is true for ISECTION definition in user table.
2C.7.3 Example
UNIT CM
WIDE FLANGE
C45752
-66.5 44.98 .76 15.24 1.09 21345 645 21.3 34.185 33.223
150 150 30 10
ISECTION
PG9144
-92.05 2.15 92.05 42.05 3.66 42.05 3.66 197.9 153.9 1730
40 40 12 1
The larger British sections have been coded as USER TABLES under wide flange and are
available on request to any existing user. Please note however that composite design is not
available in this portion of STAAD.
92 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
Description
FC
30
N/mm 2
CLEAR
20 mm
0.0
SRA
TEMP
CRACK *
30C
0.2 mm
94 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
96 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the British code BS 5950-5:1998
Structural use of steelwork in building - Part 5: Code of practice for design of cold formed thin
gauge sections . The program allows design of single (non-composite) members in tension,
compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. Cold work of forming strengthening
effects have been included as an option.
Design of members per BS 5950-1:2000 requires the STAAD UK Super Code SELECTCode Pack.
Z with Lips
Pipe
Tube
Shape assignment may be done using the General |Property page of the graphical user interface
(GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file.
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section
properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are used
in the design stage, as applicable.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking.
Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code
Checking command.
Pt = Aepy
Where:
A is the net area An determined in accordance with cl.3.5.4
e
98 STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 6)
and
My/Mcy 1
Where
F is the applies tensile strength
t
P is the tensile capacity determined in accordance with clause 7.2.1 of the subject code
t
M ,M ,M ,M
z
cz
cy
PEPcs
+
PEPcs
For Sections symmetrical about a single axis and which are not subject to torsional flexural
buckling, the buckling resistance under axial load, Pc, may be obtained from the following
equation as per clause 6.2.4 of the subject code
Pc =
M c Pc
(M c +Pce s )
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clauses.
Where:
= (PE/PTF) when PE >PTF
= 1, otherwise
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clause.
2E.3.6 Overall buckling check as per clause 6.4.3 of the subject code
For Beams not subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be satisfied
Fc
Pc
Mz
C bxM cz 1
Fc
P Ez
My
F
C byM cy 1 c
P Ey
For Beams subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be satisfied
Fc
Pc
Mz
Mb
My
F
C byM cy 1 c
P Ey
M is the moment capacity in bending about the local Z axis in the absence of F and
cz
c
M , as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
y
M is the moment capacity in bending about the local Y axis, in the absence of F and
cy
c
M ,as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
z
P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the local Z axis
Ez
P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the local Y axis
Ey
C ,C
bz
by
are taken as unity unless their values are specified by the user
M , M , and M are calculated from clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 in the manner described herein
cz
cy
b
below.
Mcz = Szz x po
Mcy = Syyx po
D
po = 1.13 0.0019 w
t
Ys
280
p y
Where
M is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis
cz
p is the limiting stress for bending elements under stress gradient and should not
o
greater then design strength p
y
For unrestrained beams the applied moment based on factored loads should not be greater than
the smaller of the bending moment resistance of the section , M , and the buckling resistance
c
moment of the beam, M
b
Mb =
ME M y
B +
B ME M y
Mc
The average shear stress should not exceed the lesser of the shear yield strength, p or the shear
v
buckling strength, q as stipulated in clause 5.4.3 of the subject code.
cr
Default Value
BS5950 COLD
Description
Design Code to follow.
See section 5.48.1 of the
Technical Reference Manual.
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
BEAM
1.0
CMZ
1.0
Coefficient of equivalent
uniform bending C . See
b
BS:5950-5:1998,5.6. Used for
Combined axial load and
bending design.
CMY
1.0
Coefficient of equivalent
uniform bending C . See
b
BS:5950-5:1998,5.6. Used for
Combined axial load and
bending design.
CWY
1.0
Parameter Name
FLX
Default Value
Description
FU
430 MPa
FYLD
250 MPa
KX
1.0
KY
1.0
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
KZ
1.0
LX
Member length
LY
Member length
LZ
Member length
Parameter Name
MAIN
Default Value
0
Description
Specify the design for
slenderness against the
maximum slenderness as per
Clause 6.2.2:
0 Do not check
slenderness ratio
1 Check
members
resisting normal
loads (180)
2 - Check
members
resisting selfweight and wind
loads (250)
3 - Check
members
resisting reversal
of stress (350)
NSF
DMAX
1.0
2540.0
cm.
RATIO
1.0
Parameter Name
TRACK
Default Value
Description
2E.5.1 Solution
A. Bending Check
As per Clause 5.2.2.2 of BS 5950 Part 5 the limiting compressive
stress, p , for stiffened webs is given by the minimum of
o
po = 1.13 0.0019 w
t
Ys
280
p y
ME M y
B +
B ME M y
Mc
Where:
The Yield moment of section is given by
MY = Szz po = 9.19(10)6 Nmm
The elastic buckling resistance moment as per clause 5.6.2.2 is calculated to be
ME = 4.649(10)6 Nmm
And
B = [My +(1 +)ME]/2
So that
B = [9.19(10)6 + (1 +0.0)4.649(10)6 ]/2 = 2.325(10)10
Which yields
4.649(10 ) 6 9.19(10 ) 6
Mb =
10
2.325(10 ) +
B. Compression Check
102
= 9.98(10 )6 N mm
2.325(10 )
4.649(10 ) 9.19(10 )
PEPcs
= 153, 782N
PEPcs
For Channel section (being singly symmetric), Buckling Resistance as per clause 6.2.4 is
Pc =
M c Pc
(M c +Pce s )
Where:
The limiting compressive moment, M , in the relevant directionis equal to 9.19(10)6
c
Nmm,as calculated above
And the distance, e , of the geometric neutral axis of the gross cross section and that of the
s
effective cross section is equal to 38.24 m
So that,
6
Pc =
= 93, 788.7N
Mz
Mb
My
F
C byM cy 1 c
P Ey
Mz
M cz
My
M cy
3, 436.75
457.698(379.212 )
2.15(10 ) 6
9.19(10 ) 6
19, 755.3
1.81(10 ) 6
= 0.2647
Fc
Pc
Mz
C bxM cz 1
Fc
P Ez
My
F
C byM cy 1 c
P
Ey
= 0.2773
D. Shear Check as per clause 5.4.2 and 5.4.3
pv = 0.6py = 0.6(379.212) = 227.52 N/mm2
qcr = (1000t/D)2 = (10001.8/170)2 = 112.11 N/mm2
Pv = Amin(pv, qcr)
Shear resistance Y = 33,579.4 N
Shear resistance Z = 21,148.6 N
Shear Ratio Y = 5,627.72/33,579.4 = 0.1675
Shear Ratio Z = 5,627.72/21,148.6 = 0.0031
E. Shear Check with Bending as per clause 5.5.2
Shear with bending on Z
(Fv/Pv)2 + (Mz/Mcz)2 = (5,627.72/33,579.4)2 +[2.15106 /(9.19106 )]2 = 0.08327
Shear with bending on Y
(Fv/Pv)2 + (My/Mcy)2 = (67.114/21,148.6)2 +[19,755.3/(3.46106 )]2 = 0.000043
2E.5.2 Comparison
Table 2E.2-Comparison for verification problem
Criteria
Hand
STAAD.Pro
Calculation
Result
Difference
0.0366
0.037
none
0.2773
0.278
none
Bending Z ratio
0.235
0.236
none
Bending Y ratio
0.0057
0.006
none
0.241
0.241
none
Shear Z ratio
0.1675
0.168
none
Shear Y ratio
0.0031
0.003
none
Criteria
Hand
STAAD.Pro
Calculation
Result
Difference
0.08327
0.084
none
0.000043
0.000
none
2 4 FZ -0.6
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
UNIT KGS CM
PRINT JOINT DISP LIST 1 4 16
PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS
PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 3 24 28
UNIT KIP INCH
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISI
FYLD 55 ALL
CWY 1 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 20 21
PARAMETER 2
CODE BS5950 COLD
TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 19 28 TO 31
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 2
FINISH
2E.5.4 Output
The excerpts from the design output for member number 1 are as follows:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (BS5950-5-v1.1)
***********************
UNITS : MM, KN, KNM, MPA
------------------------------------------------------------------------------| MEMBER#
1 SECTION: 170CLHS56X18
LEN:
609.60 LOCATION:
609.60 |
| STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.278 GOV.MODE: 6.4-Bend + Compress GOV.LOAD:
1
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
MATERIAL DATA:
Yield strength of steel
Ultimate tensile strength
:
:
379.21 N/mm2
430.00 N/mm2
:
:
:
:
170CLHS56X18
60.96
5.45
Net Area (Ae):
z-z axis
y-y axis
237.27
21.93
235.46
19.42
27.85
5.20
27.55
10.42
:
:
:
z-z axis
93.70
9.17
21.00
DESIGN DATA:
y-y axis
3.47
33.50
9.17
COMBINATION
Compression ratio - Axial
RATIO
0.037
4.58
BS-6.4
Bend-Compression ratio
0.278
BS-5.1
Bending Ratio - Z
0.236
BS-5.1
Bending Ratio - Y
0.006
BS-5.1
0.241
BS-5.4
Shear Ratio - Z
0.168
BS-5.4
Shear Ratio - Y
0.003
BS-5.5.2
0.084
BS-5.5.2
0.000
3
Canadian Codes
3 Canadian Codes
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth and 300mm width) and
the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular
with a 300mm diameter
multiplied before beginning member design. This second procedure allows slenderness to be
considered in accordance with Clause 10.14 of the code.
Note: STAAD does not factor loads automatically for concrete design. All the proper factored
loads must be provided by the user before the ANALYSIS specification.
While performing a P-Delta analysis, all load cases must be defined as primary load cases. If the
effects of separate load cases are to be combined, it should be done either by using the REPEAT
LOAD command or by specifying the load information of these individual loading cases under one
single load case. Usage of the LOAD COMBINATION command will yield incorrect results for P-Delta
Analysis in STAAD.Pro.
Default
Value
Description
CLB
40mm
CLS
40mm
CLT
40mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0 Face of
Support
FC
30 N/mm 2
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
FYMAIN
400N/mm 2
FYSEC
400 N/mm 2
MAXMAIN
Number 55
bar
MINMAIN
Number 10
bar
MINSEC
Number 10
bar
MMAG
1.0
NSE
CTION
12
REINF
0.0
SFACE
0.0
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
as the effective depth + SFACE at the start, and effective depth + EFACE at the end. The load case
which gives rise to the highest stirrup area for shear & torsion is chosen as the critical one. The
calculations are performed assuming 2-legged stirrups will be provided. The additional longitudinal
steel area required for torsion is reported.
The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams
subjected to torsion.
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My using the same principles as those for beams in
flexure. The width of the beam is assumed to be unity for this purpose. These moments are
obtained from the element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual). The
reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the
reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The effective
depth is calculated assuming #10 bars are provided. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLT, and CLB listed
in Table 3A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 3A.1 are not
applicable to slab design. The output consists only of area of steel required. Actual bar arrangement
is not calculated because an element most likely represents just a fraction of the total slab area.
Figure 3A.1 - Element moments: Longitudinal (L) and Transverse (T)
in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more
information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual.
3B.4.3 S, M, HP shapes
In addition to welded wide flanges and regular wide flanges, other I shaped sections like S, M and
HP shapes are also available. The designation scheme is identical to that listed in the CSA tables.
While specifying the sections, it should be remembered that the portion after the decimal point
should be omitted. Thus, M310X17.6 should be specified as M310X17 and S180X22.8 should be
specified as S180X22. Examples illustrating specifications of these shapes are provided below.
10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST S510X98
45 TO 55 TA ST M150X6
88 90 96 TA ST HP310X79
Note that the specification SP after the section designation is used for providing the spacing. The
spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
3B.4.6 Angles
To specify angles, the angle name is preceded by the letter L. Thus, a 200X200 angle with a 25mm
thickness is designated as L200X200X25. The following examples illustrate angle specifications.
75 TO 95 TA ST L100X100X8
33 34 35 TA ST L200X100X20
Note that the above specification is for standard angles. In this specification, the local z-axis (see
Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y-Y axis shown in the CSA table.
Another common practice of specifying angles assumes the local y-axis to correspond to the Y-Y
axis. To specify angles in accordance with this convention, the reverse angle designation facility has
been provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting the word ST with the word RA.
Refer to the following example for details.
10 TO 15 TA RA L55X35X4
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles is shown in Fig. 2.6 of the STAAD
Technical Reference manual.
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of 125X75X6 angles with a
spacing of 2.5 length units.
3B.4.8 Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T specification instead of
ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for width), and TH
(for thickness) specifications.
For example:
100 TO 200 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
will describe a tube with a depth of 8 in., width of 6 in. and a wall thickness of 0.5 inches. Note
that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in current length unit.
In addition to sections listed in the CSA tables, circular hollow sections may be specified by using
the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter) specifications. For example:
70 TO 90 TA ST PIPE OD 10.0 ID 9.0
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 10 length units and inside diameter of 9.0 length
units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters must be provided in terms of current
length unit.
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian shapes
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KNS
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 17 160 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 16
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES CANADIAN
* W SHAPES
1 TA ST W250X18
* WW SHAPES
2 TA ST WW700X185
* S SHAPES
3 TA ST S200X27
* M SHAPES
4 TA ST M130X28
* HP SHAPES
5 TA ST HP310X132
* MC CHANNELS
6 TA ST MC150X17
* C CHANNELS
7 TA ST C180X18
* DOUBLE CHANNELS
8 TA D C250X37 SP 1.0
* ANGLES
9 TA ST L55X35X5
* REVERSE ANGLES
10 TA RA L90X75X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES, LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
11 TA LD L100X90X6 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLES, SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
12 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB120807
* TUBES
14 TA ST TUBE DT 16.0 WT 8.0 TH 0.8
* PIPES
15 TA ST PIP273X6.3
* PIPES
16 TA ST PIPE OD 16.0 ID 13.0
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
section class. STAAD.Pro determines the section classification for the standard shapes and user
specified shapes.
Note: The design of Class 4 sections requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or
higher. Otherwise, design is performed for sections that fall into the category of Class 1,2 or 3
sections only.
3B.6.1 Nomenclature
A = Area.
A = Effective area.
e
A = Area of flange.
f
A = Area of web.
w
F = Yield strength.
y
ye
= Effective yield stress of section in compression to account for elastic local buckling.
W = Web thickness.
= Non-dimensional slenderness parameter in column formula.
= Effective non-dimensional slenderness parameter in column formula considering effective
ye
yield stress.
= Resistance factor
Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause 13.3 of the code. The
equations presented in this section of the code assume that the compressive resistance is a function
of the compressive strength of the gross section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as
well as the slenderness factor (KL/r ratios). The effective length for the calculation of compression
resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KT, KY, KZ, LT, LY, and LZ (see Table
3B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity calculations are :
1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members, the axial
compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is calculated from Cl.13.3.1 using
the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ and LZ are
applicable for this.
2. For single angles, which are frame members not subjected to any bending or truss members,
the axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling and local buckling of
thin legs is calculated using the rules of the AISC - LRFD code, 2nd ed., 1994. The reason for
this is that the Canadian code doesnt provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value.
The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this.
3. The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking flexural-torsional buckling into
account. The rules of Appendix D, page 1-109 of CAN/CSA-S16-01are used for this purpose.
Parameters KT and LT may be used to provide the effective length factor and effective length
value for flexural-torsional buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling capacity is computed for
single channels, single angles, Tees and Double angles.
4. The variable n in Cl.13.3.1 is assumed as 2.24 for WWF shapes and 1.34 for all other shapes.
5. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections with axial
compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a), 13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are applied.
For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a), K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.)
For Class 4 members subjected to axial compression, factored compressive resistance should be
determined by either of the following equations.
Cr= Ae Fy (1+2n )-1n
a.
Where:
n = 1.34
= (Fy/Fe )
Fe=(2 E)/(KL/r)2
Ae is calculated using reduced element widths meeting the maximum width to thickness
ratio specified in Table 1.
Effective width required for the calculation of effective area Ae, for different section shapes
are as follows.
l
For flanges of I-section, T-section and channel section and legs of angle section
be= 200t/(Fy )
b.
ye = (Fye/F_e )
Fe=(2 E)/(KL/r)2
With an effective yield stress, F , determined from the maximum width (or diameter)-toye
thickness ratio meeting the limit specified in Table 1.
Following are the expressions for effective yield stress for different shaped section.
l
2. For single angles, the bending capacities are calculated for the principal axes. The
specifications of Section 5, page 6-283 of AISC-LRFD 1994, 2nd ed., are used for this purpose
because the Canadian code doesnt provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value.
3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric shapes such as
Tees and Double angles, CAN/CSA-S16-01 stipulates in Clause 13.6(d), page 1-31, that a
rational method, such as that given in SSRCs Guide to Stability Design Criteria of Metal
Structures, be used. Instead, STAAD uses the rules of Section 2c, page 6-55 of AISC-LRFD
1994, 2nd ed.
A h
M r = M r 1 0.0005 w
Af w
1, 900
Mf /s
Where Mr = factored moment resistance as determined by Clause 13.5 or 13.6 but not to
exceed My = factored moment resistance for Class 3 sections = My
If axial compressive force is present in addition to the moment, modified moment resistance
should be as follows.
1 0.65Cf / (C y )
A h
M r = M r 1 0.0005 w 1, 900
Af w
Mf / s
Cy = A Fy
S = Elastic section modulus of steel section.
iii. For sections whose webs meet the requirements of Class 3 and whose flanges exceed the
limit of Class 3, the moment resistance shall be calculated as
Mr = Se Fy
Where:
S = effective section modulus determined using effective flange width.
e
For I-section, T-section, Channel section, effective flange width and for Angle section,
effective length width
be= 200 t/(Fy )
But shall not exceed 60 t
M r = 1.15M y1
0.28M y
Mu
For I-section, T-section, Channel section, effective flange width and for Angle section,
effective length width
be= 200t/(Fy )
But shall not exceed 60t.
This clause is applicable only for I shaped and Channel shaped section as there is no guide line in
the code for other sections.
equations exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (See "Design
Parameters" on page 134), the member is considered to have failed under the loading condition.
3B.6.5 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 13.4 of the
code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear
resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or
the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section is considered
to have failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the web be within a
certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 1-29 of CAN/CSA-S16-01). Checks for safety in shear are performed
only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users may by-pass this limitation by specifying a
value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.
Default Value
-
Description
Must be specified as
CANADIAN 2001.
Design Code to
follow.
See section 5.48.1 of
the Technical
Reference Manual.
Parameter Name
BEAM
Default Value
Description
1.0
CB
1.0
CMY
1.0
1.0 = Do not
calculate Omega-1 for
local Y axis.
2.0 = Calculate
Omega-1 for local Y
axis.
Used in Cl.13.8.4 of
code
CMZ
1.0
1.0 = Do not
calculate Omega-1 for
local Z axis.
2.0 = Calculate
Omega-1 for local Z
axis.
Used in Cl.13.8.4 of
code
DFF
None(Mandatory for
deflection check)
Deflection
Length/Maxm.
Allowable local
deflection.
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
DJ1
DJ2
DMAX
45.0 in.
Maximum allowable
depth (Applicable for
member selection)
DMIN
0.0 in.
Minimum required
depth (Applicable for
member selection)
FYLD
300.0 MPa
Yield strength of
steel.
FU
345.0 MPa
Ultimate strength of
steel.
KT
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LT
Member Length
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
MAIN
0.0
0.0 = Check
slenderness ratio
against the limits.
1.0= Suppress the
slenderness ratio
check.
2.0 = Check
slenderness ratio only
for column buckling,
not for web (See
Section 3B.6, Shear)
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
Permissible ratio of
actual load effect to
the design strength.
TRACK
0.0
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
UNB
Member Length
Unsupported length
in bending
compression of the
bottom flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
UNT
Member Length
Unsupported length
in bending
compression of the
top flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES or members listed as PRISMATIC.
Example of commands for MEMBER SELECTION:
UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
UNL 15 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
SELECT MEMB 3 4
CR2
CAPACITY (C ) PER 13.8.2(b)
r
CRZ
SEE 13.8.2(b) for uniaxial bending (called C
RX
in that Clause)
CTORFLX
Capacity in accordance with 13.8.2(c)
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The
Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction)
handbook. CISC Example 1 page 5-91.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam resistance and beam deflection.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL)
F = 300 Mpa CSA G40.21-M
y
Simply supported beam has a 8.0 m span; Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0, unsupported length 1.0 m
Allowable Live Load deflection, L/300 = 8000/300 = 27 mm
Factored Uniform Load IS 7 kN/m DEAD, 15 kN/m LIVE.
Steel section is W410X54
Comparison
Table 3B.2-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem 1 comparison
Critera
Interaction Ratio
0.88
0.882
none
Beam Resistance
(kNm)
284
283.5
none
Beam Deflection
(mm)
21
20.864
none
STAAD Output
The calculated member displacements from STAAD.Pro:
MEMBER SECTION DISPLACEMENTS
---------------------------UNITS ARE - CM
MEMB
LOAD
MAX LOCAL
0.0000
-1.0555
-1.8132
-2.0864
-1.8132
-1.0555
0.0000
2.08643
AT
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
400.00
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
LOAD
-0.5485
-1.4861
-2.0171
-2.0171
-1.4861
-0.5485
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
L/DISP=
383
MET
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
W410X54
(CANADIAN SECTIONS)
PASS
CSA-13.8.2+
0.882
3
0.00 C
0.00
-250.00
4.00
VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 5-91
-- PAGE NO.
MET
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
MEMBER LENGTH =
PZ = 1.05E+03
PY = 1.77E+02
8.00E+02
FU = 345.0
E =
2.05E+05
G =
7.88E+04
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY = 207.732
KL/RZ =
48.407
ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 1.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00
Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 5.08E+01
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The
Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction)
handbook. CISC Handbook Example, Page 4_106.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL).
F = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M
y
Comparison
Table 3B.3-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem2 comparison
Critera
Interaction Ratio
0.96
0.982
2%
Beam Resistance
(kNm)
583
583.2
none
Column
Resistance (kN)
3,800
3,815
none
FINISH
STAAD Output
The design output from STAAD.Pro:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01 ) V2.1
********************************************
MET
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
W310X129
(CANADIAN SECTIONS)
PASS
CSA-13.8.2C
0.982
1
2000.00 C
0.00
300.00
0.00
VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 4-106
-- PAGE NO.
*
MET
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
MEMBER LENGTH =
PZ = 2.16E+03
PY = 9.91E+02
3.70E+02
FU = 345.0
E =
2.05E+05
G =
7.88E+04
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY =
47.527
KL/RZ =
27.081
ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 3.700
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 1.351E+02
Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 2.11E+01
3B.11.3 VerificationProblemNo.3
Steel beam/column, wide flange section. Static Analysis, 3D beam element.
This example is included in the installation of STAAD.Pro as /SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/can_
ver_prob3.std, with the code changed to CANADIAN 2001 (S16-01).
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The
Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction)
handbook. CISC Handbook Example, Page 4-108.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.
Given
E = 200,000 MPa (STEEL).
F = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M
y
Comparison
Table 3B.4-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem 3
comparison
Criteria
Interaction Ratio
1.193
Criteria
Beam Resistance,
Weak axis
(kNm)
300
299.7
none
Beam Resistance,
Strong axis
(kNm)
630
653.4
3.7%
4,200
4,227
none
Column
Resistance (kN)
STAAD Output
The design output from STAAD.Pro:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01 ) V2.1
********************************************
MET
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
TABLE
1 ST
W310X143
(CANADIAN SECTIONS)
FAIL
CSA-13.8.2B
1.193
1
2000.00 C
-100.00
300.00
0.00
VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 4-108
-- PAGE NO.
*
MET
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
MEMBER LENGTH =
PZ = 2.42E+03
PY = 1.11E+03
3.70E+02
FU = 345.0
E =
2.05E+05
G =
7.88E+04
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY =
46.957
KL/RZ =
26.758
ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 3.700
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 1.351E+02
Z AXIS = 5.405E+01
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 1.98E+01
Reference
CISC Example 1, page 5-91, Limit State Design, CSA-S16.1-94
Problem
A cantilever beam of length 4 meter is subjected to uniformly distributed load of 3 KN/Meter in
both major and minor axis. Axial compression of 8 KN is also applied to the member. User defined
steel section Sect_Class-4 from is assigned to the member.
Given
Design forces
8.0 KN (Compression)
6.0 KNm (Bending-Y)
6.0 KNm (Bending-Z)
6.0 KN (Shear-Y)
6.0 KN (Shear-Z)
Section Properties(Sect_Class-4):
Area = 2766 mm 2
Depth of section, D = 150 mm
Thickness of web Tw = 7 mm
Width of flange Bf = 150 mm
Thickness of flange Tf = 6 mm
Moment of inertia about Z axis, Iz = 1086.96X104 mm 4
Moment of inertia about Y axis, Iy = 337.894X104 mm 4
Solution
Slenderness Ratio
Effective Length factor along Local Y-Axis = KY = 1
Effective Length factor along Local Z-Axis = KZ = 1
Slenderness ratio about Z axis, L/Rz = 31.9
Slenderness ratio about Y axis, L/Ry = 57.22
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, L/Rmax = 57.22
Section Classification
Bf/Tf = 150*0.5/6 = 12.5 > 200/sqrt(Fy) = 11.54
Flange is Class 4.
d/Tw = (150-2.0*6)/7 = 19.714
(1100/sqrt(Fy))*(1-0.39*Cf/*Cy)=(1100/sqrt(300))*(1-0.39*8000/(0.9*2766*300)) = 63.24
Web is Class 1.
Overall section is Class 4 section.
Comparison
Table 3B.5-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem 4 comparison
Criteria
Hand
Calculation
STAAD.Pro Result
Comments
Axial
compressive
resistance
(kN)
521.73
521.9
none
Major axis
bending
resistance
(kN-m)
36.549
36.57
none
Minor axis
bending
resistance
(kN-m)
10.363
10.38
none
ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 UPTABLE 1 SECT_CLASS-4
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 1 LC1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -3
1 UNI GZ -3
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -8
PERFORM ANALYSIS
LOAD LIST 1
PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 1
PARAMETER 1
CODE CANADIAN 2001
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
STAAD Output
The design output from STAAD.Pro:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01 ) V2.1
********************************************
MET
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
SECT_CLASS-4
(UPT)
PASS
CSA-13.8.3B
8.00 C
-6.00
VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 5-91
0.760
6.00
1
0.00
-- PAGE NO.
MET
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
MEMBER LENGTH =
PZ = 1.63E+02
PY = 6.92E+01
2.00E+02
1.35E+02
3.85E+01
MPA
5.582E+02
CRZ =
6.705E+02
CRZ =
6.084E+02
FU = 345.0
E =
2.05E+05
G =
7.88E+04
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY =
57.222
KL/RZ =
31.904
ALLOWABLE KL/R =
200.000
2.000
OMEGA-2 = 1.75
6.000E+00
Z with Lips
Z without Lips
Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface (GUI)
or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file.
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section
properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are used
in the design stage, as applicable.
BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of
load effect to resistance for each member checked. You may choose the degree of detail in the
output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking.
Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code
Checking command.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the Standard as follows:
l
Resistance factors listed in Clauses 6.2 (a), (b), and (e) are used, as applicable.
Members in tension - Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses 6.3.1 and 6.3.2.
6.4.1 General,
6.4.2 and 6.4.2.1 Laterally Supported Members, compressive limit stress based on Initiation of
Yielding,
6.4.4 Channels and Z-Shaped Members with Unstiffened Flanges - additional limitations,
Members in compression
Resistance calculations are based on Clauses:
Default Value
Description
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
BEAM
1.0
CMZ
1.0
CMY
0.0
CWY
DMAX
1000.0
DMIN
0.0
Parameter
Name
FLX
Default Value
Description
FU
450 MPa
FYLD
350 MPa
KT
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
LT
Member
length
LY
Member
length
LZ
Member
length
NSF
1.0
STIFF
Member
length
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
Description
TSA
3D.4.2 Hem-Fir
Designation of Hem-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST Hem-Fir_SelStr_2X10_BM
3D.4.4 Spruce-Pine-Fir
Designation of Spruce-Pine-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_3X8_BM
3D.4.6 Example
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian timber
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER
UNIT FEET POUND
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 6 0 0; 3 12 0 0; 4 18 0 0;
5 24 0 0; 6 6 3 0; 7 12 6 0; 8 18 3 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4; 4 4 5; 5 1 6; 6 6 7; 7 7 8; 8 8 5;
9 2 6; 10 3 7; 11 4 8; 12 6 3; 13 3 8;
UNIT FEET POUND
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM
E 1224
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 25
ALPHA 5.5e-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY tim can
1 TO 4 9 TO 11 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM
5 TO 8 12 13 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM memb 1 TO 4 9 TO 11
MATERIAL SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM memb 5 TO 8 12 13
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
K_T
Treatment factor(Clause 5.4.3 and 6.4.4 -CSA086-01)
KSB
Service condition factor applicable to Bending at extreme fibre (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
KSV
Service condition factor applicable to longitudinal shear (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
KSC
Service condition factor applicable to Compression parallel to the grain (Table 5.4.2 and
6.4.2 CSA086-01)
K_SCP
Service condition factor applicable to Compression perpendicular to the grain (Table 5.4.2
and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
KSE
Service condition factor applicable to modulus of elasticity (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2
CSA086-01)
KST
Service condition factor applicable to tension parallel to the grain (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2
CSA086-01)
KZB
Size factor applicable to bending (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
KZV
size factor applicable to shear(Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
KZT
size factor applicable to tension parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
KZCP
size factor applicable to compression perpendicular to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 CSA086-01)
K_ZC
size factor applicable to compression parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 CSA086-01)
CHIX
Curvature factor (Clause 6.5.6.5.2-CSA086-01)
CV
shear load coefficient (Table 6.5.7.4A- CSA086-01)
KN
Notch factor(Clause 5.5.5.4-CSA086-01)
All of these factors must be specified as input according to the classification of timber and stress
grade.
Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistances.
3D.5.3 Bending
The bending resistance of Sawn members are determined based on Clause 5.5.4 of CSA086-01 and
for glulam members are determined based on Clause 6.5.6.5 of CSA086-01. The allowable stress in
bending is multiplied by Lateral stability factor, KL to take in account whether lateral support is
provided at points of bearing to prevent lateral displacement and rotation
3D.5.6 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 5.5.5 and
6.5.7.2 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to
the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes)
exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section
is considered to have failed under shear.
Default Value
Description
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
CHIX
1.0
CV
1.0
KD
1.0
KH
1.0
KN
1.0
KSB
1.0
KSC
1.0
KSE
1.0
KST
1.0
KSV
1.0
KX
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
KZB
1.0
Parameter
Name
KZCP
Default Value
1.0
Description
KZT
1.0
KZV
1.0
K_SCP
1.0
K_T
1.0
K_ZC
1.0
LX
Member
length
LY
Member
length
LZ
Member
length
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
Refer to Section 4.4 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking.
Refer to Section 5.51.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code
Checking command.
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER CAN
KD 0.99 ALL
KH 0.99 ALL
K_T 0.99 ALL
KSB 0.99 ALL
KSV 0.99 ALL
KSC 0.99 ALL
KSE 0.99 ALL
KST 0.99 ALL
KZB 0.99 ALL
KZV 0.99 ALL
KZT 0.99 ALL
KZCP 0.99 ALL
K_ZC 0.99 ALL
CV 0.99 ALL
KN 0.99 ALL
K_SCP 0.99 ALL
CHIX 0.99 ALL
RATIO 0.99 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
SLENDERNESS_Y
Actual Slenderness ratio in y direction
SLENDERNESS_Z
Actual Slenderness ratio in z direction
PY
Factored Compressive capacity in y direction
PZ
Factored Compressive capacity in z direction
T
Factored tensile capacity
MY
Factored moment of resistance in y direction
MZ
Factored moment of resistance in z direction
V
Factored shear resistance
SLENDERNESS
Allowable slenderness ratio
Reference
Example 4, page 116, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Length = 9000 mm
Comparison
Table 3D.2-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 1
Criteria
Design Strength
(kN)
293.793
none
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
TABLE
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ =
4500.000 LEY =
4500.000 LUZ =
9000.000 LUY =
9000.000mm
|
|
|
| KD = 1.000
KH
= 1.000
KT
= 1.000
KSB = 1.000
KSV = 1.000 |
| KSC = 1.000
K_SCP = 1.000
KSE = 1.000
KST = 1.000
KZB = 1.000 |
| KZV = 1.000
KZT
= 1.000
KZCP = 1.000
K_ZC = 1.000
CHIX = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000
KN
= 1.000
|
|
|
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m)
|
|
Pu =
214.000
|
|
Tu =
0.000
|
|
Muy =
0.000
|
|
Muz =
0.000
|
|
V
=
0.000
|
|
SLENDERNESS_Y =
19.737
|
|
SLENDERNESS_Z =
25.714
|
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m)
|
|
PY =
413.943
|
|
PZ =
293.793
|
|
T
=
0.000
|
|
MY =
0.000
|
|
MZ =
0.000
|
|
V
=
0.000
|
|
SLENDERNESS =
50.000
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Reference
Example 2, page 59, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Length = 7,500 mm, Beam Spacing = 5,000 mm, Standard load condition, Dry service condition,
Untreated
Comparison
Table 3D.3-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 2
Criteria
Design Strength
in Bending
(kNm)
208
208.323
none
Design Strength
in Shear (kN)
101
100.776
none
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
TABLE
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ =
7500.000 LEY =
7500.000 LUZ =
7500.000 LUY =
7500.000mm
|
|
|
| KD = 1.000
KH
= 1.000
KT
= 1.000
KSB = 1.000
KSV = 1.000 |
| KSC = 1.000
K_SCP = 1.000
KSE = 1.000
KST = 1.000
KZB = 1.000 |
| KZV = 1.000
KZT
= 1.000
KZCP = 1.000
K_ZC = 1.000
CHIX = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000
KN
= 1.000
|
|
|
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m)
|
|
Pu =
0.000
|
|
Tu =
0.000
|
|
Muy =
0.000
|
|
Muz =
0.000
|
|
V
=
-101.625
|
|
SLENDERNESS_Y =
16.932
|
|
SLENDERNESS_Z =
1.529
|
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m)
|
|
PY =
0.000
|
|
PZ =
0.000
|
|
T
=
0.000
|
|
MY =
41.923
|
|
MZ =
208.323
|
|
V
=
100.776
|
|
SLENDERNESS =
50.000
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Reference
Example 3, page 158, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison
Table 3D.4-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 3
Criteria
Design Strength
in Tension (kN)
256.636
none
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
TABLE
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ =
4500.000 LEY =
4500.000 LUZ =
9000.000 LUY =
9000.000mm
|
|
|
| KD = 1.000
KH
= 1.000
KT
= 1.000
KSB = 1.000
KSV = 1.000 |
| KSC = 1.000
K_SCP = 1.000
KSE = 1.000
KST = 1.000
KZB = 1.000 |
| KZV = 1.000
KZT
= 1.000
KZCP = 1.000
K_ZC = 1.000
CHIX = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000
KN
= 1.000
|
|
|
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m)
|
|
Pu =
0.000
|
|
Tu =
-250.000
|
|
Muy =
0.000
|
|
Muz =
0.000
|
|
V
=
0.000
|
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m)
|
|
PY =
0.000
|
|
PZ =
0.000
|
|
T
=
256.636
|
|
MY =
0.000
|
|
MZ =
0.000
|
|
V
=
0.000
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Reference
Example 2, page 113, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Unbraced Length = 5,000 mm
Comparison
Table 3D.5-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 4
Criteria
Design Strength
(kN)
129.223
none
MEMBER
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST DFL_NO2_8X8_POST
PASS
CL.5.5.10/6.5.12
114.00 C
0.00
0.882
0.00
1
0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ =
5000.000 LEY =
5000.000 LUZ =
5000.000 LUY =
5000.000mm
|
|
|
| KD = 1.000
KH
= 1.000
KT
= 1.000
KSB = 1.000
KSV = 1.000 |
| KSC = 0.910
K_SCP = 1.000
KSE = 1.000
KST = 1.000
KZB = 1.000 |
| KZV = 1.000
KZT
= 1.000
KZCP = 1.000
K_ZC = 1.050
CHIX = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000
KN
= 1.000
|
|
|
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m)
|
|
Pu =
114.000
|
|
Tu =
0.000
|
|
Muy =
0.000
|
|
Muz =
0.000
|
|
V
=
0.000
|
|
SLENDERNESS_Y =
26.178
|
|
SLENDERNESS_Z =
26.178
|
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m)
|
|
PY =
129.223
|
|
PZ =
129.223
|
|
T
=
0.000
|
|
MY =
0.000
|
|
MZ =
0.000
|
|
V
=
0.000
|
|
SLENDERNESS =
50.000
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Reference
Example 1, page 58, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Length =6000mm, Beam Spacing = 3000mm, Standard load condition, Dry service condition,
Untreated
Comparison
Table 3D.6-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 5
Criteria
Design Strength
in Bending
(kNm)
79.8
79.732
none
Design Strength
in Shear (kN)
46.1
46.170
none
MEMBER
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST DFL_NO1_10X16_BM
FAIL
CL.5.5.5/6.5.6
0.00 T
0.00
1.066
49.20
1
0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ =
3000.000 LEY =
3000.000 LUZ =
3000.000 LUY =
3000.000mm
|
|
|
| KD = 1.000
KH
= 1.000
KT
= 1.000
KSB = 1.000
KSV = 1.000 |
| KSC = 1.000
K_SCP = 1.000
KSE = 1.000
KST = 1.000
KZB = 0.900 |
| KZV = 0.900
KZT
= 1.000
KZCP = 1.000
K_ZC = 1.050
CHIX = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000
KN
= 1.000
|
|
|
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m)
|
|
Pu =
0.000
|
|
Tu =
0.000
|
|
Muy =
0.000
|
|
Muz =
49.200
|
|
V
=
49.200
|
|
SLENDERNESS_Y =
4.511
|
|
SLENDERNESS_Z =
2.158
|
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m)
|
|
PY =
0.000
|
|
PZ =
0.000
|
|
T
=
0.000
|
|
MY =
79.800
|
|
MZ =
79.732
|
|
V
=
46.170
|
|
SLENDERNESS =
50.000
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Reference
Example 2, page 158, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison
Table 3D.7-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 6
Criteria
Design Strength
in Tension (kN)
184.338
none
MEMBER
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST DFL_NO1_6X8_BM
PASS
CL.5.5.10/6.5.12
144.00 T
0.00
0.781
0.00
1
0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ =
5000.000 LEY =
5000.000 LUZ =
5000.000 LUY =
5000.000mm
|
|
|
| KD = 1.000
KH
= 1.100
KT
= 1.000
KSB = 1.000
KSV = 1.000 |
| KSC = 0.910
K_SCP = 1.000
KSE = 1.000
KST = 1.000
KZB = 1.000 |
| KZV = 1.000
KZT
= 1.000
KZCP = 1.000
K_ZC = 1.050
CHIX = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000
KN
= 1.000
|
|
|
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m)
|
|
Pu =
0.000
|
|
Tu =
-144.000
|
|
Muy =
0.000
|
|
Muz =
0.000
|
|
V
=
0.000
|
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m)
|
|
PY =
0.000
|
|
PZ =
0.000
|
|
T
=
184.338
|
|
MY =
0.000
|
|
MZ =
0.000
|
|
V
=
0.000
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more
information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual.
Note: Pin connection equations in S16-14 are not checked by the program.
Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause 13.3 of the code. The
equations presented in this section of the code assume that the compressive resistance is a function
of the compressive strength of the gross section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as
well as the slenderness factor (KL/r ratios). The effective length for the calculation of compression
resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KT, KY, KZ, LT, LY, and LZ (See
"Design Parameters" on page 193). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity calculations
are :
I. For doubly symmetric sections meeting the requirement of Table 1, resistance is:
Resistance due to Major axis buckling per Cl. 13.3.1.
Resistance due to Minor axis buckling per Cl. 13.3.1
Cr = AFy 1 + 2n
1/ n
where
n = 1.34
=
Fe =
Fy / Fe
2E
kL 2
r
( )
II. For any other section not covered under Cl. 13.3.1, the factored compressive resistance, Cr, is
computed using the expression given in Cl. 13.3.1 with a value of n = 1.34 and the value of Fe
taken as follows:
i. For doubly symmetric sections and axisymmetric sections, the least of Fex, Fey, and
Fez.
ii. For singly symmetric sections with the Y axis taken as the axis of symmetry, the lesser
of Fex and Feyz
where
Feyz =
Fex =
Fey + Fez
1 1
4FeyFez
2
(Fey + Fez )
2E
k xL x 2
( )
rx
2
Fey =
E
kyLy
ry
2EC w
1
Fez =
2 + GJ
2
(K
L
)
z z
Ar 0
y0 2
( ) F (F F )( )
r0
2
e
ex
r0
=0
III. For Class 4 member subjected to axial compression, the factored compressive resistance is:
Cr = A e Fy 1 2n
1/ n
Ae is calculated using reduced element widths meeting the maximum width to thickness
ratio specified in Table 1.
Effective width required for the calculation of effective area Ae, for different section shapes
are as follows.
l
For flanges of I-section, T-section and channel section and legs of angle section
b e = 200t / Fy
250
Fy
0.28M p
Mr =
where
Mu =
2
L
EI yGJ +
E 2
( )IC
L
0.28M y
Mr =
but not greater than My for Class 3 sections and the value specified in Cl.13.5(c)(iii)
for Class 4 sections.
iii. For singly symmetric (monosymmetric) Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3 sections and Tshape sections, lateral torsional buckling strength shall be checked separately for each
flange under compression under factored loads at any point along its unbraced
length:
l
L L u
M r = M p M p M yr
M p
L yr L u
where
Myr = 0.7SxFy, with Sx taken as the smaller of the two potential
values
Lyr = length L obtained by setting Mu = Myr
L u = 1.1rt E / Fy =
490rt
Fy
bc
rt =
12 1 +
h cw
3b ct c
when M Myr:
M r = M u
where
Mu = the critical elastic moment of the unbraced section =
2
3 2EI y
C
+ 2 + 4 GJL +
2
x
2EI
I y
2L
x
y
0.85U1xM fx
M rx
U1yM fy
M ry
1.0
where
Cf, Mf = the maximum load effects, including stability, as specified in Cl. 8.4.
= 0.6 +0.4y 0.85
The capacity of the member is investigated for the following:
a. Cross sectional strength with = 0.6, where
i. Cr as specified in Cl. 13.3 with = 0
ii. Mr as specified in Cl. 13.5
iii. U1x and U1y as specified in Cl. 13.8.4 but not less than 1.0
b. Overall member strength, where
i. Cr as specified in Cl. 13.3 with K = 1, except for uniaxial bending, in which case
Cr is based on the axis of bending
ii. Mr as specified in Cl. 13.5
iii. U1x and U1y are taken as 1.0 for members in an unbraced frame, and as
specified in Cl. 13.8.4 for members in a braced frame
c. Lateral torsional buckling strength, when applicable, where
i. Cr as specified in Cl. 13.3
ii. Mrx as specified in Cl. 13.6
iii. Mry as specified in Cl. 13.5
iv. U1x and U1y are taken as 1.0 for members in an unbraced frame, and as
specified in Cl. 13.8.4 for members in a braced frame (where U1x is not less
than 1.0)
II. For all other cases (Cl13.8.3):
Cf
Cr
U1xM fx
M rx
U1yM fy
M ry
1.0
The capacity of the member is investigated for the following per Cl.13.8.2:
a. Cross sectional strength
b. Overall member strength
c. Lateral torsional buckling strength,
Tf
Tr
Mf
Mr
1.0
where
Mr = the moment resistance as specified in Cl. 13.5.
Additionally, the following equations must be satisfied for laterally unsupported members (Cl.
13.9.2):
Mf
Mr
Mf
Mr
T fZ
M rA
T fS
M rA
1.0
where
Mr = the moment resistance as specified in Cl. 13.6.
Biaxial Bending
For bending about both axis, the following equation must be satisfied (Cl. 13.8):
M fx
M rx
M fy
M ry
1.0
Mf
Mr
+ 0.455
Vf
Vr
1.0
1.0
1.0
where
Mr = the value determined in accordance with Cl. 13.5 of Cl 13.6 as applicable
Vr = the value determined in accordance with Cl. 13.4
3E.6.4 Shear
Factored shear resistance, Vr, developed by the web of flexural member is calculated as:
Vr = A wFs
where
Aw = shear area
Fs is evaluated as:
I. For unstiffened webs (Cl. 13.4.1.1.(a) ):
h
w
i. when
1, 014
Fy
1, 014
Fy
ii. when
h
w
iii. when
>
<
, Fs = 0.66Fy
1, 436
1, 435
Fy
Fs =
Fy
670 F y
Fs =
(h / w )
961, 200
(h / w) 2
II. For stiffened webs (i.e., when the STIFFparameter is specified) (Cl. 13.4.1.1(b) ):
h
w
i. when
439
kv
Fy
439
kv
<
Fy
ii. when
502
kv
<
Fy
iii. when
621
kv
Fy
iv. when
<
, Fs = 0.66Fy
h
w
502
h
w
621
h
w
kv
Fy
, Fs = Fcri
kv
Fy
where
kv = shear buckling coefficient:
kv = 4+
5.34
(a / h ) 2
k v = 5.34 +
4
(a / h ) 2
F yk v
(h / w )
1
ka = aspect coefficient =
Fcre =
180, 000k v
(h / w) 2
1 + (a / h )
where
Ae = the cross-sectional area of the tubular member
Default Value
CODE
Description
BEAM
1.0
CB
0.0
Parameter
Name
CPSACING
Default Value
0.0
Description
DFF
None
(Mandatory
for deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint of
member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
45.0 in.
DMIN
0.0 in.
FLX
FU
345.0 MPa
FYLD
300.0 MPa
KT
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LAT
Parameter
Name
LEG
Default Value
Description
LT
Member
Length
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
200
NSF
1.0
PROFILE
RATIO
1.0
SNUG
STIFF
Member
Spacing of traverse stiffeners.
length of
depth of beam,
whichever is
lesser.
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
0.0
Description
Design output:
0.0 = Report only minimum design
results.
1.0 = Report design strengths also.
2.0 = Provide full details of design.
UNB
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
Reference
Kulak, G.L. and G.Y.Grondin. 2010. Limit States Design in Structural Steel. 9th Edition. Markham,
ON:CISC. Example 3.1
Problem
Design a tension diagonal in an all-welded truss (SNU 0 for welded). Attached to WT 265x61.5
chords (t = 13.1 mm).
w
L=4m
Tf = 630 kN
The material used is G40.21 300W steel (Fy = 300 MPa, Fu = 450 MPa) (FYLD and FU)
Calculations
Gross area is used for welded connections.
Tr =
630 (10 )
270
= 2, 333mm 2
Select a pair of angles with at least this gross area: try a 2- 76x64x9.5, with long legs back-to-back:
A = 2,480 mm2
rmin = 13.3 mm
Calculate the effective net area due to shear lag. The average weld length is taken as (120 mm +250
mm)/2 = 185 mm.
The long leg does not have a reduction in area shear lag, thus:
An2 = 1.00(76 - 9.5) 9.5 = 632 mm2
The outstanding (short) leg has an eccentricity of half the leg length, or 64/2 = 32 mm.
A n3 = 1
32
250
) 64 9.5 = 530mm
The total net area for the pair of angles for the rupture limit state is:
Ane = 632 + 530 = 1,162 mm2
For the pair of angles, Ane = 21,1162 = 2,324 mm2 ; the ratio of net section area to gross area =
2,324 / 2,480 = 0.937 (NSF).
Checking the yielding limit state:
Tr = 0.902,480300 = 670 kN
Checking the rupture limit state:
Tr = 0.752,324450 = 784 kN
Yielding governs, and the critical ratio is: 630/670 = 0.94.
Comparison
Table 3E.2-Verification Problem comparison
Criteria
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
T (kN)
670
669.6
negligible
Critical Ratio
0.94
0.941
negligible
Note: If the member SELECT facility is used in place of a code CHECK, STAAD.Pro will actually
select a 2-L 102x89x6.4 member, which has a critical ratio of 0.997 (per Cl. 13.2) and an area of
2,340 mm 2, thus more economical (the NSF used for this size is 0.923).
STAAD Input
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 22-Apr-14
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 4 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.92
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
TYPE STEEL
*STRENGTH FY 350000 FU 450000 RY 1.5 RT 1.2
G 7.692e+007
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
1 TABLE LD L76X64X9.5 SP 0.0131
*1 TABLE LD L102x76x11 SP 0.0131
*1 TABLE T W530x123 *Chord member
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX MX MY MZ
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 630
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION ALL
PARAMETER 1
CODE CANADIAN
NSF 0.937 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
FU 450000 ALL
SNUG 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
PARAMETER 2
CODE CANADIAN
PARAMETER 2
FYLD 300000 ALL
FU 450000 ALL
NSF 0.923 ALL
SNUG 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
SELECT ALL
FINISH
STAAD Output
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - S16-14 (v1.0)
*******************************************
MET
1 --------------------
MEMBER NO:
1
CRITICAL RATIO: 0.941(PASS)
LOAD:
LOCATION (MET): 0.00 CONDITION: Cl. 13.9.1
SECTION: LD
L76X64X9.5
(CANADIAN SECTIONS)
UNIT: KN MET
STRENGTH CHECKS:
CRITICAL RATIO: 0.941(PASS)
LOAD CASE:
1 LOCATION (MET): 0.00
13.9.1
DESIGN FORCES:
Fx:
630.00(T)
Fy:
0.00
Fz:
0.00
Mx:
0.00E+00
My: 0.00E+00
Mz:
0.00E+00
CONDITION: Cl.
UNIT: CM
SECTION PROPERTIES:
AZZ:
SZZ:
IZZ:
11.195 AYY:
26.578 SYY:
137.969 IYY:
FYLD:
300.000
13.616 CW:
33.614
235.468
0.000
UNIT: NEW MM
MATERIAL PROPERTIES:
ACTUAL MEMBER LENGTH(MET):
PARAMETERS:
SLENDERNESS:
4.000
KX: 1.000
KY:
FU:
1.000
169.796
300.000
450.000
NSF:
LOAD:
0.937
SLF:
1
1.000
LOC.(MET):
0.000
SECTION CLASS:
COMPRESSION:
Class 1
FLEXURE:
FLANGE:
Class 3
Class 3
UNIT: KN MET
TENSION:
YIELDING:
RUPTURE:
STAAD SPACE
FORCE:
630.000
630.000
CAPACITY:
RATIO:
CRITERIA:
669.600 0.941
Cl. 13.2
784.269
0.803
Cl. 13.2
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
1
0.000
1
630.000
-- PAGE NO.
6
MET
COMPRESSION:
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
RATIO:
MAJOR:
0.000
141.791
0.000
MINOR:
0.000
220.764
0.000
INTERMEDIATE:
Ag:(CM)
KL/r:
Fe:(N MM)
MAJOR:
0.000
169.796
70.178
MINOR:
0.000
129.980
119.757
FLEX TOR BUCK:
INTERMEDIATE:
SHEAR:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
INTERMEDIATE:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
v1.0
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
0.000
217.175
Fe:(N MM)
117.255
1.600
FORCE:
0.000
0.000
Aw:(CM)
13.616
11.195
RATIO:
0.000
n:
1.340
CAPACITY:
226.444
196.070
Kv:
1.200
RATIO:
0.000
0.000
Ka:
0.000
CAPACITY:
7.18E+00
9.08E+00
Se:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
RATIO:
0.000
0.000
My:
0.80E+01
0.10E+02
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.3
Cl. 13.3
2.068
1.583
LOAD CASE:
1
1
n:
1.340
1.340
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.3
LOAD CASE:
1
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.4.3
1
0.000
AISC G2-1
1
0.000
Fcri:(N MM) Fcre:(N MM) Fs:(N MM)
0.000
0.000
0.000
UNIT: KN MET
YIELDING:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
INTERMEDIATE:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
FORCE:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
Mp:
1.44E+01
0.00E+00
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.5(b)
Cl. 13.5(b)
LOAD CASE:
1
1
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
RATIO:
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
0.000
Cl. 13.6(e)(i)
1
x:
Mu:
rt:
Myr:
3.17
5.51E+01 0.02
5.58E+00
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
Lu:
Lyr:
0.52 30.85
UNIT: KN MET
LAT TOR BUCK:
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
MAJOR:
0.00E+00
1.19E+01
INTERMEDIATE: Iyc(CM):
2:
3:
MAJOR:
4.07E+01 2.50
1.00
UNIT: KN MET
INTERACTION:
RATIO:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.941
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.000
MEMBER STRENGTH:
0.000
LTB STRENGTH:
0.000
FLEX AND SHEAR:
0.000
BIAXIAL FLEX:
0.000
STAAD SPACE
INTERMEDIATE:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.9.1
0.000
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
1
1
1
1
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-- PAGE NO.
13.8.3
13.8.3
13.8.3
14.6(a)
13.8
C/S STRENGTH:
Tf:
6.30E+02 Tr:
6.70E+02 Mfz:
0.00E+00 Mrz:
7.18E+00
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
Cf:
Mfz:
Mfy:
Cr:
Mrz:
Mry:
:
Cez:
U1z: U1y:
C/S STR: 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 6.70E+02 7.18E+00 9.08E+00 0.00 1.74E+02
2.98E+02 1.0 1.0
MEM STR: 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 1.42E+02 7.18E+00 9.08E+00 0.00 1.74E+02
2.98E+02 1.0 1.0
LTB STR: 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 2.17E+02 7.18E+00 9.08E+00 0.00 1.74E+02
2.98E+02 1.0 1.0
FLEX SHEAR: Mfz:
0.00E+00 Mrz:
7.18E+00 Vfy:
0.00E+00 Vry:
2.26E+02
BIAX FLEX:
Mfz:
0.00E+00 Mrz:
7.18E+00 Mfy:
0.00E+00 Mry:
9.08E+00
Cey:
Reference
Kulak, G.L. and G.Y.Grondin. 2010. Limit States Design in Structural Steel. 9th Edition. Markham,
ON:CISC. Example 4.1
Problem
A W250x73 section is used for a pedestal with a height of 1.1 m.
The material used is G40.21 350W steel (Fy = 350 MPa) (FYLD)
Calculations
The nominal yield strength is used for the actual yield strength for a Group 2 section, per Table 3
and Table 4 of Appendix A of the reference.
225
8.6
= 26.2<
670
= 35.8
350
254
2 14.2
= 8.9 <
200
= 10.7
350
Both the column web and flanges are less than the local buckling limit, so the capacity of the
column is evaluated using Eq. 4.21.
Column Capacity
Assume K = 1.0,
L
rx
1, 100
110
= 10
L
ry
1, 100
64.6
= 17
The largest slenderness ration controls, thus the slenderness factor for buckling about the minor
axis:
=
( )
KL
r max
Fy
350
= 17
= 0.227
200, 000
Cr = AFy 1 + 2n
1 / n
1/ 1.34
Comparison
Table 3E.3-Verification Problem comparison
Criteria
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
KL/r, major
10
9.968
negligible
KL/r, minor
17
17.012
negligible
, critical
0.227
0.224
1.3%
C (kN)
2,883
2,884.358
negligible
STAAD Input
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 22-Apr-14
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 1.10 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.92
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
TYPE STEEL
*STRENGTH FY 350000 FU 450000 RY 1.5 RT 1.2
G 7.692e+007
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
1 TABLE ST W250x73
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -0.001
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION ALL
PARAMETER 1
CODE CANADIAN
FYLD 350000 ALL
FU 450000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
STAAD Output
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - S16-14 (v1.0)
*******************************************
MET
1 --------------------
MEMBER NO:
1
CRITICAL RATIO: 0.000(PASS)
LOAD:
LOCATION (MET): 0.00 CONDITION: Cl. 13.8.2
SECTION: ST
W250X73
(CANADIAN SECTIONS)
UNIT: KN MET
STRENGTH CHECKS:
CRITICAL RATIO: 0.000(PASS)
LOAD CASE:
1 LOCATION (MET): 0.00
13.8.2
DESIGN FORCES:
Fx:
0.00(C)
Fy:
0.00
Fz:
0.00
Mx:
0.00E+00
My: 0.00E+00
Mz:
0.00E+00
CONDITION: Cl.
UNIT: CM
SECTION PROPERTIES:
AZZ:
SZZ:
IZZ:
72.136 AYY:
893.281 SYY:
11300.001 IYY:
FYLD:
350.000
20.537 CW:
305.512
3880.000
553146.812
UNIT: NEW MM
MATERIAL PROPERTIES:
FU:
450.000
1.100
KX: 1.000
KY:
1.000
17.012
200.000
NSF:
1.000
LOAD:
SLF:
1
1.000
LOC.(MET):
0.000
SECTION CLASS:
COMPRESSION:
FLEXURE
SECTION:
FLANGE:
WEB:
Class 1
MAJOR
Class 2
Class 2
MINOR
Class 2
Class 2
Class 1
UNIT: KN MET
TENSION:
YIELDING:
RUPTURE:
STAAD SPACE
FORCE:
0.000
0.000
CAPACITY:
2923.200
3132.000
RATIO:
0.000
0.000
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.2
Cl. 13.2
LOAD CASE:
1
1
-- PAGE NO.
MET
FORCE:
0.000
0.000
Aw:(CM)
20.537
72.136
v1.0
COMPRESSION:
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
RATIO:
MAJOR:
0.001
2913.816
0.000
MINOR:
0.001
2884.358
0.000
INTERMEDIATE:
Ag:(CM)
KL/r:
Fe:(N MM)
MAJOR:
0.000
9.968
20360.980
MINOR:
0.000
17.012
6991.204
SHEAR:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
INTERMEDIATE:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
CAPACITY:
452.349
1363.370
Kv:
5.340
RATIO:
0.000
0.000
Ka:
204.397
CAPACITY:
3.10E+02
1.46E+02
Se:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
RATIO:
0.000
0.000
My:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.3
Cl. 13.3
0.131
0.224
LOAD CASE:
1
1
n:
1.340
1.340
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.4.1.1
1
0.000
AISC G2-1
1
0.000
Fcri:(N MM) Fcre:(N MM) Fs:(N MM)
480.056
231.000
0.016
UNIT: KN MET
YIELDING:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
INTERMEDIATE:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
FORCE:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
Mp:
3.45E+02
1.62E+02
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.5(a)
Cl. 13.5(a)
LOAD CASE:
1
1
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
Cl. 13.6(a)(i)
1
Mu:
rt:
Myr:
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
Lu:
Lyr:
UNIT: KN MET
LAT TOR BUCK:
FORCE:
MAJOR:
0.00E+00
INTERMEDIATE: Iyc(CM):
CAPACITY:
3.55E+02
2:
3:
RATIO:
0.000
x:
MAJOR:
0.00E+00
2.50
0.00
0.00
1.98E+04
0.00
0.00E+00
0.00
0.00
UNIT: KN MET
INTERACTION:
RATIO:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.000
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.000
MEMBER STRENGTH:
0.000
LTB STRENGTH:
0.000
FLEX AND SHEAR:
0.000
BIAXIAL FLEX:
0.000
INTERMEDIATE:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
Tf:
0.00E+00
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
Cf:
Mfz:
U1z: U1y:
STAAD SPACE
C/S STR: 1.00E-03
6.49E+04 1.0 1.0
MEM STR: 1.00E-03
6.49E+04 1.0 1.0
LTB STR: 1.00E-03
6.49E+04 1.0 1.0
FLEX SHEAR: Mfz:
BIAX FLEX:
Mfz:
Tr:
Mfy:
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.9.1
0.000
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
1
1
1
1
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13.8.2
13.8.2
13.8.2
14.6(a)
13.8
2.92E+03
Mfz:
Cr:
0.00E+00
Mrz:
Mrz:
Mry:
3.10E+02
:
Cez:
-- PAGE NO.
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
2.92E+03
3.10E+02
1.46E+02 0.69
1.89E+05
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
2.88E+03
3.10E+02
1.46E+02 0.69
1.89E+05
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
2.88E+03
3.10E+02
1.46E+02 0.69
1.89E+05
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
Mrz:
Mrz:
3.10E+02
3.10E+02
Vfy:
Mfy:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
Vry:
Mry:
Cey:
4.52E+02
1.46E+02
1 --------------------
Reference
Kulak, G.L. and G.Y.Grondin. 2010. Limit States Design in Structural Steel. 9th Edition. Markham,
ON:CISC. Example 4.2
Problem
A W250x73 section is used for a pedestal with a height of 11.0 m.
The material used is G40.21 350W steel (Fy = 350 MPa) (FYLD)
Calculations
The nominal yield strength is used for the actual yield strength for a Group 2 section, per Table 3
and Table 4 of Appendix A of the reference.
225
8.6
670
= 26.2<
= 35.8
350
254
2 14.2
= 8.9 <
200
= 10.7
350
Both the column web and flanges are less than the local buckling limit, so the capacity of the
column is evaluated using Eq. 4.21.
Column Capacity
Assume K = 1.0,
L
rx
11, 000
110
= 100
L
ry
11, 000
64.6
= 170
The largest slenderness ration controls, thus the slenderness factor for buckling about the minor
axis:
2
Fe =
200, 000
(1.0 170 )2
Fy
Fe
= 68.3 kN
350
= 2.26
68.3
Cr = AFy 1 + 2n
1/ n
1 / 1.34
Comparison
Table 3E.4-Verification Problem comparison
Criteria
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
KL/r, major
100
99.684
negligible
KL/r, minor
170
170.118
negligible
, critical
2.26
2.237
1.0%
C (kN)
529
538.161
1.7%
STAAD Input
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 22-Apr-14
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 11 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.92
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
TYPE STEEL
*STRENGTH FY 350000 FU 450000 RY 1.5 RT 1.2
G 7.692e+007
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
1 TABLE ST W250X73
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -0.001
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION ALL
PARAMETER 1
CODE CANADIAN
FYLD 350000 ALL
FU 450000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
STAAD Output
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - S16-14 (v1.0)
*******************************************
MET
1 --------------------
MEMBER NO:
1
CRITICAL RATIO: 0.000(PASS)
LOAD:
LOCATION (MET): 0.00 CONDITION: Cl. 13.8.2
SECTION: ST
W250X73
(CANADIAN SECTIONS)
UNIT: KN MET
STRENGTH CHECKS:
CRITICAL RATIO: 0.000(PASS)
LOAD CASE:
1 LOCATION (MET): 0.00
13.8.2
DESIGN FORCES:
Fx:
0.00(C)
Fy:
0.00
Fz:
0.00
Mx:
0.00E+00
My: 0.00E+00
Mz:
0.00E+00
CONDITION: Cl.
UNIT: CM
SECTION PROPERTIES:
AZZ:
SZZ:
IZZ:
72.136 AYY:
893.281 SYY:
11300.001 IYY:
FYLD:
350.000
20.537 CW:
305.512
3880.000
553146.812
UNIT: NEW MM
MATERIAL PROPERTIES:
ACTUAL MEMBER LENGTH(MET):
PARAMETERS:
SLENDERNESS:
11.000
KX: 1.000
KY:
FU:
1.000
170.118
200.000
450.000
NSF:
LOAD:
1.000
SLF:
1
1.000
LOC.(MET):
0.000
SECTION CLASS:
COMPRESSION:
FLEXURE
SECTION:
FLANGE:
WEB:
Class 1
MAJOR
Class 2
Class 2
MINOR
Class 2
Class 2
Class 1
UNIT: KN MET
TENSION:
YIELDING:
RUPTURE:
STAAD SPACE
FORCE:
0.000
0.000
CAPACITY:
2923.200
3132.000
RATIO:
0.000
0.000
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.2
Cl. 13.2
LOAD CASE:
1
1
-- PAGE NO.
MET
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
6
v1.0
COMPRESSION:
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
RATIO:
MAJOR:
0.001
1266.716
0.000
MINOR:
0.001
538.161
0.000
INTERMEDIATE:
Ag:(CM)
KL/r:
Fe:(N MM)
MAJOR:
0.000
99.684
203.610
MINOR:
0.000
170.118
69.912
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.3
Cl. 13.3
1.311
2.237
LOAD CASE:
1
1
n:
1.340
1.340
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
SHEAR:
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
RATIO:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
INTERMEDIATE:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
0.000
0.000
Aw:(CM)
20.537
72.136
452.349
1363.370
Kv:
5.340
0.000
0.000
Ka:
204.396
CAPACITY:
3.10E+02
1.46E+02
Se:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
RATIO:
0.000
0.000
My:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
Cl. 13.4.1.1
1
0.000
AISC G2-1
1
0.000
Fcri:(N MM) Fcre:(N MM) Fs:(N MM)
480.055
231.000
0.002
UNIT: KN MET
YIELDING:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
INTERMEDIATE:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
FORCE:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
Mp:
3.45E+02
1.62E+02
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.5(a)
Cl. 13.5(a)
LOAD CASE:
1
1
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
RATIO:
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
0.000
Cl. 13.6(a)(i)
1
x:
Mu:
rt:
Myr:
0.00
4.66E+02 0.00
0.00E+00
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
Lu:
Lyr:
0.00
0.00
UNIT: KN MET
LAT TOR BUCK:
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
MAJOR:
0.00E+00
2.83E+02
INTERMEDIATE: Iyc(CM):
2:
3:
MAJOR:
0.00E+00 2.50
0.00
UNIT: KN MET
INTERACTION:
RATIO:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.000
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.000
MEMBER STRENGTH:
0.000
LTB STRENGTH:
0.000
FLEX AND SHEAR:
0.000
BIAXIAL FLEX:
0.000
INTERMEDIATE:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
Tf:
0.00E+00
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
Cf:
Mfz:
U1z: U1y:
STAAD SPACE
C/S STR: 1.00E-03
6.49E+02 1.0 1.0
MEM STR: 1.00E-03
6.49E+02 1.0 1.0
LTB STR: 1.00E-03
6.49E+02 1.0 1.0
FLEX SHEAR: Mfz:
BIAX FLEX:
Mfz:
Tr:
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.9.1
0.000
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
1
1
1
1
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13.8.2
13.8.2
13.8.2
14.6(a)
13.8
2.92E+03
Mfy:
Mfz:
Cr:
0.00E+00
Mrz:
Mrz:
Mry:
3.10E+02
:
Cez:
-- PAGE NO.
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
2.92E+03
3.10E+02
1.46E+02 0.85
1.89E+03
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
5.38E+02
3.10E+02
1.46E+02 0.85
1.89E+03
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
5.38E+02
2.83E+02
1.46E+02 0.85
1.89E+03
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
Mrz:
Mrz:
2.83E+02
2.83E+02
Vfy:
Mfy:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
Vry:
Mry:
Cey:
4.52E+02
1.46E+02
1 --------------------
Reference
Kulak, G.L. and G.Y.Grondin. 2010. Limit States Design in Structural Steel. 9th Edition. Markham,
ON:CISC. Example 5.1
Problem
A W310x52 beam spans 7.3 m. Both ends of the beam are supported by columns connected standard
web angle connections.
The material used is G40.21 350W steel (Fy = 350 MPa) (FYLD)
Calculations
The nominal yield strength is used for the actual yield strength for a Group 2 section, per Table 3
and Table 4 of Appendix A of the reference.
Section Classification
Evaluate the slenderness effects of the beam flanges:
b
2t
167
2 13.2
= 6.3 <
170
= 9.1
350
318 2(13.2 )
7.6
= 38.4 <
1, 700
350
= 90.9
Both the beam flanges and web are less than the local buckling limit, so the capacity of the column
is evaluated using Eq. 5.7.
Bending Capacity
Factored moment resistance is:
M r = ZxFy = 0.90 841 (10 ) 3 350 = 265 (10 ) 3 Nmm = 265 kNm
Equate this to the bending moment due to a uniformly distributed load and solve for the load:
Mr
wf =
wf L
8
8M r
L
8 265
(7.3 )2
= 39.8 kN/m
Comparison
Table 3E.5-Verification Problem comparison
Criteria
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
M (kNm)
265
265
none
w (kN/m)
39.8
39.8*
none
Note: STAAD.Pro does calculate the allowable uniform load on the beam. Instead, this is done by
applying a load of 10 kN/m in the model and then dividing this by the critical ratio (10 is selected
so sufficient digits are reported in the critical ratio). Thus, 10 kN/m / 0.251 = 39.84 kN/m. In other
words, dividing 10 kN/m by the calculated w equals the critical ratio determined by STAAD.Pro
f
(0.251).
STAAD Input
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 17-Sep-13
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 7.3 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.92
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
TYPE STEEL
STRENGTH FY 350000 FU 450000 RY 1.5 RT 1.2
G 7.692e+007
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
1 TABLE ST W310X52
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -10
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION ALL
PARAMETER 1
CODE CANADIAN
LAT 1 ALL
STAAD Output
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - S16-14 (v1.0)
*******************************************
MET
1 --------------------
MEMBER NO:
1
CRITICAL RATIO: 0.251(PASS)
LOAD:
LOCATION (MET): 3.65 CONDITION: Cl. 13.8
SECTION: ST
W310X52
(CANADIAN SECTIONS)
UNIT: KN MET
STRENGTH CHECKS:
CRITICAL RATIO: 0.251(PASS)
LOAD CASE:
1 LOCATION (MET): 3.65
13.8
DESIGN FORCES:
Fx:
0.00(T)
Fy:
0.00
Fz:
0.00
Mx:
0.00E+00
My: 0.00E+00
Mz: -6.66E+01
CONDITION: Cl.
UNIT: CM
SECTION PROPERTIES:
AZZ:
SZZ:
IZZ:
44.088 AYY:
748.428 SYY:
11900.002 IYY:
FYLD:
350.000
23.165 CW:
123.353
1030.000
239225.359
UNIT: NEW MM
MATERIAL PROPERTIES:
ACTUAL MEMBER LENGTH(MET):
PARAMETERS:
SLENDERNESS:
7.300
KX: 1.000
SECTION CLASS:
COMPRESSION:
FLEXURE
SECTION:
FLANGE:
WEB:
KY:
Class 4
MAJOR
Class 1
Class 1
MINOR
Class 1
Class 1
Class 1
UNIT: KN MET
FU:
1.000
185.766
300.000
450.000
NSF:
LOAD:
1.000
SLF:
1
1.000
LOC.(MET):
0.000
TENSION:
YIELDING:
RUPTURE:
STAAD SPACE
FORCE:
0.000
0.000
CAPACITY:
2101.050
2251.125
RATIO:
0.000
0.000
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.2
Cl. 13.2
LOAD CASE:
1
1
-- PAGE NO.
MET
INTERMEDIATE:
SHEAR:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
INTERMEDIATE:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
v1.0
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
Cl. 13.3.5(a)
1
Cl. 13.3.5(a)
1
n:
0.719
1.340
2.443
1.340
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
RATIO:
0.000
n:
1.340
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
Cl. 13.3.5(a)
1
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
CAPACITY:
502.453
833.263
Kv:
5.340
RATIO:
0.073
0.000
Ka:
94.699
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.4.1.1
1
0.000
AISC G2-1
1
0.000
Fcri:(N MM) Fcre:(N MM) Fs:(N MM)
326.760
231.000
0.003
CAPACITY:
2.65E+02
5.95E+01
Se:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
RATIO:
0.251
0.000
My:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
0.000
1024.436
Fe:(N MM)
253.473
1.175
FORCE:
36.500
0.000
Aw:(CM)
23.165
44.088
COMPRESSION:
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
RATIO:
MAJOR:
0.000
1587.513
0.000
MINOR:
0.000
322.454
0.000
INTERMEDIATE:
Ag:(CM)
KL/r:
Fe:(N MM)
MAJOR:
65.224
54.653
677.375
MINOR:
65.224
185.766
58.630
FLEX TOR BUCK:
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
UNIT: KN MET
YIELDING:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
INTERMEDIATE:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
FORCE:
6.66E+01
0.00E+00
Mp:
2.94E+02
6.62E+01
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.5(a)
Cl. 13.5(a)
LOAD CASE:
1
1
LOCATION(MET):
3.650
0.000
UNIT: KN MET
INTERACTION:
RATIO:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.251
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.214
MEMBER STRENGTH:
0.128
FLEX AND SHEAR:
0.183
BIAXIAL FLEX:
0.251
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.9.1
3.650
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
1
1
1
1
143.701
0.000
119.751
143.701
13.8.2
13.8.2
14.6(a)
13.8
INTERMEDIATE:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
Tf:
0.00E+00 Tr:
2.10E+03 Mfz:
6.66E+01 Mrz:
2.65E+02
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
Cf:
Mfz:
Mfy:
Cr:
Mrz:
Mry:
:
Cez:
U1z: U1y:
C/S STR: 0.00E+00 6.66E+01 0.00E+00 2.05E+03 2.65E+02 5.95E+01 0.60 4.52E+03
3.91E+02 1.0 1.0
Cey:
6.66E+01
Mfz:
0.00E+00
1.59E+03
2.65E+02
5.95E+01 0.85
4.52E+03
6.48E+01
Mrz:
2.65E+02
Vfy:
6.08E+00 Vry:
5.02E+02
-- PAGE NO.
7
6.66E+01
Mrz:
2.65E+02
Mfy:
0.00E+00
Mry:
5.95E+01
1 --------------------
Reference
Kulak, G.L. and G.Y.Grondin. 2010. Limit States Design in Structural Steel. 9th Edition. Markham,
ON:CISC. Example 5.2
Problem
A beam must be selected to span 11.0 m. The end moment of the span are:
M1 = -540 kNm
M2 = -185 kNm
And the maximum moment in the span is:
M3 = 256 kNm
The beam is braced at 2.5 m from the center of each supporting column (thus Lb = 6.0 m) (LT 6.0).
The material used is G40.21 350W steel (Fy = 350 MPa) (FYLD)
Calculations
Assume a Class 2 section:
Mr = Mp = ZxFy
Thus,
Zx
540(10 )
0.9 350
= 1, 714 (10 ) 3 mm 3
Try a W460x82:
Zx = 1,830(10)3 mm3 , tf = 16.0 mm, bf = 191.0 mm, tw = 9.9 mm, D = 460.0 mm
Evaluate the slenderness effects of the beam flanges:
b
2t
191
2 16.0
= 5.7 <
170
= 9.1
350
h
w
460 2(16.0 )
9.9
= 43.2<
1, 700
350
= 90.9
The assumptions are valid and this beam is sufficient to support the given moments.
Mr = 0.91,830(10)3 350 [(10)-6 ] = 576.5 kNm
Ratio = 540 / 576.5 = 0.937
Comparison
Table 3E.6-Verification Problem comparison
Criteria
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
W460x82 *
W460x82
none
M (kNm)
576.5 **
576
negligible
Critical Ratio
0.937 **
0.937
none
Section
r
Note:
*The reference also tries a W530x82, which is stiffer for the same weight. STAAD.Pro
selects the shallower beam.
** The reference does not calculate the resisting moment capacity nor the critical ratio for
either section size, but they are evaluated here for completeness.
STAAD Input
In order to model this beam in STAAD.Pro, we need to determine the distributed load which
would result in the same mid-span moment on a beam with the given end moments. From the
AISCStreel Construction Manual, p 3-222:
M3 =
256 =
wf L 2
8
(M 1 + M 2 )
wf (11.0 )2
8
(M 1 M 2 )2
(540 + 185 )
2
2w f L 2
(540 185 )2
2wf (11.0 )2
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.92
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
TYPE STEEL
STRENGTH FY 350000 FU 450000 RY 1.5 RT 1.2
G 7.692e+007
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
1 TABLE ST W530x82
*1 TABLE ST W460x82
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -40.033
JOINT LOAD
1 MZ 540
2 MZ -185
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION ALL
PARAMETER 1
CODE CANADIAN
LAT 1 ALL
FYLD 350000 ALL
FU 450000 ALL
LT 6.0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
*CHECK CODE ALL
SELECT ALL
FINISH
STAAD Output
STAAD.PRO MEMBER SELECTION - S16-14 (v1.0)
**********************************************
MET
1 -------------------1
UNIT: KN MET
STRENGTH CHECKS:
CRITICAL RATIO: 0.937(PASS)
LOAD CASE:
1 LOCATION (MET): 0.00
13.8
DESIGN FORCES:
Fx:
0.00(T)
Fy:
252.45
Fz:
0.00
Mx:
0.00E+00
My: 0.00E+00
Mz:
5.40E+02
CONDITION: Cl.
UNIT: CM
SECTION PROPERTIES:
AZZ:
SZZ:
IZZ:
61.120 AYY:
1608.696 SYY:
37000.004 IYY:
FYLD:
350.000
43.956 CW:
194.764
1860.000
916682.500
UNIT: NEW MM
MATERIAL PROPERTIES:
ACTUAL MEMBER LENGTH(MET):
PARAMETERS:
SLENDERNESS:
11.000
KX: 1.000
KY:
FU:
1.000
141.877
300.000
450.000
NSF:
LOAD:
1.000
SLF:
1
1.000
LOC.(MET):
0.000
SECTION CLASS:
COMPRESSION:
FLEXURE
SECTION:
FLANGE:
WEB:
Class 4
MAJOR
Class 1
Class 1
MINOR
Class 1
Class 1
Class 1
UNIT: KN MET
TENSION:
YIELDING:
RUPTURE:
STAAD SPACE
FORCE:
0.000
0.000
CAPACITY:
3276.000
965.250
RATIO:
0.000
0.000
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.2
Cl. 13.2
LOAD CASE:
1
1
-- PAGE NO.
MET
INTERMEDIATE:
SHEAR:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
INTERMEDIATE:
v1.0
COMPRESSION:
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
RATIO:
MAJOR:
0.000
2261.248
0.000
MINOR:
0.000
769.520
0.000
INTERMEDIATE:
Ag:(CM)
KL/r:
Fe:(N MM)
MAJOR:
96.728
58.319
594.890
MINOR:
96.728
141.877
100.515
FLEX TOR BUCK:
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
0.000
1194.267
Fe:(N MM)
176.222
1.409
RATIO:
0.000
n:
1.340
FORCE:
252.454
0.000
Aw:(CM)
RATIO:
0.267
0.000
Ka:
CAPACITY:
946.776
1155.168
Kv:
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
Cl. 13.3.5(a)
1
Cl. 13.3.5(a)
1
n:
0.767
1.340
1.866
1.340
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
Cl. 13.3.5(a)
1
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.4.1.1
1
0.000
AISC G2-1
1
0.000
Fcri:(N MM) Fcre:(N MM) Fs:(N MM)
MAJOR:
MINOR:
43.956
61.120
5.340
74.589
289.997
231.000
0.003
UNIT: KN MET
YIELDING:
FORCE:
MAJOR:
-5.40E+02
MINOR:
0.00E+00
INTERMEDIATE:
Mp:
MAJOR:
6.41E+02
MINOR:
1.06E+02
CAPACITY:
5.76E+02
9.54E+01
Se:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
RATIO:
0.937
0.000
My:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.5(a)
Cl. 13.5(a)
LOAD CASE:
1
1
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
UNIT: KN MET
INTERACTION:
RATIO:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.937
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.796
MEMBER STRENGTH:
0.587
FLEX AND SHEAR:
0.802
BIAXIAL FLEX:
0.937
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.9.1
0.000
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
1
1
1
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13.8.2
13.8.2
14.6(a)
13.8
INTERMEDIATE:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
Tf:
0.00E+00 Tr:
9.65E+02 Mfz: -5.40E+02 Mrz:
5.76E+02
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
Cf:
Mfz:
Mfy:
Cr:
Mrz:
Mry:
:
Cez:
U1z: U1y:
C/S STR: 0.00E+00 -5.40E+02 0.00E+00 3.05E+03 5.76E+02 9.54E+01 0.60 6.19E+03
1.05E+03 1.0 1.0
MEM STR: 0.00E+00 -5.40E+02 0.00E+00 2.26E+03 5.76E+02 9.54E+01 0.85 6.19E+03
1.05E+03 0.7 1.0
FLEX SHEAR: Mfz: -5.40E+02 Mrz:
5.76E+02 Vfy:
2.52E+02 Vry:
9.47E+02
STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO.
7
BIAX FLEX:
Mfz:
-5.40E+02
Mrz:
5.76E+02
Mfy:
0.00E+00
Mry:
Cey:
9.54E+01
1 --------------------
Reference
Kulak, G.L. and G.Y.Grondin. 2010. Limit States Design in Structural Steel. 9th Edition. Markham,
ON:CISC. Example 5.3
Problem
The W530x82 beam has a maximum shear force, v = 540 kN due to factored loads.
L = 11.0 m
The material used is G40.21 350W steel (Fy = 350 MPa) (FYLD)
Calculations
Evaluate the slenderness effects of the beam web:
h
w
528 2(13.3 )
9.5
= 52.8< 439
kv
Fy
= 439
5.34
350
= 54.2
wf L
2
M1 M2
L
40.17 11.0
540 185
11.0
= 253.2 kN
Comparison
Table 3E.7-Verification Problem comparison
Criteria
V (kN)
r
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
1,043
1,042.826
negligible
STAAD Input
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 17-Sep-13
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 11 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.92
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
TYPE STEEL
*STRENGTH FY 350000 FU 450000 RY 1.5 RT 1.2
G 7.692e+007
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
1 TABLE ST W530X82
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 ENFORCED BUT FX MX MY MZ
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
1 MZ 540
2 MZ -185
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -40.033
1 CON GY -287 0.001
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION ALL
PARAMETER 1
CODE CANADIAN
FYLD 350000 ALL
FU 450000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
STAAD Output
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - S16-14 (v1.0)
*******************************************
MET
1 --------------------
*MEMBER NO:
1
CRITICAL RATIO: 1.746(FAIL)
LOAD:
LOCATION (MET): 0.00 CONDITION: Cl. 13.8
SECTION: ST
W530X82
(CANADIAN SECTIONS)
UNIT: KN MET
STRENGTH CHECKS:
CRITICAL RATIO: 1.746(FAIL)
LOAD CASE:
1 LOCATION (MET): 0.00
13.8
DESIGN FORCES:
Fx:
0.00(T)
Fy:
539.43
Fz:
0.00
Mx:
0.00E+00
My: 0.00E+00
Mz:
5.40E+02
CONDITION: Cl.
UNIT: CM
SECTION PROPERTIES:
UNIT: NEW MM
AZZ:
SZZ:
IZZ:
55.594 AYY:
1806.818 SYY:
47700.008 IYY:
48.896 CW:
194.258
2030.000
1344449.250
MATERIAL PROPERTIES:
FYLD:
350.000
11.000
KX: 1.000
FU:
KY:
1.000
250.172
300.000
450.000
NSF:
1.000
LOAD:
SLF:
1
1.000
LOC.(MET):
0.000
SECTION CLASS:
COMPRESSION:
FLEXURE
SECTION:
FLANGE:
WEB:
Class 4
MAJOR
Class 2
Class 2
MINOR
Class 2
Class 2
Class 1
UNIT: KN MET
TENSION:
YIELDING:
RUPTURE:
STAAD SPACE
FORCE:
0.000
0.000
CAPACITY:
3307.500
3543.750
RATIO:
0.000
0.000
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.2
Cl. 13.2
LOAD CASE:
1
1
-- PAGE NO.
MET
INTERMEDIATE:
SHEAR:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
INTERMEDIATE:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
v1.0
COMPRESSION:
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
RATIO:
MAJOR:
0.000
2253.274
0.000
MINOR:
0.000
253.222
0.000
INTERMEDIATE:
Ag:(CM)
KL/r:
Fe:(N MM)
MAJOR:
89.688
51.609
759.622
MINOR:
89.688
250.172
32.328
FLEX TOR BUCK:
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
Cl. 13.3.5(a)
1
Cl. 13.3.5(a)
1
n:
0.679
1.340
3.290
1.340
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
0.000
855.157
Fe:(N MM)
125.328
1.671
RATIO:
0.000
n:
1.340
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
Cl. 13.3.5(a)
1
FORCE:
539.428
0.000
Aw:(CM)
48.896
55.594
CAPACITY:
1042.826
1050.727
Kv:
5.340
RATIO:
0.517
0.000
Ka:
50.046
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.4.1.1
1
0.000
AISC G2-1
1
0.000
Fcri:(N MM) Fcre:(N MM) Fs:(N MM)
237.543
231.000
0.003
CAPACITY:
6.49E+02
9.54E+01
Se:
0.00E+00
RATIO:
0.832
0.000
My:
0.00E+00
UNIT: KN MET
YIELDING:
FORCE:
MAJOR:
-5.40E+02
MINOR:
0.00E+00
INTERMEDIATE:
Mp:
MAJOR:
7.21E+02
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.5(a)
Cl. 13.5(a)
LOAD CASE:
1
1
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
MINOR:
1.06E+02
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
UNIT: KN MET
LAT TOR BUCK:
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
MAJOR:
-5.40E+02
3.09E+02
INTERMEDIATE: Iyc(CM):
2:
3:
MAJOR:
0.00E+00 2.36
0.00
RATIO:
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
1.746
Cl. 13.6(a)(ii
1
x:
Mu:
rt:
Myr:
0.00
3.44E+02 0.00
0.00E+00
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
Lu:
Lyr:
0.00
0.00
UNIT: KN MET
INTERACTION:
RATIO:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.832
MEMBER STRENGTH:
1.746
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.707
MEMBER STRENGTH:
0.521
LTB STRENGTH:
1.484
FLEX AND SHEAR:
1.505
BIAXIAL FLEX:
1.746
STAAD SPACE
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.9.1
Cl. 13.9.2
1
1
0.000
0.000
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
1
1
1
1
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-- PAGE NO.
13.8.2
13.8.2
13.8.2
14.6(a)
13.8
INTERMEDIATE:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
Tf:
0.00E+00 Tr:
3.31E+03 Mfz: -5.40E+02 Mrz:
6.49E+02
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
Cf:
Mfz:
Mfy:
Cr:
Mrz:
Mry:
:
Cez:
U1z: U1y:
C/S STR: 0.00E+00 -5.40E+02 0.00E+00 2.83E+03 6.49E+02 9.54E+01 0.60 7.98E+03
3.39E+02 1.0 1.0
MEM STR: 0.00E+00 -5.40E+02 0.00E+00 2.25E+03 6.49E+02 9.54E+01 0.85 7.98E+03
3.39E+02 0.7 1.0
LTB STR: 0.00E+00 -5.40E+02 0.00E+00 2.53E+02 3.09E+02 9.54E+01 0.85 7.98E+03
3.39E+02 1.0 1.0
FLEX SHEAR: Mfz: -5.40E+02 Mrz:
3.09E+02 Vfy:
5.39E+02 Vry:
1.04E+03
BIAX FLEX:
Mfz: -5.40E+02 Mrz:
3.09E+02 Mfy:
0.00E+00 Mry:
9.54E+01
-------------------- END OF DESIGN OUTPUT OF MEMBER
Cey:
1 --------------------
Reference
Kulak, G.L. and G.Y.Grondin. 2010. Limit States Design in Structural Steel. 9th Edition. Markham,
ON:CISC. Example 8.5
Problem
The W250x73 column has the following concentrated loads applied at the top of the column:
Cf = 900 kN
Mfx = 180 kNm
The material used is G40.21 350W steel (Fy = 350 MPa) (FYLD). The column is assumed to be braced
laterally against lateral-torsional buckling (LAT 1).
L = 3.6 m
Calculations
Refer to Example 3E.8.2 for previous calculations on classification of the section.
Axial Capacity
Determine the buckling load of the column, assuming that weak axis bucking will not control due
to bracing:
( )
KL
r
1.0(3, 600 )
= 32.7
110
KL 2
r x
( )
Fy
Fey
2 200, 000
2E
(32.7 )
350
= 0.435
1, 847
Cr = AFy 1 + 2n
) = 1, 847 kN
1 / n
1/ 1.34
Moment Modifier
= -0/180 = 0
1 = 0.6 - 0.4 = 0.6 1.0
Calculate the elastic buckling load for the bending axis:
2
Ce =
U1x =
(1.0 3, 600 )
0.6
1
900
17, 210
= 17, 211kN
= 0.633
Bending Capacity
From a previous example, the W250x73 is a Class 2 section. It is laterally supported along its length,
thus:
Mrx = 0.9985103 350 = 310 kNm
This is the check for overall member strength. However, there is another case that actually controls
in this instance: checking for cross sectional strength.
Cr = 0.99,280350 = 2,923 kN
U1x = 1.0
900
2, 923
Comparison
Table 3E.8-Verification Problem comparison
Criteria
(KL/r)
32.624
negligible
56
55.675
negligible
C (kN)
2,716
2,716
none
C (kN)
17,211
17,600
2.3%
Stress Ratio
0.644
0.643
none
Stress Ratio
(Critical)
0.801
0.801
none
(KL/r)
x
y
Note: Both the reference and hand calculations agree with the STAAD.Pro results that the
section is adequate. The reference however neglects to account for section capacity checks, which
control in this case.
Reference
Kulak, G.L. and G.Y.Grondin. 2010. Limit States Design in Structural Steel. 9th Edition. Markham,
ON:CISC. Example 8.6
Problem
The W250x73 column has the following concentrated loads
Cf = 900 kN
And a uniform moment of:
Mfx = 180 kNm
The material used is G40.21 350W steel (Fy = 350 MPa) (FYLD). The beam is braced against lateraltorsional buckling only at the ends (LAT 0, default)
Calculations
Axial Capacity
Determine the buckling load of the column:
( )
( )
KL
r
KL
r
1.0(3, 600 )
110
1.0(3, 600 )
64.6
= 32.7
= 55.7
KL 2
r x
( )
Fy
Fey
2 200, 000
2E
(55.7 )
350
= 0.742
635.6
Cr = AFy 1 + 2n
) = 635.6 kN
1 / n
1/ 1.34
Moment Modifier
Uniform moment:
1 = 1.0
Calculate the elastic buckling load for the bending axis:
2
Ce =
U1x =
900
17, 211
= 17, 211kN
= 1.06
Bending Capacity
2 = 1.0
EIyGJ = 200,00038.876.92575= 343.21021 MPa2 mm8
E 2
( ) I C =(
L
Mu =
200, 000 2
y w
2
L
3, 600
EI yGJ +
( )IC
E
L
1.0
3, 600
21
MPa 2 mm8
M r = 1.15M p1
0.28M p
Mu
0.28 345
871
= 317 kNm
Comparison
Table 3E.9-Verification Problem comparison
Criteria
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
33
32.624
negligible
56
55.675
negligible
C (kN)
2,216
2,234
1.0%
C (kN)
17,211
17,600
2.3%
Stress Ratio
0.929
0.922
negligible
(KL/r)
(KL/r)
x
y
Note: Both the reference and hand calculations agree with the STAAD.Pro results that the
section is adequate. The reference however neglects to account for section capacity checks, which
control in this case.
STAAD Input
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 17-Sep-13
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.6 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.92
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
TYPE STEEL
STRENGTH FY 350000 FU 450000 RY 1.5 RT 1.2
G 7.692e+007
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
1 TABLE ST W250X73
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 ENFORCED BUT FY MX MY MZ
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
1 FY 900 MZ 180
2 FY -900 MZ -180
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION ALL
PARAMETER 1
CODE CANADIAN
FYLD 350000 ALL
FU 450000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
STAAD Output
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - S16-14 (v1.0)
*******************************************
MET
1 --------------------
MEMBER NO:
1
CRITICAL RATIO: 0.922(PASS)
LOAD:
LOCATION (MET): 0.00 CONDITION: Cl. 13.8.2
SECTION: ST
W250X73
(CANADIAN SECTIONS)
UNIT: KN MET
STRENGTH CHECKS:
CRITICAL RATIO: 0.922(PASS)
LOAD CASE:
1 LOCATION (MET): 0.00
13.8.2
DESIGN FORCES:
Fx:
900.00(C)
Fy:
0.00
Fz:
0.00
Mx:
0.00E+00
My: 0.00E+00
Mz:
1.80E+02
CONDITION: Cl.
UNIT: CM
SECTION PROPERTIES:
AZZ:
SZZ:
IZZ:
72.136 AYY:
893.281 SYY:
11300.001 IYY:
FYLD:
350.000
20.537 CW:
305.512
3880.000
553146.812
UNIT: NEW MM
MATERIAL PROPERTIES:
ACTUAL MEMBER LENGTH(MET):
PARAMETERS:
SLENDERNESS:
3.600
KX: 1.000
KY:
FU:
1.000
55.675
200.000
450.000
NSF:
LOAD:
1.000
SLF:
1
1.000
LOC.(MET):
0.000
SECTION CLASS:
COMPRESSION:
FLEXURE
SECTION:
FLANGE:
WEB:
Class 1
MAJOR
Class 2
Class 2
MINOR
Class 2
Class 2
Class 1
UNIT: KN MET
TENSION:
YIELDING:
RUPTURE:
STAAD SPACE
FORCE:
0.000
0.000
CAPACITY:
2923.200
3132.000
RATIO:
0.000
0.000
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.2
Cl. 13.2
LOAD CASE:
1
1
-- PAGE NO.
MET
v1.0
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
6
COMPRESSION:
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
RATIO:
MAJOR:
900.000
2715.935
0.331
MINOR:
900.000
2233.940
0.403
INTERMEDIATE:
Ag:(CM)
KL/r:
Fe:(N MM)
MAJOR:
0.000
32.624
1900.987
MINOR:
0.000
55.675
652.728
SHEAR:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
INTERMEDIATE:
MAJOR:
MINOR:
FORCE:
0.000
0.000
Aw:(CM)
20.537
72.136
CAPACITY:
452.349
1363.370
Kv:
5.340
RATIO:
0.000
0.000
Ka:
204.396
CAPACITY:
3.10E+02
1.46E+02
Se:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
RATIO:
0.580
0.000
My:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.3
Cl. 13.3
0.429
0.732
LOAD CASE:
1
1
n:
1.340
1.340
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.4.1.1
1
0.000
AISC G2-1
1
0.000
Fcri:(N MM) Fcre:(N MM) Fs:(N MM)
480.055
231.000
0.005
UNIT: KN MET
YIELDING:
FORCE:
MAJOR:
-1.80E+02
MINOR:
0.00E+00
INTERMEDIATE:
Mp:
MAJOR:
3.45E+02
MINOR:
1.62E+02
CRITERIA:
Cl. 13.5(a)
Cl. 13.5(a)
LOAD CASE:
1
1
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
0.000
RATIO:
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
0.566
Cl. 13.6(a)(i)
1
x:
Mu:
rt:
Myr:
0.00
8.89E+02 0.00
0.00E+00
LOCATION(MET):
0.000
Lu:
Lyr:
0.00
0.00
UNIT: KN MET
LAT TOR BUCK:
FORCE:
CAPACITY:
MAJOR:
-1.80E+02
3.18E+02
INTERMEDIATE: Iyc(CM):
2:
3:
MAJOR:
0.00E+00 1.00
0.00
UNIT: KN MET
INTERACTION:
RATIO:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.580
MEMBER STRENGTH:
0.580
FLEXURE AND AXIAL COMPRESSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
0.828
MEMBER STRENGTH:
0.851
LTB STRENGTH:
0.922
FLEX AND SHEAR:
0.422
BIAXIAL FLEX:
0.580
INTERMEDIATE:
FLEXURE AND AXIAL TENSION:
C/S STRENGTH:
Tf:
0.00E+00
STAAD SPACE
FLEXURE AND AXIAL
Cf:
U1z: U1y:
C/S STR: 9.00E+02
6.06E+03 1.1 1.0
MEM STR: 9.00E+02
6.06E+03 1.1 1.0
LTB STR: 9.00E+02
6.06E+03 1.1 1.0
FLEX SHEAR: Mfz:
BIAX FLEX:
Mfz:
COMPRESSION:
Mfz:
Tr:
Mfy:
CRITERIA:
LOAD CASE:
LOCATION(MET):
Cl. 13.9.1
Cl. 13.9.2
1
1
0.000
0.000
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
1
1
1
1
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13.8.2
13.8.2
13.8.2
14.6(a)
13.8
2.92E+03
Mfz:
-1.80E+02 Mrz:
-- PAGE NO.
Cr:
Mrz:
Mry:
3.10E+02
7
Cez:
-1.80E+02
0.00E+00
2.92E+03
3.10E+02
1.46E+02 0.60
1.76E+04
-1.80E+02
0.00E+00
2.72E+03
3.10E+02
1.46E+02 0.85
1.76E+04
-1.80E+02
0.00E+00
2.23E+03
3.10E+02
1.46E+02 0.85
1.76E+04
-1.80E+02
-1.80E+02
Mrz:
Mrz:
3.10E+02
3.10E+02
Vfy:
Mfy:
0.00E+00
0.00E+00
Vry:
Mry:
Cey:
4.52E+02
1.46E+02
1 --------------------
4
Cypriot Codes
4 Cypriot Codes
Default
Value
-
Description
BRACE
0.0
CLEAR
20 mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
ELY
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
ELZ
1.0
FC
4.0 ksi
FYMAIN
60 ksi
FYSEC
60 ksi
MAX
MAIN
50 mm
MINMAIN
8 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MMAG
1.0
NSE
CTION
12
SERV
0.0
Serviceability checks:
0. No serviceability check performed.
1. Perform serviceability check for beams as if
they were continuous.
2. Perform serviceability check for beams as if
they were simply supported.
3. Perform serviceability check for beams as if
they were cantilever beams.
SFACE
0.0
Parameter
Name
SRA
Default
Value
0.0
Description
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
5
Danish Codes
5 Danish Codes
Default
Value
-
Description
BEAM
1.0
BY
1.0
BZ
1.0
CB
1.0
CMY
1.0
CMZ
0.21
CY
CZ
DMAX
1,000
mm
DMIN
0.0 mm
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
FYLD
235
N/mm 2
Description
MF
1.15
RATIO
1.0
SSY
SSZ
TRACK
0.0
UNL
Member
Length
6
Dutch Codes
6 Dutch Codes
Default
Value
Description
Must be specified as DUTCH
CODE
BEAM
3.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Loading type per Tables F.1.1 and F.1.2
1. Pin ended member with uniform loading
2. Fix ended member with uniform loading
3. Pin ended member with central point load.
CMM
1.0
CMN
1.0
0.7 = One end fixed, the other free.
0.5 = Both ends fixed.
DFF
None
(Mandatory
for
deflection
check,
TRACK 4.0)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint
of member
DMAX
10,000 cm
DMIN
0.0 cm
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
Parameter
Name
NSF
PY
RATIO
Default
Value
1.0
Set
according
to steel
grade (SGR)
1.0
Description
Net section factor for tension members.
SAME
0.0
SBLT
0.0
0. Rolled Section
1. Built up Section
Steel Grade
SGR
0.0
0. Grade Fe 360
1. Grade Fe 430
2. Grade Fe 510
Used to control the level output detail:
0. Output summary of results.
TRACK
0.0
UNL
Member
Length
7
European Codes
7 European Codes
7A.5 Columns
7A.5 Columns
Columns are designed for axial compressive loads and possible moments at the ends of the
member. If a particular load case causes tension in the column being designed that load case is
ignored, the design proceeds with a warning message given to that affect.
All active load cases will be considered in the design and reinforcements are assumed
symmetrically arranged in the cross section.
The maximum reinforcement calculated after all design load cases have been considered is then
reported as the critical required area of reinforcement.
Slender columns are also covered in the design process, the program will make due allowance for
the additional moment that has to be considered in the design.
Note: Sway type structures are not directly covered in the current implementation of EC2. This
effect, however, can be accounted for by the P-DELTA analysis option.
7A.6 Beams
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these actions active load cases are scanned
to create appropriate envelopes for the design process. Maximum torsional moment is also
identified and incorporated in the design.
7A.7 Slabs
If required, compression reinforcement will be provided in order to satisfy the above limits. It is
important to know that beams are designed for the flexural moment MZ only. The moment MY is
not considered in the design at all.
7A.7 Slabs
Slabs can only be designed for if finite elements are used to represent them in the model of the
structure. In the main the design follows the same procedure as for flexure except that shear forces
are assumed to be resisted without the provision of shear reinforcements. In cases where this may
not be the case users must ensure that necessary checks are carried out. The output for the slab
design refers to longitudinal reinforcements, which coincides with the local x direction of the
element, and, transverse reinforcement, which coincides with the local y direction of the element.
Also, reference is made to 'TOP' and BOTT' reinforcement which relates to the element's 'TOP' and
'BOTTOM' as determined from the connectivity of the element. This may not coincide with the
slab's actual top and bottom and, if desired, you must ensure this through the numbering scheme
of the elements. The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16mm in both directions with
the longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior faces. Refer to Figure 1.21 in Section
1.61. of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the parameter default values. Some
parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new setting must be compatible with the
active "unit" specification. Table 8A.1 lists all the relevant EC2 parameters together with description
and default values.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is specified
again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 7A.1-Concrete Design EC2 Parameters
Parameter
Name
BRACE
Default Value
0.0
Description
CLEAR
* 20mm
DEPTH
*YD
EFACE
*0.0
ELY
1.0
ELZ
1.0
FC
* 30N/mm 2
FYMAIN
*460 N/mm 2
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
*460N/mm 2
MINMAIN
8mm
MINSEC
8mm
MAXMAIN
50mm
FYSEC
MMAG
1.0
NSECTION
10
SERV
0.0
SFACE
*0.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
SRA
0.0
Description
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
*ZD
7B. European Codes - Steel Design per Eurocode 3 [DD ENV 1993-11:1992]
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the European code EC3 DD ENV 1993-11:1992 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures Part 1.1 General rules and rules for buildings.
Design of members per EC3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 requires the STAAD ECC Super Code
SELECTCode Pack or the STAADUKSuper Code SELECTCode Pack.
Note: The DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code has now been officially superseded by EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Hence releases of STAAD.Pro subsequent to version SS3 (20.07.08.xx) will not support this design
code. The SS3 build will perform member design to this code for legacy files but has this code
removed from the design codes list in the GUI. Users are advised to use the EN 1993-1-1:2005
version for Eurocode 3 design.
Tip: Design per EC3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 is also available in the Steel Design mode in the
Graphical User Interface.
under a specific loading condition. In STAAD only Simple and Continuous joint types can be
assumed when carrying out global analysis.
The bending capacity is primarily a function of the section type and the material yield strength and
is determined according to Cl. 5.4.5 of the code. The shear capacity and the corresponding shear
checks are done as per section 5.4.6 of the code.
There are four classes of cross-sections defined in EC3. Class 1 and 2 sections can both attain full
capacity with the exception that the class 2 sections cannot sustain sufficient rotation required for
plastic analysis of the model. Hence the full plastic section modulus is used in the design
calculations. Class 3 sections, due to local buckling, cannot develop plastic moment capacity and
the yield stress is limited to the extreme compression fibre of the section. The elastic section
modulus is used to determine the moment capacity for class 3 sections. Class 4 sections do suffer
from local buckling and explicit allowance must be made for the reduction in section properties
before the moment capacity can be determined. Further, because of interaction between shear force
and bending moment, the moment resistance of the cross-section may be reduced. This, however,
does not occur unless the value of applied shear forces exceeds 50% of the plastic shear capacity of
the section. In such cases the web is assumed to resist the applied shear force as well as
contributing towards the moment resistance of the cross-section.
As mentioned in the previous section, the design of class 4 sections is limited to WIDE FLANGE,
TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS. The
effective section properties are worked out as described in Cl. 5.3.5 of the code.
Beams are also checked for lateral-torsional buckling according to section 5.5.2 of the code. The
buckling capacity is dependent on the section type as well as the unrestrained length, restraint
conditions and type of applied loading. The lateral torsional buckling checks involves the
calculation of the Elastic critical moment, Mcr, which is calculated in STAAD as per the method
given in Annex F of the code.
In the presence of a shear force, beams are also checked for shear as per section 5.4.6 of the code. In
cases where the members are subject to combined bending and shear, the combined bending and
shear checks are done in STAAD as per clause 5.4.7 of the code.
In addition to the cross section checks, buckling resistance will also be checked for such members.
This is often the critical case as the buckling strength of the member is influenced by a number of
factors including the section type and the unbraced length of the member. The buckling capacity is
calculated as per Cl. 5.5 of the code.
DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double channels or
Tee sections and does give a method to work out the slenderness of such members. In these cases,
the EC3 DD design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate
the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and table 25 of BS 5950-1:2000 are used in the current
version of the EC3 DD design module
RAangle
design module in STAAD takes such a scenario into account and performs the necessary checks as
per Cl. 5.4.8 of the code. Class 1 and class 2 sections are checked as per cl. 5.4.8.1 and Class 3 and
Class 4 sections are checked as per clauses 5.4.8.2 and 5.4.8.3 respectively. The effective section
properties for class 4 sections are worked out as given in Cl. 5.3.5 of the code.
Generally, EC3 requires checking cross-section resistance for local capacity and also checking the
overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members subject to axial tension and
bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect of the tension load into consideration. This
is achieved by modifying the extreme compression fibre stress and calculating an effective applied
moment for the section. The checks are done as per Cl. 5.5.3 of the code. In case of a combined axial
compressive load and bending moment, the member will be checked as per the rules in section
5.5.4 of the code.
The presence of large shear force can also reduce the bending resistance of the section under
consideration. If the shear load is large enough to cause a reduction in bending resistance, then the
reduction due to shear has to be taken into account before calculating the effect of the axial load
on the bending resistance of the section. If the member is subject to a combined shear, axial load
and bending moment then the section capacity checks will be done as per Cl. 5.4.9 of the code.
As stated in the previous section, DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically deal with single angle,
double angles, double channels or Tee sections and does give a method to work out the slenderness
of such members. In these cases, the EC3 DD design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods
specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 59501:2000 is used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module. Please refer to the note in
section 5B.5.2 for St and RA angle specifications.
Please note that laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the current version of
EC3 DD design module in STAAD.Pro.
Default Value
Description
Name
CODE
Undefined
BEAM
CAN
CMM
1.0
Parameter
Default Value
Description
Name
CMN
1.0
DMAX
100.0 cm
DMIN
DFF
None (Mandatory
Deflection limit
for deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint of
member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
FU
GB1
1.1
GM0
1.1
Corresponds to the
m0
factor in DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992
GM1
1.1
Corresponds to the
m1
factor in DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992
GM2
1.1
Corresponds to the
m2
ENV 1993-1-1:1992
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
factor in DD
Parameter
Default Value
Description
Name
LEG
0.0
Connection type
Refer to Note 1 below.
LVV
Maximum of Lyy
principle axis
term used by
BS5950)
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
PLG
PY
Yield Strength
NSF
1.0
RATIO
SBLT
1
0.0
Parameter
Default Value
Description
Name
SGR
0.0
TRACK
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member Length
ZIV
0.8
7B.6.1 Notes
1. LEG (Ref: Table 25 BS5950)
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified in BS 5950
table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the member (Refer to section
5B.5(A).2). To define the appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned to the
member.
The following table indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the BS5950
connection definition:
4.7.10.2
Leg
LEG
Parameter
short
leg
1.0
long
leg
3.0
short
leg
0.0
long
leg
2.0
short
leg
3.0
long
leg
7.0
short
leg
2.0
long
leg
6.0
long
leg
1.0
short
leg
5.0
long
leg
0.0
short
leg
4.0
1.0
0.0
1.0
0.0
Bold
Configuration
(a) - 2 bolts
Single Angle
(b) - 1 bolts
4.7.10.3
Double
Angles
(a) - 2 bolts
(b) - 1 bolts
(c) - 2 bolts
(d) - 1 bolts
4.7.10.4
Channels
4.7.10.5 Tee
Sections
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b as well as
the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as:
La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ
The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the compression strength
pc for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified angles). The
maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to calculate the compression strength
pc for the stronger principal axis.
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not
appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two
principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25. In
addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Refer to Section 1.7.3 of the Technical
Reference Manual) an eleventh value, rvv, should be supplied at the end of the ten existing
values corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle making up the pair.
2. BEAM
Ensure that this parameter is set to either 1 or 2 while performing code checking for
members susceptible to Lateral - Torsional Buckling.
Table 7B.3-Values for the CMM Parameter
CMM Value
1
7B.7 CodeChecking
CMM Value
Note: While both sets of code checks will be reported in the output file, only the last code
check results are reported in the GUI.
7B.7 CodeChecking
The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the
members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992. Code checking is
done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members.
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have
passed or failed the checks; the critical condition ; the value of the ratio of the critical condition
(overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the governing load case,
and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical
condition occurs).
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 or any of the user
defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, with two
exceptions; GENERAL and ISECTION. The EC3 DD design module does not consider these sections
or PRISMATIC sections in its design process.
7B.8 MemberSelection
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking.
Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code
Checking command.
7B.8 MemberSelection
STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been
performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e., the lightest section, which
fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected will be of the same
type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be
constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits the maximum and minimum depth
of the members.
Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the same limitations as
defined in section 5B.7(A) Code Checking.
Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created table, will be
limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as prismatic
or as the limitations specified in section 5.B.7(A).
7B.9 TabulatedResultsofSteelDesign
For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated fashion.
The items in the output table are explained as follows:
MEMBER
refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
TABLE
refers to steel section name, which has been checked against the steel code or has been
selected.
RESULTS
prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be
an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
CRITICAL COND
refers to the clause in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code which governs the design.
RATIO
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING
provides the load case number, which governed the design.
7B.9 TabulatedResultsofSteelDesign
The current version of EC3 (EN 1993)implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules
provided in EN 1993-1-1:2005. The current version of STAAD.Pro includes the following National
Annexes viz.
a. British National Annex [NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
b. The Dutch National Annex [NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB] and
c. Norwegian National Annex [NS-EN 1993-1-1:2005/NA2008]
d. French National Annex [Annexe Nationale a la NF EN 1993-1-1:2005]
e. Finnish National Annex [SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
f. Polish National Annex [PN EN 1993-1-1:2005]
g. Singaporean National Annex [SS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
h. Belgian National Annex [NBN EN 1993-1-1:2005]
The choice of a particular National Annex is based on the value of a new NA parameter that is set by
the user when specifying the EN 1993 version of Eurocode 3. See "European Codes - National
Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 319 for a description of the NA parameter.
See "Example of a TRACK 2 output" on page 317 for an example of how this appears when Y is up
(default).
wide flange
tee
single channel
single angle
Also built-up user sections that are class 4 sections are not dealt with in the current version of EC3
design in STAAD.Pro, unless they are defined as any of the section types given above.
The design of laced and battened members is not considered in the current version of EC3 (EN
1993) design module in STAAD.Pro. The current version also does not support the design of tapered
section profiles or I-Sections with top and/or bottom plates.
failure by overstressing
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the characteristic stresses or capacities.
Member selection is done on the basis of selecting the most economic section on the basis of the
least weight criteria. It is generally assumed that you (the engineer) will take care of the detailing
requirements, such as the provision of stiffeners, and check the local effects like flange buckling,
web crippling, etc.
Note: The design of class 4 (slender) sections is limited to WIDE FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE
CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR & CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS. The
effective section properties are evaluated as described in Cl. 6.2.2.5 of the code.
You are allowed complete control over the design process through the use of the parameters listed
in Table 7C.2. Default values of parameters will yield reasonable results in most circumstances.
However, you should control the design and verify results through the use of the design
parameters.
Lateral stability of a pure compression member will be checked as per the method given in Cl. 6.3 of
the code. The compression member stability will be verified as:
N Ed
N b,Rd
Where N
1.0
b,Rd
Nb, Rd =
Nb, Rd =
Af y
M1
A eff f y
M1
Where:
is the reduction factor as given in section 6.3.12 of the code. The buckling curves used to evaluate
the reduction factor are selected from Table 6.2 of the code based on the cross section type and the
steel grade.
Note: Only the five grades of steel given in table 6.2 will be used when selecting the buckling
curve. The steel grade used for this selection is based on the SGR design input parameter (See
"Design Parameters" on page 301). Even if you have specified a custom yield strength (using the
PY parameter), the choice of a buckling curve will be based on the value of SGR parameter.
Compression members that are susceptible to torsional or torsional flexural buckling are checked
for these modes of failure as well. The non-dimensional slenderness for these members is
T
evaluated per Cl. 6.3.1.4 of the EN 1993 code. The maximum slenderness among the flexural
buckling slenderness, torsional slenderness, and torsional-flexural slenderness is used to evaluate
the reduction factor, , for such members. The elastic torsional buckling load, N , and the elastic
cr,T
torsional-flexural buckling load, N
, are evaluated based on the method given in the NCCI
cr,TF
SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes (unless
otherwise specified by a particular National Annex). The effective length for the members can be
controlled using the KZ, KY, LZ and LY parameters. If these parameters are specified, the effective
length will be calculated as KZ*LZ for length about the Z-Z axis and KY*LY for length about the YY axis. By default, the effective length will be taken as the member length.
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double channels, or Tee
sections and does not provide a method to evaluate the slenderness of such members. In these
cases, the EC3 (EN 1993) design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000
to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and Table 25 of BS 5950-1:2000 are used in
the current version of the Eurocode 3 design module.
LEG parameter, see section 5B.6 for more information on the LEG parameter. The effective length
in the a-a axis is taken as LY KY and the effective length in the b-b axis as LZ KZ.
The following diagram shows the axes for angles which have been defined with either an ST or RA
specification and is connected by its longer leg (i.e., a-a axis is parallel to the longer leg).
Figure 7C.2 - Axis orientation for single angles
RAangle
Where M
1.0
c,Rd
M c, Rd = M pl, Rd =
M c, Rd = M el, Rd =
M c, Rd =
W plf y
M0
W el,minf y
M0
W eff,minf y
M0
Cross sectional bending capacity checks will be done for both major and minor axis bending
moments.
Members subject to major axis bending will also be checked for Lateral Torsional Buckling
resistance as per Section 6.3.2 of the code. The design buckling resistance moment M
will be
b,Rd
calculated as:
M b, Rd = LT Wy
fy
M1
Where:
is the reduction factor for lateral torsional buckling. This reduction factor is
LT
evaluated per Cl. 6.3.2.2 or Cl 6.3.2.3 of the EN 1993 code depending on the section
type. For I sections, the program will by default use Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evalute and for
LT
all other sections the program will resort to Cl 6.3.2.2. However, if a particular
National Annex has been specified, the program will check if the National Annex
expands on Cl.6.3.2.3 (Table 6.5) to include sections other than I sections. If so, the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 for the cross-section(s) included in Cl. 6.2.2.3 (or Table
6.5). For all other cases the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2.
Note: You have the option to choose the clause to be used to calculate through
LT
the MTH design parameter. Setting MTH to 0 (default value) will cause the program
to choose Cl.6.3.2.3 for I Sections and Cl 6.2.3.2 for all other section types. As
mentioned above, if the National Annex expands on Cl. 6.3.2.3 to include sections
other than I Sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 by default.
When using Cl. 6.3.2.3 to calculate , the program will consider the correction
LT
factor kc (Table 6.6 of EN 1993-1-1:2006) based on the value of the KC parameter in the
design input. By default the value of KC will be taken as 1.0. If you want the program
to calculate kc, you must explicitly set the value of the KC parameter to zero.
Note: If the National Annex specifies a different method to calculate kc (e.g. the
British, Singapore & Polish NAs), the program will use that method by default even
if the KC parameter has not been explicitly set to zero. If the NA method does not
deal with a specific condition while working out kc, the program will then fall back
to table 6.6 of the code, thus ensuring that kc is considered for the particular NA.
The non-dimensional slenderness (used to evaluate ) for both the above cases is evaluated
LT
LT
as:
LT =
W yf y
M cr
Where:
M is the elastic critical moment for lateral torsional buckling. EN 1993-1-1 does not
cr
however specify a method to evaluate M . Hence, the program will make use of the
cr
method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1 to evaluate M by default.
cr
Note: The method specified in Annex F will be used only when the raw EN 1993-11:2005 code is used without any National Annex. If a National Annex has been
1.0
Where:
V
c,Rd
Av f y /
M0
A is the shear area and is worked out for the various section types as given in Cl.
v
6.2.6(3) of the code.
Shear Buckling
For sections that are susceptible to shear buckling, the program will perform the shear buckling
checks as given in Section 5 of EN 1993-1-5. The shear buckling checks will be done only for I
Sections and Channel sections. Shear stresses induced from torsional loads are taken into account
while performing torsion checks.
Note: Web shear buckling is checked in STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) (release 20.07.08) and
later.
The susceptibility of a section to shear buckling will be based on the criteria given in Cl 5.1(2) of EN
1993-1-5 as is as given as follows:
a. For unstiffened webs, if hw/t > 72/, the section must be checked for shear buckling.
The design resistance is calculated as:
Vb, Rd = Vbw, Rd
Vbw, Rd =
f yw wt
3 M1
wf yw h wt
3 M1
Where:
h = distance between flanges of an I Section (i.e., depth - 2x flange thickness).
w
is the web contribution factor obtained from Table 5.1 of the EC3 code and
w
is evaluated per the following table:
Table 7C.1-Evaluate of
w =
Slenderness
Parameter
Rigid End
Post
Non-rigid End
Post
w < 0.83/
0.83/w
0.83/w
w > 1.08
1.37/(0.7 +w)
0.83/w
hw
86.4 t
b. For stiffened webs, if hw/t > 31Ek/, the section must be checked for shear buckling.
The design resistances considers tension field action of the web and flanges acting as struts
in a truss model. This is calculated as:
Vb, Rd = Vbw, Rd + Vbf, Rd
f yw wt
3 M1
Where:
V
is the flange resistance per Cl.5.4 for a flange not completely utilized by
bf,Rd
bending moment.
Vbf, Rd =
h f t 2f f yf
c M1
M
1 Ed
M f,Rd
b is the width of the flange which provides the least axial resistance, not to be
f
N Ed
A + A f
f1 f2 yf
M0
A and A are the areas of the top and bottom flanges, respectively.
f1
f2
c = a 0.25 +
1.6b f t 2f f yf
th w2f yw
VEd
Vb,Rd
1.0
Where:
V
Ed
Note: The shear forces due to any applied torsion will not be accounted for if the TOR parameter
has been specifically set to a value of 0 (i.e., ignore torsion option).
If the stiffener spacing has not been provided (using the STIFFparameter), then the program
assumes that the member end forms a non-rigid post (case c) and proceeds to evaluate the
minimum stiffener spacing required.
General
Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) gives very limited guidance for the analysis and design of torsion
members. While both elastic and plastic analyses are permitted generally, the design analysis
methods for torsion discussed within EC3 are primarily based on elastic methods. Also, only the
first yield design resistance is specifically discussed for torsion members. Furthermore, there is no
guidance on section classification nor on how to allow for the effects of local buckling on the
design resistance for combined torsional effects. EC3 also does not specifically deal with members
subject to combined bending and torsion and loosely states that the yield criteria (Eqn 6.1 in the
code) can be used for elastic verification.
The method used by STAAD.Pro is therefore based on the SCI publication P057: Design of
members subject to combined bending and torsion. Though this publication is based on the
British standard BS 5950-1, the principles from this document are applied in the context of
Eurocode 3.
Note: At the time this feature has been implemented in STAAD.Pro, SCI are in the process of
updating document P057 to be in accordance with Eurocode 3. Hence this method might be
subject to modifications subject to the publication of a newer version of P057. The NCCI
document SN007b-EN-EU: Torsion will also be referenced where appropriate.
Code Basis
Torsion design in EC3 is given in Cl. 6.2.7 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. Therefore, this clause is used
primarily for this implementation.
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not deal with members subject to the combined effects of torsion and lateral
torsional buckling. However, EN 1993-1-6 considers such a condition in Appendix A. Therefore,
STAAD.pro uses Appendix A of EN 1993-1-6 to check for members subject to combined torsion and
LTB.
The following clauses from EC3 are then considered:
l
Cl. 6.2.7(1)
Cl. 6.2.7(9)
Cl. 6.2.7(5)
EC-3 -6 App A
Note: STAAD.Pro does, however, use this clause (6.2.7) to report the output for all torsion checks.
Also any distortional deformations and any amplification in the torsional or shear stresses due to
distortions will be neglected by the program.
l
Clause 6.2.7(1)
States that for members subject to torsion, the design torsional moment T at each cross
Ed
section should satisfy:
TEd / RRd 1.0
Where:
T
Rd
This is the primary condition that will need to be satisfied for members subject to torsion.
The method for working out the torsional resistance T , for the various cases is dealt in the
Rd
following sections.
l
Cl. 6.2.7(9)
States that:
For combined shear force and torsional moment, the plastic shear resistance
accounting for torsional effects should be reduced from V
to V
and
pl,Rd
pl,T,Rd
the design shear force should satisfy:
VEd / Vpl,T,Rd 1.0
The code also gives means to evaluate V
in equations 6.26 to 6.28. These equations,
pl,T,Rd
however, only deal with I/H sections, Channel sections, and structural hollow sections (RHS,
SHS, CHS). Therefore, the application of Cl. 6.2.7(9) is only performed for these section
profiles.
Cl 6.2.7(5)
States that the yield criteria given in Cl. 6.2.1(5) of EN 1993-1-1:2005 may be used for elastic
verification. STAAD.Pro evaluates the stresses due to the various actions on the cross section
and applies this yield criterion.
The program allows for two types of checks for members subject to torsion for EC3 design:
I. Basic Stress Check: This method is intended to be a simplified stress check for torsional
effects. This method will produce the output corresponding to Cl. 6.2.7(5) of EN 1993-1-1.
II. Detailed Checks: This method will perform a full torsional analysis of the member. All four
of the clause checks mentioned earlier will be performed.
The details of these checks are as described below.
You have the option to choose the method to be used for a specific member or group of members.
This will be facilitated by setting the value of the TORSION. The TORSION parameter set to zero by
default, which results in torsion checks only being performed if the member is subject to torsional
moments (i.e., for this default setting, the program will ignore torsion checks if there is no
torsional moment in the member). Setting the value of the TORSION parameter to three (3) will
cause the program to ignore all torsional moments. The detailed output (i.e., TRACK 2) will
indicate that torsion has been ignored for that particular member. The details of setting the values
to one (1) or two (2) and the corresponding checks performed are as described below. See "Design
Parameters" on page 301 for additional details.
Note: If the TORSION parameter is set to 1 or 2, the program will perform the appropriate checks
even if the member is not subject to torsional moments. In such cases, the program will perform
the checks with a value of zero for the torsional moment.
This method is intended to be a simplified stress check for torsional effects per Cl. 6.2.7(5). Any
warping stresses that may develop due to the end conditions will be ignored for this option. The
program will consider the forces (including torsion) at various sections along the length of the
member and for each section, will calculate the resultant stress (Von Mieses) at various points on
the cross section. The location and number of points checked for a cross section will depend on the
cross section type and will be as described below.
The stress check will be performed using equation 6.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005 as given below:
2
2
2
x,Ed z,Ed
x,Ed
z,Ed
Ed
f / + f / f / f / + 3 f / 1
y
M0
y
M0
y M0
y M0
y M0
Where:
x,Ed
z,Ed
Ed
Note: Since transverse stresses are very small under normal loading conditions (excluding
hydrostatic forces), the term will be negligible and hence is taken as zero.
x,Ed = x + bz + by = Fx/Ax + Mz/Zz + My/Zy
Ed = T/J t + VyQ/(Izt) + VzQ/(Iy*t)
Where:
T is the torsion at the particular section along the length of the member
J is the torsion constant
t is the thickness of the web/flange
V is the shear force
Q is the statical moment about the relevant axis
I is the second moment of area about the relevant axis
The stress check as per equation 6.1 is performed at various stress points of a cross section as shown
in figures below:
Shape
Doubly
symmetric
wide flange
profile
Pipe profiles
= tan1
(Mz/My)
Tube profiles
Section Sketch
Shape
Section Sketch
Channel
profiles
The resultant ratio will be reported under Cl. 6.2.7(5) in the detailed design output.
Ed
) and
t,Ed
w,Ed
Therefore,
TEd = Tt,Ed +Tw,Ed = GJ = EH
[Ref SCI pub. P057]
Where:
and are the first and third derivates of twist ( ), respectively, and depend on
the end conditions and loading. These are evaluated from the equations in Annex B
of P057 and are based the specified CMT parameter.
Note: Although the equation given the NCCI document SN007b-EN-EU can be used to evaluate
T , the NCCI does not give the eqn. to evaluate . Therefore, Annex B of P057 is used.
wrd
The torsional resistance of the section is also considered as the sum of the pure torsion resistance
and the warping torsion resistance. The pure torsion resistance (T ) and the warping torsional
t,Rd
resistance (T
) are evaluated as:
w,Rd
max
Av fy /
V pl, Rd =
M0
Where:
A is as pre Cl.6.2.6 (3) for the various sections
v
When torsion is present, along with the shear force, the design shear resistance will be reduced to
V
, where V
is evaluated as follows:
pl,T,Rd
pl,T,Rd
i. For I or H Sections:
V pl, T, Rd =
,Ed
1.25 f y /
3 / M0
V pl, Rd
V pl, T, Rd = 1
,Ed
1.25 f y /
3 / M0
V pl, Rd
3 ) / M0
w,Ed
(f
V pl, T, Rd = 1
V pl, Rd
3 ) / M0
,Ed
(f
Where
t,Ed
w,Ed
t,Ed
and
w,Ed
Ed
w,Ed
is the differential function based on twist (ref P057 Annex B. & Table 6)
W
ns
Clause EC-3:6 App A Check for combined Torsion and Lateral Torsional buckling
The interaction check due to the combined effects of bending (including lateral torsional buckling)
and torsion will be checked using Annex A of EN 1993-6: 2007. Note that this interaction equation
does not include the effects of any axial load.
Caution: At present, SCI advises that no significant work has been published for this case and
work is still ongoing. So at present is advisable not to allow for torsion in a member with large
axial load.
Members subject to combined bending and torsion will be checked to satisfy:
M y,ED
LT M y,RK / M1
C MZM z,Ed
M z,RK / M1
k wk zwk T w,Ed
T w,Rk / M1
Where:
C is the equivalent uniform moment factor for bending about the z-z axis,
mz
according to EN 1993-1-1 Table B.3.
k w = 0.7
k zw = 1
0.2T w,Ed
T w,Rk / M1
M z,Ed
M z,Rk / M1
k =
1
1 M y,Ed / M y,cr
M
and M
are the design values of the maximum moment about the y-y and zy,Ed
z,Ed
z axis, respectively.
M
and M
are the characteristic values of the resistance moment of the crossy,Rk
z,Rk
section about it y-y and z-z axis, respectively, from EN 1993-1-1, Table 6.7.
M
is the elastic critical lateral-torsional buckling moment about the y-y axis.
y,cr
w,Ed
w,Rk
is the reduction factor for lateral torsional buckling according to 6.3.2 of EN 1993LT
1-1.
Note: For all of the above checks the effective length of the member to be used for torsion can be
set by using the EFT design parameter.
LS1 Plastic limit state: Deals with the condition when the capacity of the structure is
exhausted by yielding of the material.
LS3 Buckling Limit state: Deals with the condition in which the structure (or shell)
develops large displacements normal to the shell surface, caused by loss of stability under
compressive and/or shear membrane stresses.
The limit state verification is made based on the Stress design method described in EC3-6. The
stress design approach takes into account three categories of stresses:
l
Primary stresses: Stresses that are generated for the member to be in equilibrium with the
direct imposed loads.
Secondary stresses: Those that are generated for internal compatibility or for compatibility at
supports due to imposed loads or displacements (e.g., temperature, settlement etc.)
Local stresses: Local stresses generated due to cyclic loading (or fatigue).
Only the primary stresses are considered the program. The primary stresses considered are those
generated due to axial loads, bending, shear and /or a combination of these conditions.
Note: In the context of slender pipe section design for the Eurocode 3 module, the secondary and
local stresses can be neglected since the loads and corresponding stresses dealt with in the design
engine are largely direct and shear stresses.
The local axis coordinate system for a CHS is defined as:
circumferential
around the circumference of the circular cross
section ()
meridional
along the length of the member (x)
normal
perpendicular to the tangential plane formed by the
circumferential and meridional directions (n)
and the corresponding membrane stresses will follow the convention given below:
Figure 7C.3 - Nomenclature for membrane and transverse stresses in Slender CHS sections
Membrane stresses
Transverse stresses
Stress Design
Stress checks are made based on the Stress design method as per Section 8.5 of the code. This
section deals with the buckling strength of the member (LS3). The principle is to evaluate the
membrane stresses due to the applied loads and then compare that to the buckling strength, which
is evaluated giving due consideration for local buckling effects.
The membrane stresses are evaluated as given in Annex A of the code. The pipe section is
considered as an unstiffened cylindrical shell.
i. Meridional Stresses:
1. Axial load
Fx = 2rPx
x = -Fx/(2rt)
2. Axial stress from bending
M = r2 Px,max
x = M/(2 rt)
ii. Shear Stress:
1. Transverse force, V
V = rP,max
max = V/(rt)
2. Shear from torsional moment, M
Mt = 2r2 P
= Mt/(22 r2 t)
Where:
r is the radius of the middle surface of the shell wall.
t is the wall thickness of the cylinder
Figure 7C.4 - Naming convention and coordinate system used for the buckling stress of a slender CSH section
M1
x,Rk
Where:
is the meridional buckling reduction factor. is evaluated per Section 8.5.2(4) of
x
x
EC3-6 and is determined as a function of the relative shell slenderness given by:
x =
f yk
x,cr
Where:
x,cr
Once the relative slenderness is evaluated, the reduction factor is calculated as follows:
= 1 when
0
= 1
/2
when
P
Where:
is the plastic limit for slenderness given by:
p
P =
The meridional buckling parameters the factors and are evaluated per section D.1.2.2 of EC3-6.
Note: A Normal fabrication quality will be assumed when evaluating the fabrication quality
parameter as given in table D.2 of the code, unless the fabrication quality is set using the FAB
design parameter. See "Design Parameters" on page 301
The elastic critical buckling stress,
and the factors and are evaluated per Annex D of EC3-6.
x,cr
The details are as given below:
The CHS section is classified based on the following criteria:
CHS Length Classification
Criteria
Short
1.7
Medium
Long
Where:
=
l
rt
M1
x,Rk
Where:
is the shear buckling reduction factor. will be worked out as given in section
x,cr
Where:
x,Rk
The reduction factor, , is then evaluated as described for the axial buckling stress, based on the
Criteria
Short
10
Medium
Long
Where:
=
l
rt
Where:
C is a factor dependant upon whether the CHS length classification as described in
x,Ed x,Rd
For a combined case of axial and shear stresses acting together, an interaction check will be done
according to equation 8.19 of the code as below:
x,Ed
x,Rd
kx
x,Ed
+
x,Rd
Where:
k and k are the interaction factors as given in section D.1.6 of EN 1993-1-6:
x
kx = 1.25 + 0.75 x
k = 1.75 +0.25
Default
Name
Value
CODE
Description
ALH
0.5
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
ALPHA
1.0
Description
BEAM
BETA
1.0
C1
1.132
0.459
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
CAN
Description
CMM
1.0
1.0
CMT
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
DFF
0
(Mandatory
for
deflection
Description
check,
TRACK 4.0)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
100.0 cm
DMIN
EFT
0
Member
Length
ELB
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
ESTIFF
Description
FAB
FU
GM0
0
1.0
m0
factor in EN 1993-
1-1:2005
GM1
1.0
Corresponds to the
m1
factor in EN 1993-
1-1:2005
GM2
1.25
Corresponds to the
m2
factor in EN 1993-
1-1:2005
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
GST
Description
KC
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
LEG
Description
LVV
Max. value of
Lyy
LY
LZ
MTH
Member
Length
Member
Length
LT
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
MU
Description
NA
NSF
1.0
PLG
PY
Yield
Strength
RATIO
SBLT
0.0
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
SGR
Description
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
STIFF
Description
Member
Length or
depth of
beam,
whichever is
lesser
TOM
TORSION
TRACK
Parameter
Default
Name
Value
UNF
Description
UNL
Member
Length
ZG
+Section
Depth/2
7C.6.1 Notes
1. CAN, DJ1, and DJ2 Deflection
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The
first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local
displacement. Local displacement is described in Section 5.44 of the Technical
Reference Manual.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection.
Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node
defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly,
(DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the
member.
Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2 - DX1)2 + (DY2 - DY1)2 + (DZ2 - DZ1)2)
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end node,
as the case may be.
Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta
Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff
b. If CAN = 0, deflection length is defined as the length that is used for calculation of
local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
Deflection Length will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some
situations, the Deflection Length may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and
DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four
joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be
equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should
be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1
and DJ2 should be 4.
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length
and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not perform a
deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no default value for
DFF (see Table 2B.1).
e. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for
steel design.
2. CMM Parameter
The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given below:
Table 7C.3-Values for the CMM Parameter
CMM
Value
1
CMM
Value
Note: While both sets of code checks will be reported in the output file, only the last code
check results are reported in the STAAD.Pro graphical interface.
4. CMT Parameter
The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given below:
Description
Diagram
Note: For CMT = 2 and CMT = 3, you have the option of specifying the distance at which
the concentrated torque acts, measured from the start of the member. This can be done by
using the ALH design parameter. The ALH parameter indicates the ratio of the distance of
the point torque (from the start of the member) to the length of the member. This
parameter will have a default value of 0.5 (i.e., the torque acts at the center of the span)
and will accept values ranging from 0 to 1.
7C.7 CodeChecking
Note: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds preceding this
release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this parameter is no longer required in
EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence any legacy files that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and
you will be required to substitute GB1 with GM1, in accordance with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
7C.7 CodeChecking
The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the
members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per EN 1993-1-1:2005 and a corresponding
National Annex (if specified). Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific
sections of the members.
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have
passed or failed the checks; the critical condition; the value of the ratio of the critical condition
(overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the governing load case,
and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical
condition occurs).
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 or any of the user
defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, with the exception
of ISECTION. ISECTION has been currently excluded since the option of Tapered section design is
currently not supported in the EC3 module. The EC3 (EN 1993) design module does not consider
these sections or PRISMATIC sections in its design process.
Note: Checks for slender sections to EN 1993-1-1 are limited to I-SECTIONS, TEE, SINGLE
CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE and CIRCULAR & RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS.
Code checking for GENERAL sections can be also done using the EN1993 module. The program will
design GENERAL sections as I sections by default. However, you are given the option to choose a
section type to be considered while designing the member. Refer to the description of the GST
design parameter in Section 7C.6 for details.
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as prismatic
or as the limitations specified in Section 7C.7.
respective NA clauses and any associated code clauses will be listed along with the critical ratios
and the forces that were used for these clause checks.
PASS
0.045
EC-6.3.3-662
1
25.00 C
5.00
-10.00
0.00
=======================================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel
= USER
Modulus of elasticity
= 205 kN/mm2
Design Strength (py)
= 275 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)
Member Length =
500.00
Gross Area = 161.30
Net Area = 161.30
"z-axis" here refers to bending about Z-Z (when Y is Up), where as EC3 uses the Y-Y axis convention.
z-axis
y-axis
Moment of inertia
Plastic modulus
Elastic modulus
Shear Area
Radius of gyration
Effective Length
DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m)
Section Class
Squash Load
:
30820.004
:
2149.000
:
1926.250
:
81.998
:
13.823
:
500.000
EUROCODE NO.3 /2005
:
CLASS 1
:
4435.75
0.006
1.00
9239.001
939.100
615.933
51.728
7.568
500.000
Section class as per Table 5.2
Max. cross section capacity (A f /GM0
y
1.10
Country
United Kingdom (British NA) Uses the BS EN 1993-11:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the UK National
Annex.
NAValue
Country
Singapore (Singaporean NA) - Uses the SS EN1993-11:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the Singaporean
National Annex.
10
11
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the D-NA (NA 3 is
specified)..
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 301
z;s;d
z;pl;d
=A f
w
y;d
y;d
/ 3
= yield stress
Aw = A - 2 (bf - tw - 2r) tf
N
N
s;d
pl;d
y;d
y;s;d
y;pl;d
y;pl
y;d
y;pl
v;y;ud
;v;u;d
Table 11: Provides interaction formulae for bending about the minor axis
1. If Vy;s;d 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d 1.0 a1 Npl;d check equation 11.3-5
2. If Vy;s;d 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 a1 Npl;d check equation 11.3-6
3. IfVy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d 1.0 a1 Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-7
4. If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 a1 Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-8
Where:
V
V
y;s;d
y;pl;d
V y;pl;d = 2bt f
f y;d
3
pl;z;d
= plastic section modulus about minor axis) & q as per eqn 11.3-14
Clause 11.3.1.3 (NEN 6770) : Class 1 and Class 2 Square and rectangular hollow sections
This clause requires class 1 and class 2 square and rectangular tube profiles to satisfy the interaction
equations in Table 13.
1. If Vz;s;d 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 a3 Npl;d check equation 11.3.22
2. If Vz;s;d 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 a3 Npl;d check equation 11.3.23
3. If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 a4 Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-24
4. If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 a4 Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-25
Where
V
V
z;s;d
z;pl;d
b = breadth of section
h = height of section
A = area of section
V z;pl;d = V z;cl;d =
h
b+h
f y;d
3
Clause 11.3.1.2 (NEN 6770): Class 1 and class 2 circular hollow (CHS) profiles
Class 1 and class 2 sections with circular hollow profiles should satisfy the interaction equations
given in table 12.
l
See "Clause 6.2.8 Bending and shear" on page 323 of this document for equations to derive Vz;s;d
Vz;pl;d = Shear capacity of CHS sections
V pl;d = 2
A f y;d
3
M N;V;y;u;d
a1
M z;s;d
+ 1
M
N;V;z;u;d
a2
Clause 11.3.2.1 : Class 1 and class2 I-sections with biaxial bending + shear + axial force
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d are to be taken from tables 14 and 15 of NEN
6770 respectively.
Checks for table 14:
1. Check #1 If Vz;s;d 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.32
2. Check #2 If Vz;s;d 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.33
3. Check #3 If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d use equation 11.3-34
4. Check #4 If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d use equation 11.3-35
See "Clause 6.2.8 Bending and shear" on page 323 for equations to evaluate Vz;s;d, My;pl;d, Npl;d,
Mv;y;ud, N;v;u;d, a1 ,a2 and Vz;pl;d.
Checks for table 15:
1. Check #1 If Vy;s;d 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.36
2. Check #2 If Vy;s;d 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.37
3. Check #3 If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-38
4. Check #4 If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-39
See "Clause 6.2.8 Bending and shear" on page 323 for equations to evaluate Vy;s;d, Mz;pl;d, Npl;d,
Mv;z;ud, N;v;u;d, a1 ,a2 and Vy;pl;d.
See table 16 for 1, 1, 0 and 1 use in tables 14 and 15.
Clause 11.3.2.3 : Class 1 and class2 Rectangular and square hollow tubes
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d (to be used in equation 11-3-31, see description
of clause 11.3.2 above) are to be taken from table 19 of NEN 6770.
1. Check #1 If Vz;s;d 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d use equation 11.3-48
2. Check #2 If Vz;s;d 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.49
3. Check #3 If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d use equation 11.3-50
4. Check #4 If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-51
See "Clause 6.2.8 Bending and shear" on page 323 for equations to evaluate Vz;pl;d, My;pl;d, Npl;d,
Mv;y;ud, N;v;u;d, a3, a4 and Vz;pl;d to be used in the above equations. For values to be used for 1,
2, 1 and 2 in this case refer to table 20 of NEN 6770.
To check for these conditions about the y axis, substitute the index z in the above equations with
y.
Check for class 4 sections: Class 4 sections can be treated as class 3 sections if the effective section
properties are used as given in clause 10.2.4.2.3 of NEN 6771. Working out the effective section
properties for slender sections has already been done in STAAD.Pro.
For I- section profiles and tubular sections, the following cases are checked:
1. If M;y;s;d / MN;y;f;u;d 1 check equation 11.2-7 (given below)
Vz;s;d /Vz;u;d 1
Where
V
V
z;s;d
z;u;d
For an I section,
V z;u;d =
2
3
A w;et
f y;d
3
Where
Aw,ef = effective web area as given in section 10.2.4.2.3.
MN;y;f;u;d is the moment capacity about the Y axis for the effective section. = (
fyW,eff)
2. If M;y;s;d / MN;y;f;u;d > 1 and M;y;s;d / M;y;f;u;d 1 check equation 11.2-13 (given below):
M y;s;d
2
2Vz;s;d
M N;y;f;u;d + M N;y;u;d M N;y;f;u;d 1
1
V
z;u;d
N c;u;d
FE;
Where:
Nc;u;d = Afy;d
A = area of section
f
y;d
E;
This value of slenderness is to be used to calculate the modification factors used in section 6.3 of
EC-3.
N c;u;d
FE;tk
Where
Nc;u;d = Afy;d
A = area of section
f
y;d
= yield stress
E;tk
Where:
N
N
c;s;d
C;u;d
;d
fu;d
Where:
c;s;d
and N
c;u;d
Clause 6.3.2.3 Lateral torsional buckling curves for rolled sections or equivalent welded
sections
The D-NA states that:
1. The values for the:
l
Description
y
120
Where:
N
N
c;s;d
pl;d
y;d
y
100
Where:
N
N
c;s;d
pl;d
y;d
2. For columns that are not part of buttressed frameworks the following additional checks
need to be done:
y
100
Where:
N
N
c;s;d
pl;d
y;d
y
80
Resistance of cross-sections -
M0
= 1.05
M1
= 1.05
M2
= 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the Norwegian-NA (NA
3 is specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 301
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user specified value
(i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below refer to the
corresponding clauses in the Norwegian -NA.
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.1
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the UK-NA (NA 1 is
specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 301
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user specified value
(i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Caution: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds preceding this
release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this parameter is no longer required in
EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message
and the user will need to substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
7D.1.2 Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks
The UK-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment, Mcr. The UK National Annex does not specify a particular method to calculate
M . Hence the calculation of M has been based on the following NCCI documents:
cr
cr
M cr = C1
2EI s
2
(kL )
2I
w
( )
k
kw
Is
(kL )2GI t
2
EI s
+ (C2z s ) 2 C2z s
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
1
2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in the tables below:
1
The implementation of EC3 in STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending
moment diagram through the CMM parameter. The first two loading conditions mentioned above
and its variants can be dealt with by using the existing values of the CMM parameter (i.e., 1 to 6).
Hence the appropriate values from this NCCI will be used for C1 and C2 coefficients depending
on the value of CMM specified. The default value of CMM is 1, which considers the member as a pin
ended member with UDL along its span. The user will also have the option to specify specific values
for C and C using the C1 and C2 parameters in the design input mode. See "Design Parameters"
1
2
on page 301
However, for cases with end moments and transverse loading, the NCCI provides graphs to evaluate
the C1 and C2 coefficients. It does not however, provide a set of equations for these graphs. However
the end moments and transverse loading condition cannot be currently specified in the design
input. Hence this implementation will introduce two new values for the CMM parameter viz.
CMM 7:Member with varying end moments and uniform loading.
CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load.
For these two conditions, the UK National Annex (nor the NCCI) does not provide equations to
evaluate C1 and C2. Hence in STAAD.Pro the user will have to use the new C1 & C2 parameters to
input the required values for C1 & C2 to be used in calculating Mcr. For values of 7 or 8 for the
CMM parameter, the program will issue a warning if C1 and C2 have not been specified.
Note: If the NA parameter has not been specified, the program obtains the values of C1 and C2
from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
EI s
(k xL )2
2
M cr = C1
kx 2 Iw
kw
Is
( )
(k xL )2GI T
2
EI x
2
+ (C2z e C3z1 ) C2z e C3z1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
1 2
3
implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1
The CMM parameter (see section (i) above) specified during design input will determine the values
of C1, C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 1, which considers the member as a pin ended
member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and
transverse loading condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input
the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr. As described in section (i)
above, the user must use C1, C2 and C3 parameters along with CMM values of 7 and 8.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free
to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0). The
current implementation of EC3 in STAAD takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN
parameter. A value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence
the above methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have
no warping restraints, i.e., CMN = 1.0. For members with partial or end fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5 or
CMN = 0.7), the proposed implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) the proposed
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of zg is considered positive if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts
away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the
shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The user will be
allowed to modify this value by using the new ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the
design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the
term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
7D.1.3 Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section
The UK-NA specifies different values for the
and factors to be used in equation 6.57 of BS
LT,0
EN 1993-1-1 for rolled and equivalent welded sections. The current implementation in STAAD.pro
does not differentiate between rolled and welded sections and uses the default values in BS EN
1993-1-1 for LT,0 and . The values specified in the UK-NA are:
l
For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections:
LT,0 = 0.4
= 0.75
The current implementation of STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of BS EN
1993-1-1:2005. The UK-NA specifies different limits and buckling curves to be used in this clause as
given below:
Table 7D.1-Buckling curves to use with BS EN 1993-1-1:2005
Cross Section
Limits
Buckling
Curve
h/b 2
h/b 2
This table again does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of welded doubly
symmetric sections with h/b 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric sections. Hence for these
cases the new implementation will still use the method specified in the base code as per clause
6.3.2.2(2).
7D.1.4 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, LT as per
UK NA
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be
used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I Sections,
LT
Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to
choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I
Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 (and
LT
the UK Annex) in STAAD.Pro, by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate
. For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to
LT
evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the UK National Annex states that Table 6.5 in BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 should be replaced
with the table given in the NA (See section 4.3 of this document). Hence for all cases dealt with by
the table in the UK NA, this implementation will choose the buckling curves from the UK National
Annex. For any case that is not dealt with by the table in the UK NA, the program will use the
method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Hence for the following cross sections the program will use the Table in the UK NA for choosing a
buckling curve for LTB checks (when the UK NA has been specified):
l
Angle Sections
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate
LT
l
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3, the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate LT .
In any case the Elastic critical moment Mcr (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
will be worked out as given in section 4.2 of this document. Since the UK National Annex uses the
NCCIs mentioned in the sections above, this implementation will only consider end restraint
conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See section 4.2 above). For all other cases of
the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input = 0), the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be
treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section
(i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
These values are for an end restraint factor of k=1 (ie CMN=1.0). Hence for all other values of CMN
(ie 0.7 or 0.5) this implementation will use the values of C1 from DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
The program will use a default value of 1.0 for kc. However the user can also input a custom value
of kc by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. The user can also get the program
to calculate the value of kc automatically by setting the value of the KC parameter in the design
input to 0. This will cause the program to evaluate a value of C1 corresponding to the end
conditions and the Bending moment of the member and in turn calculate kc as given in the NA.
To evaluate C1, the program will use the NCCI documents mentioned in section 4.2 of this
document.
7D.1.6 Clause 6.3.3(5) Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz
The UK-NA recommends that the method in Annex A or Annex B of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 can be
used to calculate the interaction factors for Cl. 6.3.3 checks in the case of doubly symmetric
sections. The proposed implementation will hence use equations in Annex B of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005
to calculate these interaction factors for doubly symmetric sections. The current implementation of
EC3 BS in STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B.
However for non-doubly symmetric sections, the UK NA gives the option of using Annex B with
some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the UK NA). The UK NA requires additional
checks to be done to check for the maximum allowable values of and X to be used in equations
6.61 and 6.62 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
As per the UK NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the weak axis (y in
STAAD) and the corresponding reduction factor y should be taken as the values from the highest
values of slenderness () among the flexural buckling slenderness (y), torsional slenderness ( )
T
and torsional-flexural slenderness ( ) as given in Clauses 6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
TF
Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the program will calculate the critical non-dimensional
slenderness as:
= the maximum of either from Cl. 6.3.1.3 or from Cl. 6.3.1.4
y
Af y
T =
N cr
Where:
N = min (N
cr
CrT
,N
crTF
).
The UK NA or EC3 does not however specify a method to evaluate NCrT or NcrTF. Hence this
implementation will use the method specified in the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical
axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes to calculate these. See section 4.9
below for details.
Note: The UK National Annex or EC3 does not deal with angle sections in specific and hence this
implementation will use the method used in the current EC3 implementation to deal with
slenderness of angle sections. In the current implementation this is done as per cl 4.7.10 of BS
5950. This proposed implementation will still use the same method for single and double angle
sections to evaluate the slenderness.
Clause NA 3.2 of the UK NA also requires that Where the section is not an I Section or a hollow
section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3 section for the purposes of this
clause. Hence for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross sections that are NOT I, H, SHS, RHS or CHS sections,
the elastic properties will be used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.
1
i o2
GI t +
2EI w
I T2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong axis)
y
respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
N cr, y + N cr, T
2
2
2(i y + i z )
Ncr, TF =
io
iy + iz
2
io
t 40 mm
40 mm < t <= 80
mm
f
y
(N/mm2)
f
u
(N/mm2)
f
y
(N/mm2)
f
u
(N/mm2)
S 235
235
360
215
360
S 275
275
430
255
410
S 355
355
490
335
470
S 450
440
550
410
550
S 275 N/NL
275
390
255
370
S 355 N/NL
355
490
335
470
S 420 N/NL
420
520
390
520
S 460 N/NL
460
540
430
540
S 275 M/ML
275
370
255
360
S 355 M/ML
355
470
335
450
S 420 M/ML
420
520
390
500
S 460 M/ML
460
540
430
530
S 235 W
235
360
215
340
S 355 W
355
490
335
490
S 460
Q/QL/QL 1
460
570
440
550
EN 10025-2
EN 10025-3
EN 10025-4
EN 10025-5
EN 10025-6
If you specify a steel grade that is not given in the Annex Table 3.1 (NF) but is present in Table 3.1 of
EN 1993-1-1:2005, the program uses the values from Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. The appropriate
yield strength (f ) used is shown in the design output file.
y
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the NF-NA (NA 4 is
specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 301
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user specified value
(i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Caution: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds preceding this
release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this parameter is no longer required in
EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message
and the user will need to substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
7D.2.3 Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks
The French NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The French NA gives a method to evaluate M in its Annex MCR. This
cr
cr
implementation will make use of this method to evaluate Mcr. Annex MCR however deals with the
calculation of Mcr for doubly symmetric sections. Hence this implementation will use this method
only for doubly symmetric sections. For mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the
minor axis (i.e Tee sections) this implementation will use the method from the NCCI document
SN030a-EN-EU as given in the section below. For any other type of section that is not dealt with by
the Annex, this implementation will use the method and tables given in Annex F of DD ENV 19931-1:1992.
Annex MCR
This document provides a method to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric sections only.
cr
Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method in this implementation.
The equation to evaluate M is given as:
cr
EI s
(kL )2
2
M cr = C1
2I
w
Is
( )
k
kw
(kL )2GI t
2
EI s
+ (C2z s ) 2 C2z s
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions. The NCCI
1
2
provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in Table1 and Table 2 of the Annex.
1
2
Table 1 deals with the condition of a simply supported member with end moments and the value of
C is determined by the end moment ratio (Refer to the NA for details). Clause 3.2 of the National
1
Annex however gives a formula to evaluate C as:
1
C1 =
1
0.325 + 0.423 + 0.252 2
This formula however does not match the values given in Table 1 of the NA. Hence this
implementation will use the values of C1 from Table 1 if the end moment ration () is exactly equal
to the values of in the table. For all other cases this implementation will calculate the value of C1
from equation (6) in the Annex.
The value of C2 will be determined from Table 2 of the Annex based on the loading and end
conditions (i.e the CMM parameter in STAAD).
The user will also have the option to specify specific values for C and C using the C1 and C2
1
2
parameters in the design input mode. See "Design Parameters" on page 301
The French NA considers three separate loading conditions:
l
The first two cases and its variants can be defined using with the existing CMM parameter values in
STAAD.Pro. However the third condition cannot be currently specified in the design input. Hence
this implementation will introduce two new values for CMM viz.
CMM 7:Member with varying end moments and uniform loading.
CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load.
The load to moment ratio () will then be used in the calculations will then be used to calculate
C1 and C2 as given in section 3.5 of Annex MCR (See Annex MCR in the NA for details).
This implementation will also introduce a new parameter MU to be specified when using CMM =
7 or 8. The load to moment ratio () to be used in the calculations is to be input using the new
MU parameter. This implementation will require that for the French National Annex if CMM = 7
or 8 has been specified, the user should also either specify a value for MU or input the values for C1
and C2 using the C1 and/or C2 parameters directly.
Note: The new parameter MU will currently be applicable only in the context of the French NA.
EI s
(k xL )2
2
M cr = C1
kx 2 Iw
kw
Is
( )
(k xL )2GI T
2
EI x
2
+ (C2z e C3z1 ) C2z e C3z1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
1 2
3
implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2 and C3. The
default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along
its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and transverse loading
condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input the required
values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU and use
the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. The current implementation of EC3 in STAAD.Pro obtains
these values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Also, the NCCI document and Annex MCR of the FR-NA assume that the member under
consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member(k =
kw=1 .i.e., CMN parameter =1.0). Hence the above methods will be used only for members which are
free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints. For members with partial or end
fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and
coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts
away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the
shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be
allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design
input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term
zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
Note: There is a separate method specified in the NCCI document SN006a-EN-EU to calculate
Mcr for cantilever beams. Again this document does not give any specific formulae to evaluate
the coefficients. Hence, this has not been implemented in STAAD.Pro.
7D.2.4 Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section
The FR-NA provides equations to evaluate the
LT,0
and
LT
b
h
2
LT = 0.4 0.2 LT 0
h
b
h
LT = 0.5 0.25 LT 0
h
1
2
LT
The French Annex specifies that the modification factor is applicable only to members that are free
to rotate on plan (i.e., CMN 1.0). Hence for all other values of CMN, this implementation will ignore
f and hence will use
= .
LT,mod
LT
7D.2.6 Clause 6.3.3(5) Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz
The French NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate
these interaction factors. STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B for design per EC3 (without
National Annex). Therefore, the method in Annex A has been added into the program.
Note: The NA mentions that this method can be extended to singly symmetric I-Sections
(symmetric about the minor axis) if the elastic properties are used instead of the plastic
properties. However, since STAAD does not have a provision to specify such sections, this case will
not be considered for this implementation.
The NA also mentions that torsional flexural buckling needs to be taken into account in case of
mono symmetric sections. This is taken into account based on the method given in the NCCI
document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes.
See "Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling" on page 352
The NA also recommends a lower limit as given below for the term C
Cmi, 0 1
mi,0
N Ed
N cr,i
GI t +
i o2
1
2EI w
I T2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong axis)
y
z
respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
N cr, y + N cr, T
2
2
2(i y + i z )
Ncr, TF =
io
iy + iz
2
io
Steel grades S315MC, S355MC, S420MC and S460MC according to SFS-EN 10149-2
Steel grades S260NC, S315NC, S355NC and S420NC according to SFS-EN 10149-3
These grades of steel can be specified by using the PY (Yield Strength) and FU (Ultimate Strength)
parameters in STAAD.Pro. Set these parameters to the respective values as given in SFS-EN 101492/3 for the steel grades specified above. The choice of the buckling curve to be used is based on the
value of the SGR parameter specified. The output will include the appropriate yield strength used
for design.
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the SFS-NA (NA 5 is
specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 301
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user specified value
(i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Caution: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds preceding this
release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this parameter is no longer required in
EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message
and the user will need to substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
7D.3.3 Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks
The Finnish NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The Finnish National Annex does not specify a particular method to
cr
calculate M . Hence the calculation of M has been based on the following NCCI documents:
cr
1.
cr
M cr = C1
2EI s
2
(kL )
2I
w
( )
k
kw
Is
(kL )2GI t
2
EI s
+ (C2z s ) 2 C2z s
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
1
2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in the tables
1
2
below:
+1,00
1,00
+0,75
1,14
+0,50
1,31
+0,25
1,52
0,00
1,77
-0,25
2,05
-0,50
2,33
-0,75
2,57
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through
the CMM parameter.
2.
M cr = C1
2EI s
2
(k xL )
kx 2 Iw
( )
kw
Is
(k xL )2GI T
2
EI x
2
+ (C2z e C3z1 ) C2z e C3z1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
1 2
3
implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C , C , and C .
1 2
3
The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with
UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and transverse
loading condition. You can use the C1, C2, and C3 parameters to input the required values
for C , C , and C to be used in calculating M .
1
cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2, and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU and
use the user input values of C1, C2, and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F
of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free
to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K
= kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be
used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints (i.e.,
CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this
implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex
F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts
away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the
shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be
allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design
input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term
zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
Note: There is a separate method specified in the NCCI document SN006a-EN-EU to calculate
Mcr for cantilever beams. Again this document does not give any specific formulae to evaluate
the coefficients. Hence, this has not been implemented in STAAD.Pro.
7D.3.4 Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section
The Finnish-NA provides the values for the terms
and factors given in clause 6.3.2.3(1) as
LT,0
follows:
For rolled doubly symmetric sections and hollow sections, use:
LT,0
LT,0
The Finnish NA specifies the following limits for choosing the buckling curves:
Table 7D.4-Selection of lateral torsional buckling curve for cross sections using
equation (6.57)
Cross-section
Limits Buckling
Curve
(constant cross-section)
Rolled double symmetric I- and H- sections and hot
finished hollow sections.
h/b
2
b
c
2<
h/b
<3.1
Welded double symmetric I- section and H- sections
and cold-formed hollow sections
h/b
2
c
d
2<
h/b <
3.1
The NA says that for all other cases the rules given in Cl 6.3.2.2 should be used. Hence even for
rolled or welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b ratio 3.1, this implementation will resort to
checks as per clause 6.3.2.2.
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of SFS-EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate the
Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor .
LT
7D.3.5 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, LT as per
Finnish NA
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be
used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I Sections,
LT
Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to
choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I
Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 (and
LT
the Finnish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2
LT
to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Finnish National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors to be
used for various section types (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors
for LTB checks" on page 354 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in the Finnish NA,
this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate .
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3, the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
will be evaluated as previously given. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the
sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See "Clause
6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 354 ) will be
considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the
method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input = 0), the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be
treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section
(i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
7D.3.7 Clause 6.3.3(5) Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz
The Finnish NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A or Annex B of SFS-EN 1993-1-1 to
calculate these interaction factors. STAAD.Pro uses the method in Annex B by default. This
implementation of the Finnish NA will also use Annex B for Cl.6.3.3 checks.
GI t +
i o2
1
2EI w
I T2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong axis)
y
z
respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
N cr, y + N cr, T
2(i 2y + i z2 )
Ncr, TF =
io
iy + iz
2
io
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
u y
Where:
f is the ultimate steel strength
u
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the PN-NA (NA 6 is
specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 301
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user specified value
(i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Caution: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds preceding this
release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this parameter is no longer required in
EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message
and the user will need to substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
7D.4.3 Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks
The Polish NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The Polish National Annex does not specify a particular method to
cr
calculate M . Hence the calculation of M has been based on the following NCCI documents:
cr
1.
cr
EI s
(kL )2
2
M cr = C1
2I
w
Is
( )
k
kw
(kL )2GI t
2
EI s
+ (C2z s ) 2 C2z s
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
1
2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in the tables
1
2
below:
+1,00
1,00
+0,75
1,14
+0,50
1,31
+0,25
1,52
0,00
1,77
-0,25
2,05
-0,50
2,33
-0,75
2,57
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through
the CMM parameter.
2.
M cr = C1
2EI s
2
(k xL )
kx 2 Iw
Is
( )
kw
(k xL )2GI T
2
EI x
2
+ (C2z e C3z1 ) C2z e C3z1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
1 2
3
implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C , C , and C .
1 2
3
The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with
UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and transverse
loading condition. You can use the C1, C2, and C3 parameters to input the required values
for C , C , and C to be used in calculating M .
1
cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2, and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU and
use the user input values of C1, C2, and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F
of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free
to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K
= kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be
used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints (i.e.,
CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this
implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex
F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts
away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the
shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be
allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design
input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term
zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
Note: There is a separate method specified in the NCCI document SN006a-EN-EU to calculate
Mcr for cantilever beams. Again this document does not give any specific formulae to evaluate
the coefficients. Hence, this has not been implemented in STAAD.Pro.
7D.4.4 Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section
The Polish-NA provides the values for the terms
and factors given in clause 6.3.2.3(1) as
LT,0
follows:
For all sections, use:
LT,0
The Polish NA specifies the use of uses table 6.5 to work out the buckling curves for use in Cl.
6.3.2.3. Hence table 6.5 in PN-EN 1993-1-1 will be used for this.
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of PN-EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate the
Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor .
LT
7D.4.5 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, LT as per
Finnish NA
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be
used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I Sections,
LT
Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to
choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I
Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 (and
LT
the Finnish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2
LT
to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Finnish National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors to be
used for various section types (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors
for LTB checks" on page 354 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in the Finnish NA,
this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate .
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3, the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, M , (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
cr
will be evaluated as previously given. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the
sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See "Clause
6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 354 ) will be
considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the
method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input = 0), the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be
treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section
(i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
7D.4.7 Clause 6.3.3(5) Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz
The Polish NA recommends the equations in Annex B of PN-EN 1993-1-1 to calculate these
interaction factors. The current implementation of EC3 BS in STAAD.pro uses the method in
Annex B by default. The proposed implementation of the Polish NA will also use Annex B for
Cl.6.3.3 checks.
The Polish NA also gives two additional simplified checks. This implementation will provide for
these additional checks as well. However as they are intended as optional checks, by default, the
program will not perform these checks. However, the user can invoke these checks by using the PLG
parameter. See "Design Parameters" on page 301
If the value of the PLG parameter is set to 1, the following two checks will be performed as per Cl.
NA.20.(2) and NA.20(3) respectively:
my
m /
y
LT
+ C mz m with 1- (I = y or z)
0
Where:
n = N /N
Ed
Rd
m = max M
y
y,Ed
(+ M
)/M
y, Ed
; m = max M
y, Rd
,Z Ed
(+ M
)/M
, Ed
Z Rd,
- LTB factor
LT
/W
pl,i
el,i
, or
Cl. NA.20.(3): This condition will only be checked for circular hollow sections.
n/ + [(k m )2 + (C
i
ii
mj
Where:
k - the interaction factor from table B.1 of PN-EN 1993-1-1
and n, m, Cmj are as above.
If the PLG parameter has been set to 1, the maximum among the following ratios will be taken as
being critical for Cl 6.3.3:
6.3.3: Eqn6.61
6.3.3: Eqn6.62
NA.20(2) and
NA.20(3)
If however PLG has been set to 0 (or not specified at all), the program will ignore the last two
checks in the list above.
The NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional
buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N
and N
factors and therefore these
cr,TF
cr,T
methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the Polish NA.
The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, T =
GI t +
i o2
1
2EI w
I T2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong axis)
y
z
respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
N cr, y + N cr, T
2(i 2y + i z2 )
Ncr, TF =
io
iy + iz
2
io
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.1
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the SS-NA (NA 7 is
specified)..
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 301
Note: If any of these parameters have been specified by the user as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the
specified value and use the default values as given above.
7D.5.2 Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks
The Singaporean NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate
the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor X , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment, Mcr. The Singaporean National Annex does not specify a particular method to
calculate Mcr. Hence the calculation of Mcr has been based on the following NCCI documents:
M cr = C1
EI
(kL
)2
2I
w
( )
k
kw
(kL )2GI t
2
EI
2
+ (C2Zg ) C2Zg
C1 and C2 are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
member. The NCCI provides values for C1 and C2 for the different cases as given in the tables
below:
+1,00
1,00
+0,75
1,14
+0,50
1,31
+0,25
1,52
0,00
1,77
-0,25
2,05
-0,50
2,33
-0,75
2,57
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through the CMM
parameter.
EI z
2
(k xL )
M cr = C1
kx 2 Iw
kw
I
( )
(k xL )2GI T
2
EI z
2
+ (C2zg C3z1 ) C2zg C3z1
The factors C1, C2 and C3 are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the tables below:
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2 and C3. The
default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along
its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and transverse loading
condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input the required
values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU and use
the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV
version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free
to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K
= kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be
used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints (i.e.,
CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this
implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex
F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts
away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the
shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be
allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design
input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term
zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
Note: There is a separate method specified in the NCCI document SN006a-EN-EU to calculate
Mcr for cantilever beams. Again this document does not give any specific formulae to evaluate
the coefficients. Hence, this has not been implemented in STAAD.Pro.
7D.5.3 Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section
The Singaporean NA specifies different values for the
and factors to be used in equation 6.57
LT,0
of SS EN 1993-1-1 for rolled and equivalent welded sections. STAAD.Pro does not differentiate
between rolled and welded sections and uses the default values in SS EN 1993-1-1 for
and .
LT,0
The values specified in the Singapore NA are:
l
For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections:
LT,0 = 0.4
= 0.75
STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005. The Singaporean-NA
provides the values for the terms
and factors given in clause 6.3.2.3(1) as follows:
LT0
Limits
Buckling
Curve
h/b 2
h/b 2
Note: This table does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of welded doubly
symmetric sections with h/b 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric sections. Hence for these
cases the new implementation will still use the method specified in the base code as per clause
6.3.2.2(2).
7D.5.4 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, LT as per
Singaporean NA
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be
used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I Sections,
LT
Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to
choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I
Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 (and
LT
the Singaporean Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2
LT
to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Singaporean National Annex states that Table 6.5 in SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 should be
replaced with the table given in the NA (See section 4.3 of this document). Hence for all cases dealt
with by the table in the Singaporean NA, this implementation will choose the buckling curves from
the Singaporean National Annex. For any case that is not dealt with by the table in the Singaporean
NA, the program will use the method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
For the following cross sections, the program will use the Table in the Singaporean NA for choosing
a buckling curve for LTB checks (when the SS EN has been specified):
l
Angle Sections
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3, the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, M , (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
cr
will be evaluated as given above. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the
sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See section
above) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation
will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input = 0), the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be
treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section
(i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
7D.5.6 Clause 6.3.3(5) Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz
The Singaporean NA recommends the methods in either Annex A or Annex B of SS-EN 1993-1-1 to
calculate these interaction factors. The current implementation of EC3 BS in STAAD.pro uses the
method in Annex B by default. The proposed implementation of the Singaporean NA will also use
Annex B for Cl.6.3.3 checks.
However for non-doubly symmetric sections, the Singaporean NA gives the option of using Annex
B with some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the Singaporean NA). The
Singaporean NA requires additional checks to be done to check for the maximum allowable values
of and X to be used in equations 6.61 and 6.62 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
As per the Singaporean NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the weak axis
(y in STAAD) and the corresponding reduction factor y should be taken as the values from the
highest values of slenderness () among the flexural buckling slenderness (y), torsional slenderness
(T) and torsional-flexural slenderness (TF) as given in Clauses 6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 of SS EN 1993-11:2005. Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the program will calculate the critical nondimensional slenderness as:
= the maximum of either from Cl 6.3.1.3 or from Cl 6.3.1.4
y
Where:
T =
A f y
N cr
1
i o2
GI t +
2EI w
I T2
Where:
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong axis)
y
z
respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
N cr, y + N cr, T
2
2
2(i y + i z )
Ncr, TF =
io
iy + iz
2
io
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the PN-NA (NA 8 is
specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 301
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user specified value
(i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
7D.6.2 Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks
The NBN-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The NBN-NA gives a method to calculate M in Annex D, which is used by
cr
cr
STAAD.Pro. Annex D, however, only deals with the calculation of M for doubly symmetric
cr
sections and mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the minor axis (i.e, Tee sections).
For any other type of section that is not dealt with by Annex D, STAAD.Pro uses the method and
tables given in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992:
M cr = C1
EI
(kL
)2
2I
w
( )
k
kw
(kL )2GI t
2
EI
2
+ (C2Zg ) C2Zg
C & C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions. The Annex
1
2
provides values for C & C for the different cases as given in Table1 and Table 2 of the Annex. Table
1
2
1 deals with the condition of a simply supported member with end moments and the value of C is
1
determined by the end moment ratio (Refer to the NA for details). Clause 3.2 of the National
Annex however gives a formula to calculate C as:
1
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through the CMM
parameter.
M cr = C1
2EI z
(k xL
)2
kx 2 Iw
( )
kw
(k xL )2GI T
2
EI z
2
+ (C2zg C3z1 ) C2zg C3z1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
1 2
3
implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the tables below:
Table 7D.8-Critical moment coefficients for singly symmetric sections with end moments
End Moments and Support
Conditions
Bending moment
diagram
Value of coefficients
C
0
f
= +1
= +3/4
= +1/2
= +1/4
=0
= -1/4
= -1/2
= -3/4
= -1
1.0
1.00
1.000
0.5
1.05
1.019
1.0
1.14
1.000
0.5
1.19
1.017
1.0
1.31
1.000
0.5
1.37
1.000
1.0
1.52
1.000
0.5
1.60
1.000
1.0
1.77
1.000
0.5
1.86
1.000
1.0
2.06
1.000
0.850
0.5
2.15
1.000
0.650
1.0
2.35
1.000
1.3 - 1.2
0.5
2.42
0.950
0.77 -
1.0
2.60
1.000
0.55 -
0.5
2.45
0.850
0.35 -
1.0
2.60
0.5
2.45
0.125 0.7
>0
-0.125 0.7
f
f
f
f
Value of coefficients
C
1.0
1.12
0.45
0.525
0.5
0.97
0.36
0.478
1.0
1.35
0.59
0.411
0.5
1.05
0.48
0.338
1.0
1.04
0.42
0.562
0.5
0.95
0.31
0.539
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2, and C3. The
default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with uniformly
distributed load (UDL)along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments
and transverse loading condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters
to input the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU and use
the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV
version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free
to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K
= kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be
used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints (i.e.,
CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this
implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex
F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts
away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the
shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be
allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design
input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term
zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
Note: The program does not consider the case of cantilevers.
7D.6.3 Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section
The NBN-NA recommends the use of the values specified in EN 1993-1-1 for the LTB factors
LT0
and . However it gives two different sets of values for
& based on two different conditions
LT0
as give below:
1. If M is determined by considering the properties of the gross cross section and the lateral
cr
restraints, the following values are used:
LT0
2. If M is determined by ignoring the lateral restraints, the following values are used:
cr
LT0
The program evaluates which factors to use based on the CMN parameter. If CMN= 1.0 (default),
then the program assumes the restraints are ignored and the second set of values is used for
LT0
and . If CMN = 0.5, then the first set of
and values is used.
LT0
These factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of NBN-EN to evaluate the Lateral Torsional
Buckling reduction factor .
LT
7D.6.4 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, LT as per
Belgium NA
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of NBN-EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be
used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I Sections,
LT
Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to
choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I
Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 (and
LT
the Belgian Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate
. For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to
LT
evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Belgian National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors to be
used for various section types. (See "Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded
section" on page 380 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in the NBN-NA, this
implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate .
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3, the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment,Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
will be evaluated as given above. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the
sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See "Clause
6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section" on page 380 ) will be considered.
For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the method specified
in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
You can override the default behavior and specify the clause that is to be used for LTB checks. This
can be specified using the MTH design parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 301).
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input = 0), the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of NBN-EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be
treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section
(i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
For CMM = 7 the program will choose the value of kc to be either 0.90 or 0.91 based on the
end moment ratio.
For CMM = 8 the program will choose the value of kc to be either 0.77 or 0.82 based on the
end moment ratio.
1
2
LT
7D.6.6 Clause 6.3.3(5) Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz
The NBN-NA recommends the equations in Annex A of NBN-EN 1993-1-1 to calculate these
interaction factors.
The NA also mentions that torsional flexural buckling needs to be taken into account in case of
mono symmetric sections. Torsional flexural buckling will need to be taken into account based on
the method given in the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and
flexural torsional buckling modes. See section below for details.
The NA also recommends a lower limit as given below for the term C
mi,0
Cmi, 0 1
N Ed
N cr,i
cr,T
1
i o2
GI t +
2EI w
I T2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong axis)
y
z
respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
N cr, y + N cr, T
2
2
2(i y + i z )
Ncr, TF =
io
iy + iz
2
io
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below refer to
the corresponding clauses in the MS-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt with in
the Malaysian National Annex (hereafter referred to as MS-NA) and that are relevant to the
proposed implementation are:
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.1
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the MS-NA (NA 9 is
specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 301
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user specified value
(i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
7D.7.2 Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks
The MS-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The MS-NA does not specify a particular method to calculate Mcr. Hence
cr
the calculation of Mcr has been based on the following NCCI documents:
(kL )2
M cr = C1
EI
2I
w
IS
( )
k
kw
(kL )2GI t
2EI S
2
+ (C2Zg ) C2Zg
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
1
2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in Table 3.1 and
1
2
Table 3.2.
The NCCI considers three separate loading conditions:
l
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through the CMM
parameter. The values of C and C may also be directly specified using the C1 and C2 parameters,
1
2
respectively (required for CMM = 7 or CMM = 8).
EI z
(k xL )2
M cr = C1
kx 2 Iw
kw
I
( )
(k xL )2GI T
2EI z
2
+ (C2zg C3z1 ) C2zg C3z1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. The program
1 2
3
considers C , C , and C as given in the tables 4.1 and 4.2 of the NCCI, based on the CMMparameter.
1
The default value of CMM = 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with uniformly
distributed load (UDL)along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments
and transverse loading condition. You use the C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input the required
values for C , C , and C , respectively, to be used in calculating M .
1
cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU and use
the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV
version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: When CMM = 7 or CMM = 8, the values for C1, C2 and C3 parameters must be manually
specified.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free
to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K
= kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be
used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints (i.e.,
CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this
implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex
F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate M refers to the distance between the point of application
cr
of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The value of z is
g
considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts away from the
shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a
distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be allowed to modify this
value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate
that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term z in the equation will
g
have a value of zero.
Note: The program does not consider the case of cantilevers.
7D.7.3 Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section
The MS-NA specifies different values for the
and factors to be used in equation 6.57 of MS
LT,0
EN 1993-1-1 for rolled and equivalent welded sections. STAAD.Pro does not differentiate between
rolled and welded sections and uses the default values in MS EN 1993-1-1 for
and . The values
LT,0
specified in the MS-NA are:
1. For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections:
LT,0
LT,0
STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005, based on different
limits. This table again does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of welded
doubly symmetric sections with h/b 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric sections. Hence for
these cases the new implementation will still use the method specified in the base code as per
clause 6.3.2.2(2).
7D.7.4 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, LT as per
Malaysian NA
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be
used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I Sections,
LT
Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to
choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I
Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 (and
LT
the MS NA) in STAAD.Pro, by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate .
LT
For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate
.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the MS NA states that Table 6.5 in MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 should be replaced with the
table given in the NA (See "Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section"
on page 385). Hence for all cases dealt with by the table in the MS NA, this implementation will
choose the buckling curves from the MS NA. For any case that is not dealt with by the table in the
MS NA, the program will use the method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Hence for the following cross sections the program will use the Table in the MS NA for choosing a
buckling curve for LTB checks (when the MS NA has been specified):
l
Angle Sections
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3, the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
In any case the Elastic critical moment Mcr (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
will be evaluated as described in "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection
factors for LTB checks". Since the MS NA uses the NCCI documents mentioned in the sections
above, this implementation will only consider end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN
parameter=1.0. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the
method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input = 0), the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be
treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section
(i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
If k evaluates to be greater than 1.0, the program will then evaluate kc as per Table 6.6 of EN 1993c
1-1:2005.
7D.7.6 Clause 6.3.3(5) Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz
The MS NA recommends that the method in Annex A or Annex B of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 can be
used to calculate the interaction factors for Cl. 6.3.3 checks in the case of doubly symmetric
sections. STAAD.Pro uses the equations in Annex B of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate these
interaction factors for doubly symmetric sections..
However, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the MS NA gives the option of using Annex B with
some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the MS NA). The MS NA requires additional
checks to be done to check for the maximum allowable values of and X to be used in equations
6.61 and 6.62 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
As per the MS NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the weak axis ( in
y
STAAD.Pro) and the corresponding reduction factor should be taken as the values from the
y
highest values of slenderness () among the flexural buckling slenderness ( ), torsional slenderness
y
( ) and torsional-flexural slenderness ( ) as given in Clauses 6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 of MS EN 1993-1T
TF
1:2005. Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the program will calculate the critical nondimensional slenderness as:
per C . 6.3.1.3
y = max
T per C . 6.3.1.4
where
T =
A fy
N cr
1
i o2
GI t +
2EI w
I T2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong axis)
y
z
respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
N cr, y + N cr, T
2
2
2(i y + i z )
Ncr, TF =
io
iy + iz
2
io
The program will only consider Channel Sections and Tee- sections when evaluating the critical
torsional and Flexural Torsional buckling loads as per Cl 6.3.1.4.
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
= 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the DE-NA (NA 10 is
specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 301
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user specified value
(i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
7D.8.2 Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks
The DE-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The DE-NA does not specify a particular method to calculate Mcr. Hence
cr
the calculation of Mcr has been based on the following NCCI documents:
(kL )2
M cr = C1
EI
2I
w
IS
( )
k
kw
(kL )2GI t
2EI S
2
+ (C2Zg ) C2Zg
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
1
2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in Table 3.1 and
1
2
Table 3.2.
The NCCI considers three separate loading conditions:
l
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through the CMM
parameter. The values of C and C may also be directly specified using the C1 and C2 parameters,
1
2
respectively (required for CMM = 7 or CMM = 8).
M cr = C1
2EI z
(k xL
)2
kx 2 Iw
( )
kw
(k xL )2GI T
2
EI z
2
+ (C2zg C3z1 ) C2zg C3z1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. The program
1 2
3
considers C , C , and C as given in the tables 4.1 and 4.2 of the NCCI, based on the CMMparameter.
1
The default value of CMM = 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with uniformly
distributed load (UDL)along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments
and transverse loading condition. You use the C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input the required
values for C , C , and C , respectively, to be used in calculating M .
1
cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU and use
the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV
version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: When CMM = 7 or CMM = 8, the values for C1, C2 and C3 parameters must be manually
specified.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free
to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K
= kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be
used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints (i.e.,
CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this
implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex
F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate M refers to the distance between the point of application
cr
of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The value of z is
g
considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts away from the
shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a
distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be allowed to modify this
value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate
that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term z in the equation will
g
have a value of zero.
Note: The program does not consider the case of cantilevers.
7D.8.3 Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section
The DE-NA specifies that the default values in Table 6.5 for the
and factors given in clause
LT,0
6.3.2.3(1) as follows:
For all sections, use:
LT,0
7D.8.4 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, LT as per
German NA
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be
used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I Sections,
LT
Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to
choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I
Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 (and
LT
the German Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2
LT
to evaluate .
LT
Note: The MTH design parameter can be used to control the choice of the clause used to calculate
.
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
will be evaluated as previously given. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the
sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See "Clause
6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 390 ) will be
considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the
method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input = 0), the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be
treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section
(i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
Where:
C is to be obtained from the NCCI documents as previously described (See "Clause
1
6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 390).
The NCCI document SN003a-EN-EU specifies the values of C1 to be used in table 3.1
as shown below. The current implementation does not account for the K factor and
c
conservatively uses a reduction factor equal to 1. The program allows for the reduction
factor based on the DE-NA.
These values are for an end restraint factor of k = 1 (i.e., design parameter CMN = 1.0). Hence for all
other values of CMN (i.e., 0.7 or 0.5) this implementation will use the values of C from DD ENV
1
1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
The program will use a default value of 1.0 for K . However, you can also input a custom value of K
c
c
by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. If the KC parameter in the design input is
set to 0, then the program will automatically calculate its value. This will cause the program to
evaluate a value of C corresponding to the end conditions and the Bending moment of the
1
member and in turn calculate K as given in the NA. To evaluate C , the program will use the NCCI
c
1
documents as previously described.
7D.8.6 Clause 6.3.3(5) Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz
The DE-NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A or Annex B of DIN-EN 1993-1-1 to
calculate these interaction factors. STAAD.Pro uses the method in Annex B by default. Thus the
program uses Annex B for Cl.6.3.3 checks.
The DE-NA or EC3 do not deal with angle sections in specific and thus the program uses the
method per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950 for single and double angle sections to evaluate the slenderness.
1
i o2
GI t +
2EI w
I T2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong axis)
y
z
respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
N cr, y + N cr, T
2
2
2(i y + i z )
Ncr, TF =
io
iy + iz
2
io
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0
M2
Where:
f is the ultimate steel strength
u
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the SW-NA (NA 10 is
specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0 and GM1 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 301 The value of GM2 ( ) is calculated based on the steel grade values
M2
specified. See "Clause 3.2.(2)- Steel Grades" on page 394
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user specified value
(i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
7D.9.3 Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks
The SW-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The SW-NA does not specify a particular method to calculate Mcr. Hence
cr
the calculation of Mcr has been based on the following NCCI documents:
M cr = C1
EI
(kL
)2
2I
w
IS
( )
k
kw
(kL )2GI t
2
EI S
2
+ (C2Zg ) C2Zg
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
1
2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in Table 3.1 and
1
2
Table 3.2.
The NCCI considers three separate loading conditions:
l
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through the CMM
parameter. The values of C and C may also be directly specified using the C1 and C2 parameters,
1
2
respectively (required for CMM = 7 or CMM = 8).
M cr = C1
2EI z
(k xL
)2
kx 2 Iw
( )
kw
(k xL )2GI T
2
EI z
2
+ (C2zg C3z1 ) C2zg C3z1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. The program
1 2
3
considers C , C , and C as given in the tables 4.1 and 4.2 of the NCCI, based on the CMMparameter.
1
The default value of CMM = 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with uniformly
distributed load (UDL)along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments
and transverse loading condition. You use the C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input the required
values for C , C , and C , respectively, to be used in calculating M .
1
cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU and use
the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV
version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: When CMM = 7 or CMM = 8, the values for C1, C2 and C3 parameters must be manually
specified.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free
to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member (k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K
= kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be
used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints (i.e.,
CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this
implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex
F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate M refers to the distance between the point of application
cr
of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The value of z is
g
considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts away from the
shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a
distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be allowed to modify this
value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate
that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term z in the equation will
g
have a value of zero.
Note: The program does not consider the case of cantilevers.
7D.9.4 Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section
The SW-NA specifies that the following values for the
LT,0
LT,0
and factors:
7D.9.5 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, LT as per
Swedish NA
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of BFS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be
used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I Sections,
LT
Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to
choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I
Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 (and
LT
the Swedish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2
LT
to evaluate .
LT
Note: The MTH design parameter can be used to control the choice of the clause used to calculate
.
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
will be evaluated as previously given. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the
sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See "Clause
6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 395 ) will be
considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the
method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input = 0), the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BFS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be
treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section
(i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
7D.9.6 Clause 6.3.3(5) Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz
The SW-NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A of EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate these
interaction factors, which are used by STAAD.Pro when the Swedish NA is selected.
The SW-NA or EC3 do not deal with angle sections in specific and thus the program uses the
method per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950 for single and double angle sections to evaluate the slenderness.
1
i o2
GI t +
2EI w
I T2
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong axis)
y
z
respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
N cr, y + N cr, T
2
2
2(i y + i z )
Ncr, TF =
io
iy + iz
2
io
STAAD
EC5
Partial factor for Material Property values. Reference Table 2.3 of EC-5-2004.
C. Kh Size Factor.
For members, subjected to tension, whose maximum c/s dimension is less than the reference
width in tension the characteristic strength in tension (ft0k) is to be increased by the factor
Kh.
For members, subjected to bending, whose depth is less than reference depth in bending,
the characteristic strength in bending (fmk) is to be increased by the factor Kh.
As per clause 3.2(3) of EC 5- 2004, for rectangular solid timber with a characteristic timber
density 700 kg/m 3 the reference depth in bending or the reference width (maximum
k
cross-sectional dimension) is 150 mm.
The value of Kh = Minimum of {(150/h) 0.2 and 1.3) for such solid timber is incorporated in
the software. Please refer clause numbers 3.3 and 3.4 for the value of Kh for Glued laminated
timber and Laminated veneer lumber respectively.
D. KC90 Factor taking into account the load configuration, possibility of splitting and degree
of compressive deformation.
For members, subjected to compression, perpendicular to the direction of grain alignment,
this factor should be taken into account. Default value of 1 is used in STAAD.Pro. User may
override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.5 of EC-5-2004 in this regard.
E. Km Factor considering re-distribution of bending stress in cross section.
For members, subjected to bending, this factor is taken into account for stress checking. For
rectangular section the value of Km is 0.7, and this value is incorporated in STAAD.Pro. User
may override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.6 of EC-5-2004 in this regard.
F. Kshape Factor depending on shape of cross section.
For members, subjected to torsional force, design torsional stress should be less than equal
design shear strength multiplied by the factor Kshape. This factor is determined by
STAAD.Pro internally using the guidelines of clause 6.1.8 of EC-5-2004.
t0d
t90d
Description
Design tensile stress parallel (at zero degree) to grain alignment.
Design tensile stress perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to grain
alignment.
S
S
c0d
c90d
S
S
mzd
myd
S
S
vd
tor_d
t0d
t90d
c0d
c90d
alignment.
F
mzd
myd
vd
RATIO
l ,l
l ,l
z rel,z
y rel,y
0,05
0,05
I
I
z
y
Symbol
I
tor
Description
Torsional moment of inertia.
b, h
mk
m,k
0, mean
iii. Density -
SI
No.
Property
Symbol
Wood Type
Softwood
(C)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compressive Strength
perpendicular to grain
5.
Shear Strength
6.
7.
8.
9.
Shear Modulus
Hardwood
(D)
0.6 * f
t,0,k
m,k
t,90,k
5 * (f
c,0,k
m,k
0.007*r
c,90,k
0.0015*r
) 0.45
v,k
0,05
0.67*
E
m,k
0.84* E
0,mean
0,mean
90,mean
mean
0,05
0,mean
/30
0,mean
0,05
0,mean
/15
/16
/16
The values of the characteristic strengths computed using the above equations, may differ with the
tabulated values in Table-1 of EN 338:2003. However, in all such cases, the values obtained from the
provided equations are treated as actual and is used by the program, as the values of Table-1 are
based on these equations.
If both
and
are less than or equal to 0.3 the following conditions should be
rel,z
rel,y
satisfied:
(Sc0d /Fc0d )2 +(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO
(Sc0d /Fc0d )2 +Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO
In other cases, the conditions in Equations 6.23 and 6.24 of EC-5 2004 should be satisfied.
Note: In STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis.
Sc0d /(KczFc0d ) +(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO
Sc0d /(KcyFc0d ) +Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO
Where (Equations 6.25 through 6.28 of EC-5 2004):
Kcz = 1/{Kz +[(Kz)2 - (rel,z)2 ]1/2 }
Kcy = 1/{Ky +[(Kzy)2 - (rel,y)2 ]1/2 }
Kz = 0.5[1 +c(rel,z - 0.3) +(rel,z)2 ]
Ky = 0.5[1 +c(rel,y - 0.3) +(rel,y)2 ]
The value of incorporated in the software is the one for solid timber (i.e., 0.2).
c
Default Value
Description
ALPHA
0.0
DFF
None
DJ1
Parameter Name
Default Value
DJ2
Description
End node number for a physical
member under consideration for
Deflection Check.
KC90
1.0
KLEF
1.0
(Member Length)
KY
1.0
(Member Length)
KZ
1.0
(Member Length)
Parameter Name
LDC
Default Value
1
Description
Load Duration Class (Ref.
Cl.2.3.1.2), required to get the KMOD value from Table 3.1.
1.0 = Permanent action
2.0 = Long term action
3.0 = Medium term action
4.0 = Short term action
5.0 = Instantaneous action
MTYP
RATIO
1.0
SCL
TRACK
Parameter Name
TSC
Default Value
6 (C24)
Description
Timber Strength Class (Ref.
Reference EN338 2003)
l
Hardwood: 13 = D30, 14 =
D35, 15 = D40, 16 = D50, 17 =
D60, 18 = D70.
Solution
Characteristic material properties for timber:
Modification factor Kmod = 0.80 from table 3.1
Material factors m = 1.30 from table 2.3
fc0k= 21.00 N/mm
Fc0d = (Kmodfc0k)/m = (0.8021.00)/1.30 = 12.92 N/mm [Cl 2.4.1(1)P]
Cross section loads:
Fx = 50.000 kN
Compression parallel to the grain:
Sc0d = (1000xFx)/A = (1000x50.000)/14454 = 3.46N/mm < 12.92N/mm (Fc0d )
The ratio of actual compressive stress to allowable compressive strength:
Sc0d /Fc0d = 3.46 / 12.92 = 0.268 < 1.0 [Cl. 6.1.4.(1)P]
Check for Slenderness:
Slenderness ratios:
z = (1000/57) = 17.54
y = (1000/21) = 47.62
E0,mean = 1.1031 kN/m2
As timber grade is C24 (i.e., Soft Wood)
E0,05 = 0.67E0,mean = 0.739 kN/m2
[Annex A,EN 338:2003]
rel,z = z/(fc0k/E0,05 )1/2 = 17.54/(21.00/0.739)1/2 = 0.298
rel,y = y/(fc0k/E0,05 )1/2 = 47.62/(21.00/0.739)1/2 = 0.809
Since,
rel,y
Kcy = 1/{Ky +[(Kzy)2 - (rel,y)2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.878 +[(0.878)2 - (0.809)2 ]1/2 } = 0.820
For Rectangular cross section Km = 0.70. The member is subjected to Compression only, so actual
bending stress is zero.
Sc0d /(KczFc0d ) +(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) = 3.46/(1.00812.92) +0.0 +0.0 = 0.268 +0.0
+ 0.0 = 0.266
Sc0d /(KcyFc0d ) +Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) = 3.46 /(0.82012.92) +0.0 +0.0 = 0.326
++0.0 + 0.0 = 0.326
Hence the critical ratio is 0.326 < 1.0 and the section is safe.
Comparison
Table 7E.3-EC 5: Part 1-1 Verification Problem 1
Criteria
0.326
0.327
none
Input File
The following file is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\Eur\EC5 ver 1.std.
STAAD SPACE
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 1.0 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC WOOD
E 1.10316e+007
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 0.00231749
ALPHA 5.5e-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -50
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER EC5
ALPHA 0 ALL
LDC 3 ALL
SCL 2 ALL
TSC 6 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The member checking part of the output file:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (EC5 )
***********************
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
TABLE
PRIS ZD =
0.073 YD =
0.198
PASS
CL.6.3.2
50.00 C
0.00
0.327
0.00
1
0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| AX =
0.01 IY =
0.00 IZ =
0.00
|
| LEZ =
1.00 LEY =
1.00
|
|
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (NEW MMS)
|
|
FBY =
14.769 FBZ
=
14.769
|
|
FC
=
12.859
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES : (NEW MMS)
|
|
fby =
0.000 fbz
=
0.000
|
|
fc
=
3.459
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Solution
Characteristic material properties for timber:
Modification factor Kmod = 0.80 from table 3.1
Material factors m = 1.30 from table 2.3
fc0k= 21.00 N/mm
E0,05 = 7370 N/mm2
Fc0d = (Kmodfc0k)/m = (0.8021.00)/1.30 = 12.92 N/mm [Cl 2.4.1(1)P]
fmyk = 24.00 N/mm
Fmyd = Kmodfmyk/m = (0.80x24.00)/1.30 = 14.77N/mm
fmzk = 24.00 N/mm
Fmzd = Kmodfmzk/m = (0.80x24.00)/1.30 = 14.77N/mm
Cross section loads:
Fx = 5.000 kN
Mz = 2.000 kNm
My = 1.000 kNm
Check for Slenderness:
Slenderness ratios:
z = (1000/57) = 17.54
y = (1000/21) = 47.62
rel,z = z/(fc0k/E0,05 )1/2 = 17.54/(21.00/7370)1/2 = 0.298
rel,y = y/(fc0k/E0,05 )1/2 = 47.62/(21.00/7370)1/2 = 0.809
Since,
rel,y
Comparison
Table 7E.4-EC 5: Part 1-1 Verification Problem 2
Criteria
Critical Ratio (Cl.
6.3.2)
0.616
none
Input File
The following file is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\Eur\EC5 ver 2.std.
STAAD SPACE
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 1 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC WOOD
E 1.10316e+007
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 0.00231749
ALPHA 5.5e-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -5.0 MX 1.0 MZ 2.0
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER EC5
ALPHA 0 ALL
LDC 3 ALL
SCL 2 ALL
TSC 6 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The member checking part of the output file:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (EC5 )
***********************
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
TABLE
PRIS ZD =
0.073 YD =
0.198
PASS
CL.6.3.2
5.00 C
1.00
0.616
-2.00
1
0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| AX =
0.01 IY =
0.00 IZ =
0.00
|
| LEZ =
1.00 LEY =
1.00
|
|
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (NEW MMS)
|
|
FBY =
14.769 FBZ
=
14.769
|
|
FC
=
12.859
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES : (NEW MMS)
|
|
fby =
5.686 fbz
=
4.193
|
|
fc
=
0.346
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
8
Finnish Codes
8 Finnish Codes
Default
Value
-
Description
ACTAGE
70
BRACE
0.0
CLEAR
25 mm
DRYCIR
100
EFACE
0.0
ELY
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
1.0
ELZ
ENVIR
Environment class
1. LA Least aggressive
2. NA Aggressive
3. MA Very aggressive
FC
FYMAIN
35 N/mm 2
500 N/mm 2
LAGE
7 days
MAX
MAIN
32
MINMAIN
10
MOY
moy factor
MOZ
moz factor
NMAG
nmag factor
REIANG
RELHUM
40
RFACE
SFACE
STIRANG
90
STIRDIA
10 mm
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
TORANG
45
TRACK
10
Default
Value
none
Description
BEAM
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
BY
1.0
BZ
1.0
CB
1.0
CMZ
CY
CZ
1.5
Default
see NS
3472
DMAX
100.0
[cm]
DMIN
0.0
[cm]
FYLD
235
MF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
SSZ
0.0
TRACK
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
UNL
Member
length
Description
The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure in pipe members.
The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters.
The parameter CB defines the value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral buckling
moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.
9
French Codes
9 French Codes
BAEL
Description
CLEAR
* 20
mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
*0.0
FC
* 30 N/
mm 2
FYMAIN
* 300
N/mm 2
Parameter Default
Name
Value
Description
FYSEC
* 300
N/mm 2
MAX
MAIN
50 mm
MINMAIN 8 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MMAG
1.0
SFACE
*0.0
NSE
CTION
10
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
* These values must be provided in the units currently being used for input.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 300 mm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be
circular with a 300 mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear
areas (AY & AZ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD.
Also note that moments of inertia may be provided, but if not provided, the program will calculate
values from YD and ZD.
critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular, and circular sections. For rectangular
and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on each side.
That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly
conservative results in some cases.
Example of Input Data for Column Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE BAEL
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEMB 2 TO 6
MMAG 1.5 MEMB 4 5
MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6
DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6
END CONCRETE DESIGN
FC 25 ALL
CLEAR 40 ALL
DESIGN ELEMENT 15 TO 20
END CONCRETE DESIGN
Moment capacities about both axes are calculated using the procedures of sections 4.5 and 4.6.
Lateral torsional buckling is considered in calculating ultimate twisting moment per section 5.22 of
the specification. The parameter UNL (see Table 9B.1) must be used to specify the unsupported
length of the compression flange for a laterally unsupported member. Note that this length is also
referred to as twisting length.
Default Value
FRENCH
Description
BEAM
0.0
C1
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
C2
1.0
DFF
None
(Mandatory
for
deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
100.0 cm.
DMIN
0.0 cm.
FYLD
250.0 MPa
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
Parameter
Name
SAME*
Default Value
0.0
Description
TRACK
0.0
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member
Length
*For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will be an equal angle
and vice versa for unequal angles.
Note: COND CRITIQUE refers to the section of the CM 66 (Revn. 80) specification which governed
the design.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, calculated member capacities will be printed. The following is
a detailed description of printed items:
PC
Member Compression Capacity
TR
Member Tension Capacity
MUZ
Member Moment Capacity (about z-axis)
MUY
Member Moment Capacity (about y-axis)
VPZ
Member Shear Capacity (z-axis)
VPY
Member Shear Capacity (y-axis)
STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as individual
components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the ability
to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used selectively in
accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are:
l
Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design
requirements.
Currently STAAD supports steel design of wide flange, S, M, HP shapes, angle, double angle,
channel, double channel, beams with cover plate, composite beams and code checking of prismatic
properties.
Sample Input data for Steel Design:
UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE FRENCH
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
TA ST IPE140
30 TA ST IPEA120
TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER180
9B.8.2 HE shapes
HE shapes are specified as follows.
3 5 TA ST HEA120A
7 10 TA ST HEM140
13 14 TA ST HEB100
35 TA ST IPN200
TA ST IPN380
9B.8.4 T Shapes
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the I beam
shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5
2 8
TA T IPE140
TA T HEM120
9B.8.5 U Channels
Shown below is the syntax for assigning 4 different names of channel sections.
1 TO
6 TO
5 TA ST UAP100
10 TA ST UPN220
11 TO
16 TO
15 TA ST UPN240A
20 TA ST UAP250A
D UAP150
D UAP250A SP 0.5
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back-to-back double channel UAP150 with no spacing
in between. Member 17 is a double channel UAP250A with a spacing of 0.5 length units between
the channels.
9B.8.7 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified
as follows:
16 20
TA ST L30X30X2.7
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30mm and a leg thickness of 2.7mm. This
specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If
the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) should be used
instead of ST.
17 21
22 24
TA RA L25X25X4
TA RA L100X100X6.5
Note that if the leg thickness is a round number such as 4.0, only the number 4 appears in the
section name, the decimal part is not part of the section name.
TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.6
TA LD L80X40X6
47 TA LD L80X80X6.5 SP 0.75
TA ST TUB50252.7
TA ST TUB2001008.0
Members 64 and 78 are tubes with a depth of 50mm, width of 25mm and a wall thickness of
2.7mm. Members 66 and 73 are tubes with a depth of 200mm, width of 100mm and a wall thickness
of 8.0mm. Unlike angles, the ".0" in the thickness is part of the section name.
Tubes can also be input by their dimensions instead of by their table designations. For example,
6 TA
is a tube that has a depth of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of 0.5
length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE sections
specified in this way.
28 TA ST PIP422.6
78 TA ST PIP21912.5
Members 8 to 28 are pipes 42.4mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 2.6mm. Members 3, 64 and 78
are pipes 219.1mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 12.5mm.
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters of the
section. For example,
1 TO
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 length units and inside dia. of 20 length units. Only code
checking, no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
9B.8.11 Example
SAMPLE FILE CONTAINING FRENCH SHAPES
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES FRENCH
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* IPN SHAPES
2 TA ST IPN380
*HE SHAPES
3 TA ST HEA200
* T SHAPES
4 TA T HEM120
* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST UAP100
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D UAP150 SP 0.5
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L30X30X2.7
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L25X25X4
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
9 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.25
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
10 TA LD L80X40X6 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
11 TA ST TUB50252.7
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
12 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
* PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS)
13 TA ST PIP422.6
* PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS)
14 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINI
10
German Codes
10 German Codes
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250 mm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be
circular with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not provide the cross
section area (AX) as an input.
PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input file. The user must note that to take
advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as primary load cases
and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic
combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta
analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load
etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically. The column is
designed for the total moment which is the sum of the primary and secondary forces. The
secondary moments can be compared to those calculated using the charts of DIN 1045.
available from the flexural reinforcement to carry and "balance" shear. Two-legged stirrups are
provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on these sections. Stirrups are assumed to be
U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to torsion.
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the
element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement
required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement
required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The following parameters
are those applicable to slab design:
FYMAIN
Yield stress for all reinforcing steel
FC
Concrete grade
CLEAR
Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the bar. This is considered
the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the element.
SRA
Parameter which denotes the angle of direction of the required transverse reinforcement
relative to the direction of the longitudinal reinforcement for the calculation of
BAUMANN design forces.
The other parameters shown in Table 10A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is specified
again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 10A.1-German Concrete Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
CLEAR
25 mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
ELY
1.0
ELZ
1.0
FC
25 N/mm 2
FYMAIN
420 N/mm 2
FYSEC
420 N/mm 2
MAXMAIN
50 mm
MINMAIN
16 mm
Parameter
Name
MINSEC
Default Value
8 mm
Description
MMAG
1.0
NSECTION
10
SFACE
0.0
SRA
0.0
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
10B.1 General
10B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the DIN code. The
design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and
allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. Two
major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations.
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable stresses or
capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. The
code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness requirements and the stability
criteria. It is recommended that you use the following steps in performing the steel design:
1. Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.
2. Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
3. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.
10B.4.2 HE Shapes
The designation for HE shapes is similar to that for IPE shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST HEB300
23 56 TA ST HEA160
10B.4.3 I Shapes
I shapes are identified by the depth of the section. The following example illustrates the
designation.
14 15 TA ST I200
10B.4.4 T Shapes
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the I beam
shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T HEA220
2 8 TA T IPE120
10B.4.5 U Channels
The example below provides the command for identifying two channel sections. The former
(U70X40) has a depth of 70mm and a flange width of 40mm. The latter (U260) has a depth of
260mm.
11 TA D U70X40
27 TA D U260
10B.4.7 Angles
Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified
as follows:
16 20 TA ST L20X20X2.5
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 20mm and a leg thickness of 2.5mm. The
above specification may be used when the local z-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis specified in
Chapter 2. If the local y-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may
be used.
17 21 TA RA L40X20X5
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters of the
section. For example,
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units. Only code
checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
is the specification for a tube having sides of 100mm x 60mm and the wall thickness of 3.6mm.
Tubes, like pipes can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) instead of
by their table designations.
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5 in current length units.
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed for TUBE sections specified this
way.
10B.4.11 Example
SAMPLE INPUT FILE CONTAINING GERMAN SHAPES
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES GERMAN
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* HE SHAPES
2 TA ST HEB300
* I SHAPES
3 TA ST I200
* T SHAPES
4 TA T HEA220
* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST U70X40
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D U260
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L20X20X2.5
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L40X20X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK
9 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
10 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* PIPES
11 TA ST PIP602.9
* PIPES
12 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB100603.6
* TUBES
14 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 WT 0.5
*
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
program. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used
numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements of the
situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the
physical structure.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is specified
again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 10B.1-German Steel Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
CODE
Default Value
Description
BEAM
0.0
CB
CMM
1.0
DMAX
1.0 m
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
DMIN
0.0 m
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
PY
240 N/sq.mm
Strength of steel.
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SAME
0.0
SBLT
SGR
0.0
Grade of steel:
0. St 37-2
1. St 52-3
2. St E 355
TRACK
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member
Length
11
Indian Codes
11 Indian Codes
will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm
depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided,
will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. The third set numbers in the above example
represents a T-shape with 750 mm flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall depth and 100 mm
flange depth (See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether the section is rectangular,
flanged or circular and the beam or column design.
Default Value
Description
BRACING
0.0
Beam Design:
A value of 1.0 means the
effect of axial force will be
taken into account for beam
design.
Column Design:
correspond to the terms
"Braced" and "Unbraced"
described in Notes 1, 2, and 3
of Clause 39.7.1 of IS456:2000.
0. The column is braced about both
axes.
1. The column is unbraced about
major axis.
2. The column is unbraced about
minor axis.
3. The column is unbraced about both
axis.
CLEAR
25 mm
40 mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
ELZ
1.0
ELY
1.0
ENSH
0.0
30 N/mm 2
FYMAIN
415 N/mm 2
FYSEC
415 N/mm 2
MINMAIN
10 mm
MAXMAIN
60 mm
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
MINSEC
8 mm
MAXSEC
12 mm
MFACE
RATIO
4.0
REINF
0.0
RENSH
0.0
RFACE
4.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
0.0
SPSMAIN
25 mm
TORSION
0.0
SFACE
0.0
Beam Design:
0. output consists of reinforcement
details at START, MIDDLE, and
END.
1. critical moments are printed in
addition to TRACK 0.0 output.
2. required steel for intermediate
sections defined by NSECTION are
printed in addition to TRACK 1.0
output.
Column Design:
0. reinforcement details are printed.
1. column interaction analysis results
are printed in addition to TRACK
0.0 output.
2. a schematic interaction diagram and
intermediate interaction values are
printed in addition to TRACK 1.0
output.
ULY
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
ULZ
1.0
WIDTH
ZD
11A.3.1 Notes
a. You may specify reinforcing bar combinations through the BAR COMBINATIONcommand.
Refer to Section 9A.8 for details.
b. ELY and ELZ parameters are used to calculate effective length of column to find whether it is
a short or long column. Please refer CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000.
In CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, you will find two term, l
l
ex
l = ELZ multiplied by the member length (distance between the two nodes of the
ex
member)
l = ELY multiplied by the member length (distance between the two nodes of the
ey
member)
For the term "D" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the YD dimension of the column.
For the term "b" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the ZD dimension of the column.
c. ULY and ULZ parameters are used to calculate unsupported length of column to find
minimum eccentricity. Please refer CL 25.4 of IS456:2000.
In CL 25.4 of IS456:2000, you will find an expression "unsupported length of column". This
term is calculated as
l
d. The value of the ENSH parameter (other than 0.0 and 1.0) is used only when the span of a
beam is subdivided into two or more parts. When this condition occurs, the RENSH
parameter is also to be used.
The span of the beam is subdivided four parts, each of length L meter. The shear strength
will be enhanced up to X meter from both supports. The input should be the following:
Steps:
1. ENSH L MEMB 1 =>
Shear strength will be enhanced throughout the length of the
member 1, positive sign indicates length measured from start of the member
2. ENSH (X-L) MEMB 2 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a length (X-L) of the
member 2, length measured from the start of the member
3. ENSH L MEMB 4 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout the length of the
member 4, negative sign indicates length measured from end of the member
4. ENSH (X-L) MEMB 3 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a length (X-L) of the
member 3, length measured from the end of the member
5. RENSH L MEMB 2 3 => Nearest support lies at a distance L from both the members 2
and 3.
6. DESIGN BEAM 1 TO 4=> This will enhance the shear strength up to length X from
both ends of the beam consisting of members 1 to 4 and gives spacing accordingly.
At section = y1 from start of member 1 av = y1
At section = y2 from the start of member 2 av = y2+L
At section = y3 from the end of member 3 av = y3+L
At section = y4 from end of member 4 av = y4
where c, enhanced = 2dc/av
At section 0.0, av becomes zero. Thus enhanced shear strength will become infinity. However
for any section shear stress cannot exceed c, max. Hence enhanced shear strength is limited
to a maximum value of c, max.
moment and forces and the effect of the duration of loads. Another option is to approximately
magnify design moments.
STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first option. To perform this type of analysis, use
the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. The P-Delta analysis will
accommodate all requirements of the second- order analysis described by IS:456, except for the
effects of the duration of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because experts
believe that the effects of the duration of loads are negligible in a normal structural configuration.
Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an approximation, it must be realized that
the approximate evaluation of slenderness effects is also an approximate method. In this method,
additional moments are calculated based on empirical formula and assumptions on sidesway
(Clause 39.7.1 and 39.7.1.1,IS: 456 - 2000). The rules of Clause 39.7.1 have been implemented in
STAAD.Pro. They will be checked if the ELY and ELZ parameters are specified.
Considering all these information, a P-Delta analysis, as performed by STAAD may be used for the
design of concrete members.
Note: To take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as
primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations
are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments (i.e., analysis results), whereas a primary
load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Loads can be combined
prior to analysis using the REPEAT LOADcommand.
Note: You must specify the appropriate load factors (e.g., 1.5 for dead load, etc.) as STAAD does
not factor the loads automatically.
11A.5.1 DesignforFlexure
Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating
tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the above
mentioned sections. Each of these sections is designed to resist both of these critical sagging and
hogging moments. Where ever the rectangular section is inadequate as singly reinforced section,
doubly reinforced section is tried. However, presently the flanged section is designed only as singly
reinforced section under sagging moment. It may also be noted all flanged sections are
automatically designed as rectangular section under hogging moment as the flange of the beam is
ineffective under hogging moment. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first
pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed
reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design,
reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire
flexure design is performed again in a second pass taking into account of the changed effective
depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provide after the preliminary design.
Final provisions of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the
guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per IS:456-2000 (Clause 26.2.3). Although exact
curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which will be more
or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical consideration), user has the
choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 11 equally spaced sections from which the
final detail drawing can be prepared.
Once you have specified SFACE and EFACE parameters to indicate sections, the MFACE parameter can
be used to design for flexure at any point along the length of the beam, in addition to the equally
spaced sections normally used.
11A.5.2 DesignforShear
Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear design
are performed at 11 equally spaced sections (0.0 to 1.0) for the maximum shear forces amongst the
active load cases and the associated torsional moments. Shear capacity calculation at different
sections without the shear reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by
STAAD program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on
these sections.
As per Clause 40.5 of IS:456-2000 shear strength of sections (< 2d where d is the effective depth)
close to support has been enhanced, subjected to a maximum value of
.
cmax
N O.
D E S I G N
R E S U L T S
Fe415 (Main)
6400.0 mm
SIZE:
300.0 mm X
Fe250 (Sec.)
400.0 mm
COVER: 25.0 mm
1600.0 |
0.00
72.73
0.00
1
|
30.31
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
2133.3 |
0.00
86.20
0.00
1
|
20.20
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
2666.7 |
0.00
94.28
0.00
1
|
10.10
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
3200.0 |
0.00
96.98
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
3733.3 |
0.00
94.28
0.00
1
| -10.10
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
4266.7 |
0.00
86.20
0.00
1
| -20.20
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
4800.0 |
0.00
72.73
0.00
1
| -30.31
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
5333.3 |
0.00
53.88
0.00
1
| -40.41
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
5866.7 |
0.00
29.63
0.00
1
| -50.51
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
6400.0 |
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
| -60.61
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
column design of STAAD. Default clear spacing between main reinforcing bars is taken to be 25
mm while arrangement of longitudinal bars.
11A.6.1 ColumnDesignOutput
Default column design output (TRACK 0.0) contains the reinforcement provided by STAAD and
the capacity of the section. With the option TRACK 1.0, the output contains intermediate results
such as the design forces, effective length coefficients, additional moments etc. All design output is
given in SI units. An example of a TRACK 2.0 output follows:
C O L U M N
N O.
M20
LENGTH:
D E S I G N
R E S U L T S
Fe415 (Main)
3000.0 mm
CROSS SECTION:
Fe250 (Sec.)
400.0 mm X
1 END JOINT:
600.0 mm
COVER: 40.0 mm
SHORT COLUMN
2000.00
INITIAL MOMENTS
MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC.
:
:
About Z
160.00
52.00
SLENDERNESS RATIOS
MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May)
:
:
:
:
160.00
120.00
About Y
120.00
40.00
BAR COMBINATIONcommand to specify two bar diameters to calculate a combination of each bar to
be provided at each section. The syntax for bar combination is given below.
START BAR COMBINATION
MD1 <bar diameter> MEMB
<member list>
<member list>
vertical distributed reinforcing, the concentrated (in-plane bending) edge reinforcing and the link
required for out-of-plane shear.
Refer to Section 5.55 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details on shear wall design.
Default Value
Description
CLEAR
25 mm
EMAX
36
EMIN
FYMAIN
415 Mpa
FC
30 Mpa
Compressive strength of
concrete, in current units.
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
HMIN
HMAX
36
KSLENDER
1.0
LMAX
16
LMIN
TWOLAYERED
Reinforcement placement
mode:
0. single layer, each
direction
1. two layers, each
direction
VMAX
36
VMIN
1. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface boundary node-to-node segments
will be subdivided into 12 fragments prior to finite element mesh generation.
2. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES command.
3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For instance, the line
2 to 5 gen pin assigns pinned supports to all nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As the nodeto-node distances were previously subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12 command, there will
be an additional 11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all 13 nodes will be assigned
pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are not individually accessible to
the user. They are created by the program to enable the finite element mesh generation and
to allow application of boundary constraints.
4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE PROPERTY and
SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively.
5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START SHEARWALL DES and END.
The CODE command selects the design code that will be the basis for the design. For Indian
code the parameter is INDIAN. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST command is followed by a list
of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or shear wall
components.
11A.8.3 Example
The following partial example illustrates the input for the definition of shear wall and design of the
wall.
SET DIVISION 12
SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
SURFACE PROPERTY
1 TO 4 THI 18
SUPPORTS
1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 to 5 gen pin
6 to 10 gen pin
11 to 15 gen pin
19 to 16 gen pin
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 2.17185e+007
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 23.5616
ALPHA 1e-005
Element design will be performed only for the moments MX and MY at the center of the element.
Design will not be performed for SX, SY, SXY, SQX, SQY or MXY. Also, design is not performed at
any other point on the surface of the element.
A typical example of element design output is shown below. The reinforcement required to resist
Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My
moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement (See "Section Types for Concrete Design" on page
463). The parameters FYMAIN, FC, and CLEAR listed in Table 11A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other
parameters mentioned in Table 11A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
Figure 11A.1 - Sign convention of loaded plate element
LONG. REINF
(SQ.MM/ME)
47 TOP :
BOTT:
156.
351.
MOM-X /LOAD
(KN-M/M)
0.00 /
-15.83 /
11A.9.2 Example
Element design per the IS 456 code
UNIT MMS
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE INDIA
FYMAIN 415 ALL
MAXMAIN 60 ALL
DESIGN ELEMENT 43
END CONCRETE DESIGN
TRANS. REINF
(SQ.MM/ME)
0
3
156.
448.
MOM-Y /LOAD
(KN-M/M)
0.00 /
-20.00 /
0
3
Default Value
Description
BRACING
0.0
Beam Design
1.0 = the effect of axial force will be
taken into account for beam design.
Column Design: Correspond to the terms
"Braced" and "Unbraced" described in
Notes 1, 2, and 3 of Clause 39.7.1 of
IS456:2000.
1.0 = the column is unbraced about
major axis.
2.0 = the column is unbraced about
minor axis.
3.0 = the column is unbraced about
both axis.
DEPTH
YD
CLEAR
25 mm
40 mm
Parameter
Name
COMBINE
Default Value
0.0
Description
EFACE
0.0
ELZ
1.0
ELY
1.0
Parameter
Name
ENSH
Default Value
Description
0.0
Parameter
Name
EUDL
Default Value
Description
None
FYMAIN
415 N/mm 2
FYSEC
415 N/mm 2
FC
30 N/mm 2
GLD
None
Parameter
Name
HLINK
IPLM
Default Value
Description
Spacing of
longitudinal
bars measured
to the outer
face
0.0
Parameter
Name
IMB
Default Value
0.0
Description
MINMAIN
10 mm
MAXMAIN
60 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MAXSEC
12 mm
PLASTIC
0.0
RATIO
4.0
REINF
0.0
Parameter
Name
RENSH
Default Value
Description
0.0
RFACE
4.0
SFACE
0.0
SPSMAIN
25 mm
TORISION
0.0
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
0.0
Description
Beam Design:
0.0 = output consists of
reinforcement details at
START, MIDDLE and END.
1.0 = critical moments are
printed in addition to
TRACK 0.0 output.
2.0 = required steel for
intermediate sections defined
by NSECTION are printed in
addition to TRACK 1.0
output.
Column Design:
0.0 = reinforcement details
are printed.
1.0 = column interaction
analysis results are printed in
addition to TRACK 0.0
output.
2.0 = a schematic interaction
diagram and intermediate
interaction values are printed
in addition to TRACK 1.0
output.
ULY
1.0
ULZ
1.0
WIDTH
ZD
Bar combination has been introduced for detailing. Please refer section 11B.6 for details.
* EFACE and SFACE command is not valid for member combination.
** IPLM and IMB commands are not valid for member combination. These commands are ignored
for members forming physical member.
*** The purpose of COMBINE command is the following:
1. If a beam spanning between two supports is subdivided into many sub-beams this parameter
will combine them into one member. It can also be used to combine members to form one
continuous beam spanning over more than two supports.
2. When two or more members are combined during design plastic or elastic moments will be
calculated at the column supports. At all the intermediate nodes (if any) this calculation
will be ignored.
Note: Please note that the program only recognizes column at right angle to the beam.
Inclined column support is ignored.
3. It will calculate sectional forces at 13 sections along the length of the combined member.
4. It will calculate critical loads (similar to that of Design Load Summary) for all active load
cases during design.
Beams will be combined only when DESIGN BEAM command is issued.
The following lines should be satisfied during combination of members:
1. Members to be combined should have same sectional properties if any single span between
two column supports of a continuous beam is subdivided into several members.
2. Members to be combined should have same constants (E, Poi ratio, alpha, density, and beta
angle)
3. Members to be combined should lie in one straight line.
4. Members to be combined should be continuous.
5. Vertical members (i.e., columns) cannot be combined.
6. Same member cannot be used more than once to form two different combined members.
7. The maximum number of members that can be combined into one member is 299.
Note: Sectional forces and critical load for combined member output will only be available when
all the members combined are successfully designed in both flexure and shear.
ENSH and RENSH parameters will have to be provided (as and when necessary) even if physical
member has been formed.
11B.3.1 Example
The following lines show a standard example for design to be performed in IS 13920.
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER MTON
JOINT COORDINATES
MEMBER INCIDENCES
CONSTANTS
SUPPORTS
The factored axial stress on the member should not exceed 0.1fck (Clause 6.1.1) for all active load
cases. If it exceeds allowable axial stress no design will be performed.
11B.4.1 DesignforFlexure
Design procedure is same as that for IS 456. However while designing following criteria are satisfied
as per IS-13920:
1. The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20. (Clause 5.2)
2. Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3)
3. The minimum tension steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by (Clause 6.2.1b)
min = 0.24fck/fy
The maximum steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by (Clause 6.2.2)
max = 0.025
4. The positive steel ratio at a joint face must be at least equal to half the negative steel at that
face. (Clause 6.2.3)
5. The steel provided at each of the top and bottom face, at any section, shall at least be equal
to one-fourth of the maximum negative moment steel provided at the face of either joint.
(Clause 6.2.4)
11B.4.2 DesignforShear
The shear force to be resisted by vertical hoops is guided by the Clause 6.3.3 of IS 13920:1993
revision. Elastic sagging and hogging moments of resistance of the beam section at ends are
considered while calculating shear force. Plastic sagging and hogging moments of resistance can
also be considered for shear design if PLASTIC parameter is mentioned in the input file. (Refer
Table 8A1.1)
Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Procedure is
same as that of IS 456.
The following criteria are satisfied while performing design for shear as per Cl. 6.3.5 of IS-13920:
The spacing of vertical hoops over a length of 2d at either end of the beam shall not exceed
a. d/4
b. 8 times the diameter of the longitudinal bars
In no case this spacing is less than 100 mm.
The spacing calculated from above, if less than that calculated from IS 456 consideration is
provided.
N O.
1
D E S I G N R E S U L T S
Fe415 (Main)
Fe250 (Sec.)
6400.0 mm
SIZE:
300.0 mm X 400.0 mm
COVER: 25.0 mm
DESIGN LOAD SUMMARY (KN MET)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION |FLEXURE (Maxm. Sagging/Hogging moments)|
SHEAR
(in mm) |
P
MZ
MX
Load Case |
VY
MX Load Case
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0.0 |
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
60.61
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
533.3 |
0.00
29.63
0.00
1
|
50.51
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
1066.7 |
0.00
53.88
0.00
1
|
40.41
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
1600.0 |
0.00
72.73
0.00
1
|
30.31
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
2133.3 |
0.00
86.20
0.00
1
|
20.20
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
2666.7 |
0.00
94.28
0.00
1
|
10.10
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
3200.0 |
0.00
96.98
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
3733.3 |
0.00
94.28
0.00
1
| -10.10
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
4266.7 |
0.00
86.20
0.00
1
| -20.20
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
4800.0 |
0.00
72.73
0.00
1
| -30.31
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
5333.3 |
0.00
53.88
0.00
1
| -40.41
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
5866.7 |
0.00
29.63
0.00
1
| -50.51
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
6400.0 |
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
| -60.61
0.00
1
|
0.00
0.00
0.00
1
|
*** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION
0.0 IS
60.61 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF IS-13920
*** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 6400.0 IS
60.61 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF IS-13920
NOTE :
MOMENT OF RESISTANCE IS CALCULATED BASED ON THE AREA OF STEEL PROVIDED.
IF AREA OF STEEL PROVIDED IS MUCH HIGHER COMPARED TO AREA OF STEEL
REQUIRED MOMENT OF RESISTANCE WILL INCREASE WHICH MAY INCREASE DESIGN
SHEAR FORCE.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO.
7
0.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )|
0.00/ 981.75( 2-25 )| 8 @ 100 mm
533.3 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 281.26/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm
1066.7 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm
1600.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm
2133.3 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm
2666.7 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm
3200.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 894.99/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm
3733.3 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm
4266.7 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm
4800.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm
M20
LENGTH:
5333.3 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm
5866.7 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 281.26/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm
6400.0 |
0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )|
0.00/ 981.75( 2-25 )| 8 @ 100 mm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3)
The minimum dimension of column member shall not be less than 200 mm. For columns
having unsupported length exceeding 4m, the shortest dimension of column shall not be
less than 300 mm. (Clause 7.1.2)
The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension to the perpendicular dimension shall
preferably be not less than 0.4. (Clause 7.1.3)
The spacing of hoops shall not exceed half the least lateral dimension of the column, except
where special confining reinforcement is provided. (Clause 7.3.3)
Special confining reinforcement shall be provided over a length l from each joint face,
o
towards mid span, and on either side of any section, where flexural yielding may occur. The
length l shall not be less than a) larger lateral dimension of the member at the section
o
where yielding occurs, b) 1/6 of clear span of the member, and c) 450 mm. (Clause 7.4.1)
The spacing of hoops used as special confining reinforcement shall not exceed of
minimum member dimension but need not be less than 75 mm nor more than 100 mm.
(Clause 7.4.6)
The area of cross-section of hoops provided are checked against the provisions for minimum
area of cross-section of the bar forming rectangular, circular or spiral hoops, to be used as
special confining reinforcement. (Clause 7.4.7 and 7.4.8)
5 END JOINT:
2 SHORT COLUMN
DESIGN FORCES (KNS-MET)
----------------------DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu)
:
226.7
About Z
About Y
INITIAL MOMENTS
:
0.64
146.28
MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC.
:
4.53
SLENDERNESS RATIOS
:
MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT
:
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS
:
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May)
:
TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS
:
4.53
146.28
** GUIDING LOAD CASE:
5
Along Z
4.53
Along Y
<member list>
<member list>
ENDBAR COMBINATION
Note: The bar sizes should be specified in the order of increasing size (i.e., MD2 bar diameter
should be greater than MD1 bar diameter).
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld gives the
development length to be provided at the two ends of each section.
The typical output for bar combination is shown below:
OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION
---------------------------------------------------------------------------|
M A I N
R E I N F O R C E M E N T
|
---------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION |
0.0- 1600.0
|
1600.0- 4800.0
|
4800.0- 6400.0
|
|
mm
|
mm
|
mm
|
---------------------------------------------------------------------------TOP
|
2-16
|
2-16
|
2-16
|
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
Ast Reqd|
0.00
|
0.00
|
0.00
|
Prov|
402.29
|
402.29
|
402.29
|
Ld (mm) |
752.2
|
1175.3
|
752.2
|
---------------------------------------------------------------------------BOTTOM |
4-16
|
2-16
+ 2-25 |
4-16
|
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
in 1 layer(s)
|
Ast Reqd|
632.82
|
894.99
|
632.82
|
Prov|
804.57
|
1384.43
|
804.57
|
Ld (mm) |
752.2
|
1175.3
|
752.2
|
---------------------------------------------------------------------------============================================================================
st_Top_A
st_Bot_A
st_Top_B
st_Bot_B
= 339.29 mm 2
= 226.19 mm 2
= 226.19 mm 2
= 339.29 mm 2
Steps
Calculation of Simple Shear
Simple shear from gravity Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2
= 15600N
load on span =
Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided
Sagging Moment Of
Resistance of End A Mu,
as =
Hogging Moment Of
Resistance of End A
Micah =
Sagging Moment Of
Resistance of End A Mu,
bs =
Hogging Moment Of
0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d *
= 36768130.05 N
(1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck)
0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d *
= 54003057.45 N
(1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck)
0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d *
= 54003057.45 N
(1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck)
0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * (1 - Ast_Top_B* = 36768130.05 N
-10137.69104 N
Vur,b =
41337.69104 N
Vul,a =
Vul,b =
- 22202.14022 N
11.56 N
53402.14022 N
-6.44 N
41337.69104 N
300 mm
Section depth, D
450 mm
415 N/sq. mm
20 N/sq. mm
25 mm
Bar Diameter
12 mm
419 mm
Eudl w
6.5 N/sq. mm
Length L
3000 mm
Ast_Top_A
226.19 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_A
339.29 sq. mm
Ast_Top_B
452.39 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_B
226.19 sq. mm
Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2
= 11700N
0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d *
= 48452983 N
(1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck)
= 32940364.5 N
(1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck)
0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d *
= 32940364.5 N
(1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck)
d * fck)
Mu,bh =
Calculation of shear force due to the formation of a plastic hinge at both ends of the beam plus the
factored gravity load on the span.
Figure 11B.4 - Sway to right
Vur,a =
-40463.862 N
Vur,b =
63863.862 N
Sway to left
Vul,a =
42444.3402 N
Vul,b =
-15144.34 N
-10.31 N
42444.3402 N
Vur,a, Vul,a) =
Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl =
-23.81 N
63863.862 N
Vur,b, Vul,b) =
Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design
requirements. The entire ISI steel section table is supported. Section 11C.13 describes the
specification of steel sections.
criteria. The code checking part of the program checks stability and strength requirements and
reports the critical loading condition and the governing code criteria.
It is generally assumed that the engineer will take care of the detailing requirements like provision
of stiffeners and check the local effects such as flange buckling and web crippling.
Compressive Stress
Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded compression members shall not
exceed 0.6f nor the permissible stress calculated based on the following equation (per Clause:
y
ac
5.1.1):
ac = 0.6{(fcc fy)/[(fcc)n +(fy)n ]1/n }
Where:
ac
cc
=l/r = Slenderness ratio of the member, ratio of the effective length to appropriate
radius of gyration
n = A factor assumed as 1.4.
bt
bc
For an I-beam or channel with equal flanges bent about the axis of maximum strength (z-z axis),
the maximum bending compressive stress on the extreme fibre calculated on the effective section
shall not exceed the values of maximum permissible bending compressive stress. The maximum
permissible bending compressive stress shall be obtained by the following formula: (Clause: 6.2.2)
fcb f y
bc = 0.66
1/n
(f ) + f n
y
cb
n
( )
Clause 6.2.3
Where:
f
cb
fcb = k1 X + k 2 Y
c2
c1
Where:
X=Y 1+
Y=
1 2
20 r yD
in MPa
26.5(10 ) 5
2
(1 / r y )
k
= a coefficient to allow for reduction in thickness or breadth of flanges
1
between points of effective lateral restraint and depends on , the ratio of the total
area of both flanges at the point of least bending moment to the corresponding area
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is specified
again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 11C.1-Indian Steel Design IS 800:1984 Parameters
Parameter Name
CODE
Default Value
-
Description
Must be specified as INDIAN
Design Code to follow.
See section 5.48.1 of the
Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
1.0
CMY
DFF
None
(Mandatory for
deflection check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
100.0 cm.
DMIN
0.0 cm.
FYLD
250 MPA
CMZ
(36.25 KSI)
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
MAIN
NSF
1.0
PROFILE
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
SSZ
0.0
TMAIN
400 (Tension
Memb)
Parameter Name
TRACK
Default Value
0.0
Description
0.0 = Suppress critical
member stresses
1.0 = Print all critical member
stresses
2.0 = Print expanded output.
If there is deflection check it
will also print the governing
load case number for deflection
check whenever critical
condition for design is not
DEFLECTION.
(see Fig.8B.1)
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member Length
11C.4.1 Notes
a. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local deflections
within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection Length" will be equal
to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the "Deflection Length" may be
different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local
deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and
three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be equal to the total
length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this
situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.
b. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and
local deflections will be measured from original member line.
c. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for steel
design.
RESULT
prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be
an asterisk (*) mark in front of the member number.
CRITICAL COND
the section of the IS:800 code which governs the design.
RATIO
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING
provides the load case number which governs the design.
FX, MY, and MZ
provide the axial force, moment in local y-axis and moment in local z-axis respectively.
Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except torsion) to
perform design, only FX,MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of
interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design
forces govern.
Note: If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table and will
print allowable bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable
axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress (FV). When the parameter TRACK is
set to 2.0 for all members parameter code values are as shown in the following example.
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (
IS-800)
********************************************
v1.0
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN CM UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
===|===
------------ |
|MEMBER
7 * | INDIAN SECTIONS
|
|
AX =
85.0 |
|
* | ST ISWB400
|
|
--Z AY =
34.4 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
|
AZ =
34.7 |
| IS-800
* ===============================
===|===
SY = 138.8 |
|
*
SZ = 1171.3 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (ME=
3.00 --->|
RY =
4.0 |
|*************
RZ =
16.6 |
|
|
|
112.1( KN-METR)
|
|PARAMETER
|L1
STRESSES
|
|IN
NEWT MM
|
IN
NEWT MM|
|--------------- +
-------------|
| KL/R-Y=
74.2 |
FA = 150.0 |
| KL/R-Z=
18.1 +
fa =
1.0 |
| UNL
= 3000.0 |
FCZ = 139.9 |
| C
= 400.0 +
FTZ = 165.0 |
| CMY
=
0.60 |
FCY = 165.0 |
| CMZ
=
0.40 +
FTY = 165.0 |
| FYLD = 249.9 |
L3 fbz =
95.7 |
| NSF
=
0.9 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---|
fby =
0.0 |
| DFF
=
0.0 90.5
FV = 100.0 |
| dff
=
0.0
ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE
fv =
17.1 |
|
(WITH LOAD NO.)
|
|
|
|
MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
|
|
------------------------|
|
|
|
AXIAL
SHEAR-Y
SHEAR-Z
MOMENT-Y
MOMENT-Z
|
|
|
|
VALUE
-23.9
60.6
0.0
0.0
112.1
|
|
LOCATION
0.0
3.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
|
|
LOADING
3
1
0
0
1
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
7.1.2 BEND C
0.684
1
|
|
7.39 T
0.0
-112.1
0.00
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
Note: In case of two identical beams, the heavier beam is designated with an A on the end (e.g.,
ISHB400 A, etc.).
1 TO 5 TA ST ISHB400A
At present there is no standard way to define the local y and z axes for an angle section. The
standard section has local axis system. The standard angle is specified as:
51 52 53 TA ST ISA60X60X6
This specification has the local z-axis (i.e., the minor axis corresponding to the V-V axis specified in
the steel tables. Many engineers are familiar with a convention used by some other programs in
which the local y-axis is the minor axis. STAAD provides for this convention by accepting the
command:
54 55 56 TA RA ISA50X30X6
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
For example,
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB 160808
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and not by
any table designations.
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
Angle
150X150X18
200X100X15
200X150X18
200X200X18
11C.12.10 Single Joist with Channels and Plates on the Flanges to be Used as
Girders
All single joist with channel and plates on the flanges to be used as girders are available as listed in
ISI section handbook. The following example with explanations will be helpful in understanding
the input procedure.
A. Joist Designation
IW450 = ISWB450
B. Top flange channel designation:
350 = ISMC350
C. Constant (always X).
D. Top flange plate thickness in mm.
Note: D = 0 for no plate.
E. Bottom flange plate thickness in mm.
Note: The heavier ISWB600 has been omitted, since the lighter ISWB600 is more efficient.
Default Value
Description
Type of joining
1. implies single lacing with riveted
connection
2. implies double lacing with riveted
connection
3. implies single lacing with welded
connection
4. implies double lacing with welded
connection
5. implies batten with riveted
connection
6. implies batten with welded
connection
COG
0.0 mm
DBL
20 mm
DCFR
0.0
EDIST
32 mm
(Rivetted
Connection)
Edge Distance.
25 mm
(Welded
Connection)
FVB
100 N/mm 2
FYB
300 N/mm 2
Parameter
Name
SPA
Default Value
0.0 mm
THETA
50 degree
WMIN
6 mm
WSTR
108 N/mm 2
Description
Compressive Stress
The estimated compressive stresses in various members multiplied by the appropriate factor of
safety shall not exceed the value given by the formulae described below.
I. Condition: when (b/t) [(b/t)lim = 210/Fy]:
i. When KL/r Cc, the allowable compressive stress is (in N/mm 2)
Fa = Fy{1 - 0.5[(KL/r)/Cc]2 }
ii. When KL/r > Cc, the allowable compressive stress is (in N/mm 2)
Fa = 2 E/(KL/r)2
II. Condition: when (b/t)lim < (b/t) 378/Fy:
The equations in condition 1 shall be used, substituting for F the value F given by:
y
cr
cr
Fcr = 65,550/(b/t)
Where:
F = allowable unit stress in compression, Mpa
a
K = restraint factor,
L = unbraced length of the compression member in cm, and
R = appropriate radius of gyration in cm.
E = modulus of elasticity of steel in N/mm 2
KL/r = largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced segment of the member,
b = distance from edge of the fillet to the extreme fibre in mm, and
t = thickness of flange in mm.
Note: The maximum permissible value of b/t for any type of steel shall not exceed 25.
Slenderness
Limit
120
200
250
Type of Member
Calculation
of KL/r
L/r
L/r
30 + 0.75L/r
60 + 0.5L/r
L/r
28.6 +
0.762L/r
46.2 +
0.615L/r
If the value for ELA is given in the input for any particular member is such that condition for L/r
ratio to fall within the specified range is not satisfied, STAAD goes on by the usual way of finding
slenderness ratio using KL/r formula.
Painted
Other members
3. If the slenderness criterion is fulfilled check against allowable stress is performed. Allowable
axial and tensile stresses are calculated. If the member is under tension and there is no user
defined net section factor (NSF), the net section factor is calculated by the program itself
(See "Calculation of Net Section Factor" on page 529). Actual axial stress in the member is
calculated. The ratio for actual stress to allowable stress, if less than 1.0 or user defined value,
the member has passed the check.
4. Number of bolts required for the critical load case is calculated.
|
* | ST ISA125x95x8
|
| | --Z AY =
6.7 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
| |
AZ =
5.1 |
| IS-802
* ===============================
==| |==
SY =
38.8 |
|
*
SZ =
16.6 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (ME=
1.80 --->|
RY =
4.4 |
|*************
RZ =
2.0 |
|
|
|
|
|PARAMETER
BOLTING
STRESSES
|
|IN
NEWT MM
IN
NEWT MM|
|---------------------------------------|
| L/R-Y =
40.5
BOLT DIA = 12 MM
FA = 188.4 |
| L/R-Z =
87.9
BOLT CAP = 24.66 KN
fa =
80.7 |
| KL/R =
87.9
# BOLT = 6
FYB = 436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0
FVB = 218.0 |
| GALVA =
0.0
|
| C
=
1.0
|
| LEG
=
1.0
|
| ELA
=
1.0
|
| NSF
=
1.0
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
COMPRESSION
0.428
1
|
|
137.13 C
0.0
0.0
0.00
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Default Value
Description
0.0
Parameter
Name
DANGLE
Default Value
Description
0.0
DBL
12 mm
DMAX
100.0 cm.
DMIN
0.0 cm.
ELA
1.0
FVB
218 MPA
FYB
436 MPA
FYLD
250 MPA
GUSSET
5 mm
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
Parameter
Name
LEG
Default Value
1.0
Description
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
1.0
NSF
1.0
NHL
0.0 mm
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
0.0
Description
net
c. Double angles placed back-to-back and connected to each side of a gusset plate
A
net
11D.11.1 Given
End Condition = Members with normal framing eccentricities at both ends of the unsupported
panel for values of L/r up to and including 120
Diameter of the bolt = 16 mm
Thickness of the gusset plate = 8 mm
Net Section Factor is to be calculated.
19 TO 26 28 TO 45 55 TO 62 64 TO 81 91 TO 98 100 TO 125 127 TO 144 155 156 159 160 223 224 229 230 235 TO 250 TA ST ISA150X150X10
27 63 99 126 149 TO 154 157 158 161 TO 214 219 TO 222 225 TO 228 231 232 251 252 TO 258 TA ST ISA80X50X6
CONSTANTS
E 2.05e+008 ALL
POISSON 0.3 ALL
DENSITY 76.8195 ALL
ALPHA 6.5e-006 ALL
SUPPORTS
1 11 21 31 FIXED
UNIT METER KG
LOAD 1 VERT
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 732
46 49 52 55 FX 153
61 FX 1280 FY -1016 FZ 160
46 49 52 55 FX 9006 FY -7844 FZ 1968
2 12 22 32 FX 4503 FY -3937 FZ 1968
LOAD 2 GWBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 515 FY -762 FZ 2342
46 49 52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 3 LEFT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
46 49 FX 6755 FY -5906
52 55 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 4 RIGHT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
46 49 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
PERFORM ANALYSIS
UNIT NEW MMS
PARAMETER
CODE IS802
LY 2800 MEMB 28
LZ 2800 MEMB 28
MAIN 1.0 MEMB 1
ELA 4 MEMB 1
CNSF 1.0 MEMB 28
DBL 16 ALL
GUSSET 8 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 28
FINISH
11D.11.3 Output
A portion of the output for the TRACK 2 member code check follows:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (
IS-802)
********************************************
v1.0
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN CM UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
==||==
------------ |
|MEMBER
1 * | INDIAN SECTIONS
|
||
AX = 120.0 |
|
* | LD ISA200X150X18
|
||
--Z AY =
48.0 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
||
AZ =
36.0 |
| IS-802
* |-----------------------------|
||
SY = 297.3 |
|
*
SZ = 350.6 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (ME=
3.01 --->|
RY =
6.2 |
|*************
RZ =
6.3 |
|
|
|
|
|PARAMETER
BOLTING
STRESSES
|
|IN
NEWT MM
IN
NEWT MM|
|---------------------------------------|
| L/R-Y =
48.6
BOLT DIA = 16 MM
FA = 195.1 |
| L/R-Z =
47.7
BOLT CAP = 55.81 KN
fa = 145.2 |
| KL/R =
84.3
# BOLT = 32
FYB = 436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0
FVB = 218.0 |
| GALVA =
0.0
|
| C
=
1.0
|
| LEG
=
1.0
|
| ELA
=
4.0
|
| NSF
=
1.0
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
COMPRESSION
0.744
1
|
|
1742.26 C
0.0
0.0
0.00
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
STAAD TRUSS
-- PAGE NO.
5
DETAILS OF CALCULATION
---------------------CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
--------------------------TYPE : PAINTED
MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 6.0 MM
48.63
84.31
127.24
: 13.28
9.28
195.07 MPA
-- PAGE NO.
BOLTING
------BOLT DIA : 16 MM
SHEARING CAP :
BEARING CAP :
BOLT CAP :
145.19 MPA
87.66 KN
55.81 KN
55.81 KN
32
STAAD TRUSS
-- PAGE NO.
v1.0
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN CM UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
==| |==
------------ |
|MEMBER 28 * | INDIAN SECTIONS
|
| |
AX =
29.2 |
|
* | ST ISA150X150X10
|
| | --Z AY =
10.0 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
| |
AZ =
10.0 |
| IS-802
* ===============================
==| |==
SY =
95.7 |
|
*
SZ =
44.8 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (ME=
6.53 --->|
RY =
5.9 |
|*************
RZ =
3.0 |
|
|
|
|
|PARAMETER
BOLTING
STRESSES
|
|IN
NEWT MM
IN
NEWT MM|
|---------------------------------------|
| L/R-Y =
47.5
BOLT DIA = 16 MM
FA = 249.9 |
| L/R-Z =
94.0
BOLT CAP = 43.83 KN
fa =
48.5 |
| KL/R =
94.0
# BOLT = 3
FYB = 436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0
FVB = 218.0 |
| GALVA =
0.0
|
| C
=
1.0
|
| LEG
=
1.0
|
| ELA
=
1.0
|
| NSF
=
0.8
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
TENSION
0.194
3
|
|
112.86 T
0.0
0.0
6.53
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
STAAD TRUSS
-- PAGE NO.
8
DETAILS OF CALCULATION
---------------------CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
--------------------------TYPE : PAINTED
MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 6.0 MM
ACTUAL THICKNESS : 10.0 MM
RESULT : PASS
CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO
--------------------------VALUE OF L/r :
93.96
93.96
249.94 MPA
112855.91 N
43.83 KN
55.81 KN
43.83 KN
48.51 MPA
11E. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Indian code IS 801 1975 Code of
practice for use of cold formed light gauge steel structural members in general building
construction, including revisions dated May, 1988. The program allows design of single (noncomposite) members in tension, compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. Cold
work of forming strengthening effects has been included as an option.
Design of members per IS 801 requires the STAAD Indian Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
Z with Lips
Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface (GUI)
or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file.
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section
properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are used
in the design stage, as applicable.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the Standard as follows:
Clause 6.6.1.2 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical shapes of open cross section or
intermittently fastened singly-symmetrical components of built-up shapes having Q = 1.0
which may be subject to torsional-flexural buckling,
Clause 6.6.1.3 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical shapes or intermittently
fastened singly-symmetrical components of built-up shapes having Q < 1.0 which may be
subject to torsional-flexural buckling,
Clause 6.8 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.
Clause 6.7.1 Doubly-symmetric shapes or Shapes not subjected to torsional or torsionalflexural buckling
Clause 6.7.2. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened singly-symmetric
components of built-up shapes having Q=1.0 which may be subjected to torsional-flexural
buckling
Clause 6.7.3. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened singly-symmetric
components of built-up shapes having Q<1.0 which may be subjected to torsional-flexural
buckling.
Default Value
Description
Parameter
Name
Default Value
1.0
BEAM
Description
CMY
0.85
CMZ
1.0
CWY
0.85
FLX
Parameter
Name
FU
Default Value
450 MPa
(4588.72
Description
kg/cm 2)
FYLD
353.04 MPa
(3600.0
kg/cm 2)
KX
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LX
Member
length
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
LY
Member
length
LZ
Member
length
MAIN
NSF
1.0
DMAX
2540.0
cm.
RATIO
1.0
STIFF
Member
Length
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
Description
TSA
All of the design check criteria are described in the following sections.
When a design is performed, the output file reports the maximum utilization ratio from all the
above mentioned checks.
11F.2.1 Slenderness
As per Section 3.8 Table 3, the slenderness ratio (KL/r) of compression members shall not exceed
180, and the slenderness ratio (L/r) of tension members shall not exceed 400.
You can edit the default values through MAIN and TMAIN parameters, as defined in Table 11F.1.
Slender Sections
STAAD.Pro is capable of designing I-Sections with slender webs for IS 800:2007.
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) (release 20.07.08) or higher.
The IS:800-2007 code does not provide any clear guidelines about what method should be adopted
for the design of slender section. The "Flange Only" methodology is used where it is assumed that
flexure is taken by the flanges alone and the web will resist shear with adequate shear buckling
resistance. This method requires that the flanges be non-slender elements (i.e., on the web is a
slender element) to qualify for a valid section for design. If any of the flange elements become
slender, the design will not be performed and a warning message is displayed in the output.
11F.2.3 Tension
Limit State Method
The criteria governing the capacity of Tension members are based on:
STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on these three limit states.
The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the
member, and the corresponding check is done as per section 6.2 of the code.
The Design strength, involving rupture at the section with the net effective area, is evaluated as per
section 6.3 of the code. Here, the number of bolts in the connection may be specified through the
use of the design parameter ALPHA.
The Design strength, involving block shear at an end connection, is evaluated as per section 6.4 of
the code. This criteria is made optional by the parameter DBS. If the value of DBS is specified as 1,
additional design parameters AVG, AVN, ATG, and ATN must be supplied to the program for that
member.
The Net Section Area may be specified through the use of the parameter NSF.
Yielding of Gross Section - to prevent excessive elongation of the member due to material
yielding.
Rupture of Net Section - to prevent rupture of the net effective section area. The number of
bolts in the connection may be specified through the use of the design parameter ALPHA.
The code parameter, , is taken as 1.25 per Table 5, Clause 5.4.1 of the code.
M1
Block Shear to prevent block shearing at the end connection. This check is made option
through use of the DBS parameter. Additional design parameters AVG, AVN, ATG, and ATN
must be supplied to the program for any member which is to be checked for block shear.
The code parameters,, and , are taken as 1.10 and 1.25, respectively, per Table 5, Clause
M0
M1
5.4.1 of the code.
Note: Block shear is not checked by default.
These criteria are dependent on the steel material yield stress parameter, FYLD, and ultimate
tensile strength parameter, FU.
11F.2.4 Compression
The design capacity of the section against Compressive Force, the guiding phenomenon is the
flexural buckling.
ZZ
Fac = 0.6Fcd
Where:
F
cd
= the minimum of the values of Fcd calculated for the local Y and Z axis.
Fcd = (FYLD/mo )/ [ + (2 + 2 ]
= the non-dimensional slenderness factor is evaluated for each local Y and Z axis.
= (FYLD/Fcc)1/2
= 0.5[1 + a( - 0.2) + 2 ]
F
cc
Fcc = 2 E/(Kl/r)2
K = the effective length factor for bending about either the local Y or Z axis, as
provided in the KY and KZ parameters, respectively.
r = radius of gyration about the local Y or Z axis for the section.
FYLD = The yield strength of steel specified in the FYLDparameter.
Slender Sections
For member with slender section under axial compression, design compressive strength should be
calculated on area ignoring depth thickness ratio of web in excess of the class 3 (semi-compact)
limit.
Refer to clause 7.3.2 and Table 2 of IS 800:2007, (corresponding to Internal Element of Compression
Flange)
Ae= Ag - (d/tw - 42) tw2
Where:
A = Effective area of section.
e
d = Depth of web.
t = thickness of web.
w
11F.2.5 Shear
The design capacities of the section against Shear Force in major- and minor-axis directions are
evaluated as per section 8.4 of the code, taking care of the following phenomena:
l
Where:
V = Nominal Shear Strength as per Clause 8.4.2.2.(a)
n
Vn = Vcr = b Av
A = AY or AZ, whichever is appropriate, with reference to Clause 8.4.1.1.
v
Shear buckling must be checked when (d/ tw) > 67 w for webs without
stiffener or (d/tw) > 67 w (Kv/5.35) for webs with stiffeners.
d = Clear Depth of Web between Flanges.
t = Thickness of Web.
w
= (250 / FYLD )
cr,e
w = [FYLD / (3 cr,e)]1/2
Slender Sections
Slender sections should be verified against shear buckling resistance if d/tw > 67 for web without
stiffeners or if it exceeds 67 (Kv5.35) for a web with stiffeners.
Design methods for resistance to shear buckling are described in clause 8.4.2.2 of IS:800-2007 code.
Vn = Vcr
Where:
= Av b
= shear stress corresponding to web buckling, determined as follows:
b
i. When w 0.8
b = fyw3
ii. When 0.8 < w < 1.2
b = [1 - 0.8(w - 0.8) ](fyw3)
iii. When w 1.2
b = fyw((3 w2 ) )
w = non-dimensional web slenderness ratio or shear buckling stress, given by:
w= [fyw(3 cr,e )]1/2
cr,e
11F.2.6 Bending
The design bending moment capacity of a section is primarily dependent on whether the member
is laterally supported or unsupported.
You can control the lateral support condition of the member by the use of LAT parameter.
If the member is laterally supported, then the design strength is calculated as per the provisions of
the section 8.2.1 of IS 800:2007, based on the following factors:
l
Section Classification
If the member is laterally unsupported, then the design strength is calculated as per the provisions
of the section 8.2.2 of IS 800:2007, based on the following factors:
Section Classification
Md = b Zpz fbd
fbd = LT FYLD / mo
Z
Z
ez
pz
LT
LT
LT
Torsional Buckling.
LTZ =
1
2
LTZ +
LTZ LTZ
Z = Elastic Section Modulus of the section about Major Axis for the
ecz
compression side.
Z = Elastic Section Modulus of the section about Major Axis for the
etz
tension side.
EI y
2
M cr =
2
L LT
GI t +
EI w
2
L LT
Slender Sections
For member with slender section subjected to bending, moment is taken by flanges alone. Design
bending strength should be calculated with effective elastic modulus disregarding the contribution
of web of the section.
Zez = 2[Bf tf3 /12 + (Bf tf) (D/2 - tf/2)2 )] (0.5 D)
Zey = 2(Bf tf3 /12) (0.5 Bf)
Where:
Z
Z
ez
ey
B = Width of flange.
f
T = thickness of flange.
f
Where, f is defined in clause 8.2.2 of IS:800-2007 (described in previous Working Stress Design
bd
section).
Note: Slender section can only attain elastic moment capacity and cannot reach to plastic
moment capacity.
Section Strength
Section Strength interaction ratio is calculated as per sec. 9.3.1 of the code.
Overall Member Strength interaction ratio is calculated as per sec. 9.3.2, taking care of the design
parameters PSI, CMX, CMY and CMZ.
f
,f
= Allowable bending compressive stress about minor and major axes,
abcy abcz
respectively.
Ky = 1 +(y - 0.2)ny 1 +0.8ny
Kz = 1 +(z - 0.2)nz 1 +0.8nz
KLT = 1 - 0.1LTny/(CmLT - 0.25) 0.1ny/(CmLT - 0.25)
c. Combined Axial Tension and Bending The following formulas are intended to require
member stability:
ft/fat + fbty/fabty +fbtz/fabtz 1.0
Where:
f = Actual axial tensile stress.
t
Default Value
Description
ALPHA
0.8
ATG
ATN
AVG
AVN
None
(Mandatory
for Block
Shear check)
None
(Mandatory
for Block
Shear check)
None
(Mandatory
for Block
Shear check)
None
(Mandatory
for Block
Shear check)
Parameter
Name
BEAM
Default Value
1.0
Description
CAN
0.0
CMX
0.9
CMY
0.9
0.0
CMZ
DBS
None
(Mandatory
for deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint of
member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
1000 in.
DMIN
0.0 in.
FU
420 MPA
Parameter
Name
FYLD
Default Value
250 MPA
Description
KX
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LAT
0.0
LST
LX
Member
Length
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
180
NSF
1.0
TMAIN
400
Parameter
Name
PROFILE
PSI
Default Value
Description
None
1.0
RATIO
STP
1.0
TRACK
TSP
TST
11F.5.1 Example 1
Commands for code checking
UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER 1
CODE IS800 LSD
ALPHA 0.7 ALL
DBS 1 ALL
CAN 1 MEMB 2
PSI 0.8 MEMB 2
TMAIN 350 MEMB 2
TRACK 2 MEMB 2
CHECK CODE MEMB 2
11F.5.2 Example 2
Commands for member selection
UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER 1
CODE IS800 LSD
MAIN 160 MEMB 7
KY 0.8 MEMB 7
KZ 0.9 MEMB 7
FYLD 350 ALL
SELECT ALL
12
Japanese Codes
12 Japanese Codes
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250 mm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be
circular with a 350 mm diameter.
Caution: It is absolutely imperative that you do not provide the cross section area (AX) as an
input.
member. The axial loads and joint displacements are first determined from an elastic stiffness
analysis and the secondary moments are then evaluated.
The second option is to approximately magnify the moments from the elastic analysis and design
the column for the magnified moment. It is assumed that the magnified moment is equivalent to
the total moment comprised of the sum of primary and secondary moments.
STAAD provides facilities to design according to both of the above methods. To utilize the first
method, the command PDELTA ANALYSIS must be used instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input
file. The user must note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading
must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that
load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load
case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the proper
factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor
the loads automatically. The second method mentioned above is utilized by providing the
magnification factor as a concrete design parameter (See the parameter MMAG in Table 10A.1). The
column is designed for the axial load and total of primary and secondary biaxial moments if the
first method is used and for the axial load and magnified biaxial moments if the second method is
used.
12A.4.1 Example
UNIT KG CM
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE JAPAN
FYMAIN SRR295 ALL
FYSEC SRR295 ALL
FC 350 ALL
CLEAR 2.5 MEM 2 TO 6
TRACK 1.0 MEMB 2 TO 9
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
pt = maximum value and g = 1.0 is lower than the actual moment the program gives message that
the section fails.
This program automatically calculates the Bar size and no. of bars needed to design the section. It
arranges the bar in layers as per the requirements and recalculate the effective depth and redesign
the sections for this effective depth.
Notes:
a. Beams are designed for MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in flexure design
b. MMAG parameter can be used to increase design moment
c. 1.4 cm. is added to the clear cover to take stirrup size into consideration for flexure design.
d. STAAD beam design procedure is based on the local practice and considering the fact that
Japan is a high seismic zone area.
value of Pt needed for minimum axial force, maximum axial force, maximum MZ, maximum MY
among all the load cases for both the ends will be printed. If the MMAG parameter is used, the
column moments will be multiplied by that value. If the SMAG parameter is used, column shear
force will be multiplied by that value.
Column design is done for Rectangular, Square and Circular sections. For rectangular and square
sections Pt value is calculated separately for MZ and MY, while for circular sections Pg value is
calculated for MZ and MY separately.
Column design for biaxial moments is optional. If the BIAXIAL parameter value is 1.0, the program
will design the column for biaxial moments. Otherwise column design is always uniaxial.
Steps involved:
1. Depending on the axial force zone is determined for Pt = 0.0 .
2. If the column is in "zone A", design is performed by increasing Pt and checking allowable
load for that known Pt and known actual eccentricity of the column.
3. If the column is in "zone B" or in "zone C", xn is calculated for given P and Pt and checking
is done for allowable moment, if allowable moment is less than the actual moment, program
increases Pt and this procedure continues until the column design conditions are satisfied
or the column fails as the required Pt is higher than Pt maximum value.
4. If the column is in tension, design is done by considering allowable tensile stress of steel
only.
5. If biaxial design is requested program solve the following interaction equation
6. where, a = 1.0+1.66666666 (ratio-0.2), ratio = P/Pcap & 1.0 a 2.0, Mycap, Mzcap & Pcap
represents section capacity
7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied program increases Pt and calculates Pcap, Mycap
and Mzcap and solve the interaction equation again and this process continues until the
eqn. is satisfied or the column fails as Pt exceeds its maximum limit.
8. If biaxial design is not requested program assumes that interaction equation is satisfied (if
uniaxial design is performed successfully).
9. If the interaction equation is satisfied program determines bar size and calculates no. of bars
and details output is written.
12A.5.1 Example
UNIT KGS CMS
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE JAPAN
FYMAIN SRR295 ALL
FC 210 ALL
CLEAR 2.5 MEMB 2 TO 6
DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6
END CONCRETE DESIGN
2. FC Concrete grade
3. CLEAR Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the bar. This is
considered the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the element.
4. MINMAIN Minimum required size of longitudinal/transverse reinforcing bar
The other parameters shown in Table 12A.1 are not applicable to slab or wall design.
Default Value
Description
Parameter
Name
BIAXIAL
Default Value
0.0
Description
CLEAR
3.0 cm (beam)
4.0 cm
(Column)
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
FC
210 Kg/cm2
FYMAIN
SR235
FYSEC
SR235
LONG
0.0
MAXMAIN
41.0 cm
MAXSEC
41.0 cm
MINMAIN
10 mm
MINSEC
10 mm
MMAG
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
NSECTION
12
REINF
0.0
SFACE
0.0
SMAG
1.0
TORSION
0.0
TRACK
0.0
Beam Design:
0. Critical section design results.
1. Five section design results & design
forces.
2. 12 section design results & design
forces.
Column Design:
1. Detail design results for critical
load case only.
2. Design results for minimum P,
maximum P, maximum MZ and
maximum MY among all load cases
for both ends.
WIDTH
ZD
Table 12A.2-Table of permissible Steel Grades and associated Yield Stresses for
FYMAIN and FYSEC parameters
Steel
Grade
Tension
&Compressio
n
Shear
Reinforcemen
t
Tension
&Compressio
n
Shear
Reinforcemen
t
SR235
SRR235
SDR235
1600
1600
2400
2400
SR295
SRR295
1600
2000
3000
3000
SD295
A
SD295
B
SDR29
5
2000
2000
3000
3000
SDR34
5
SD345
2200 (2000)
2000
3500
3500
SD390
2200 (2000)
2000
4000
4000
12B.1 General
12B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the Architectural
Institute of Japan (AIJ) specifications for structural steel design (2005 edition) in STAAD. The
design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and
allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. Two
major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations.
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable stresses or
capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. The
code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness requirements and the stability
criteria. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel design:
l
Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
The method for calculating allowable bending stress was updated for the AIJ 2005 from the AIJ
2002 code. All other allowable limit states, analysis and design methods, etc., remain unchanged.
Refer to the AIJ 2002 documentation for additional details.
procedure for that particular shape if Steel Design is requested. STEEL TABLE available within
STAAD or UPTABLE facility can be used for member property.
12B.2.2 Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as required by AIJ
specifications. The design procedure consist of following three steps.
1. Calculation of sectional properties
The program extracts sectional properties like sectional area (A ), Moment of Inertia about Y
axis and Z axis, I , I , from built-iu steel tables and calculates the elastic moduli and radii
yy zz
of gyration, Z , Z , i , i , using the appropriate formulas. For the calculation of i, the program
z y y z
calculates the moment of inertia, I, and sectional area, A , using the following formula:
i
i = (Ii/Ai)
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable for I shape, H shape
and Channel sections.
2. Calculation of actual and allowable stresses
Program calculates actual and allowable stresses by following methods:
i. Axial Stress:
Actual tensile stresses (F ) = Force / (A x NSF ),
T
1 0.4 F
when
fc =
0.227F when >
( )
( )
E
0.6F
3
2
()
(fbcy) = ft
Allowable bending stress for M
When b p b , fb = F/
When p b <b eb ,
fb =
b p
b
F 1 0.4
e b p b
When eb <b ,
1 F
b2 2.17
fb =
Where:
b =
e b
My / Me
= 1 / 0.6
3
2
2
+ b
3 e b
Me = C
p b
EI yEI w
4
Ib
= 0.6 + 0.3
EI yGJ
2
Ib
bcz
= 1.5 x (f
bcz
Where:
C = 1.75 - 1.05 (M2 / M1) +0.3 (M2 / M1)2
Allowable bending stress for M , f
=f
=f
y bty
z btz
t
bcz
ww
Qz = Fz / Aff
Where:
A = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange area
ff
User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design requirements:
The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all the conditions
calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO. If for any condition value
exceeds RATIO, program gives the message that the section fails.
Conditions:
i. Axial tensile stress ratio = FT / ft
ii. Axial compressive stress ratio = FC / fc
iii. Combined compression & bending ratio = FC / fc+Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy/fbcy
iv. Combined compression & bending ratio = (Fbtz+Fbty-FC) / ft
v. Combined tension & bending ratio = (FT+Fbtz+Fbty) / ft
vi. Combined tension & bending ratio = Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy/fbcy- FT/ft
vii. Shear stress ratio for qy = qy / fs
viii. Shear stress ratio for qz = qz / fs
ix. von Mises stress ratio (if the von Mises stresses were set to be checked)= fm/(kft)
Note: All other member capacities (axial tension, axial compression, and shear) are calculated as
for AIJ 2002. See "Member Capacities" on page 590
Default Value
Description
Parameter
Name
BEAM
Default Value
Description
0.0
CAN
CB
DFF
None
(Mandatory
for
deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
100 cm
DMIN
0.0 cm
Parameter
Name
FYLD
Default Value
235 MPA
Description
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
0.0
MBG
MISES
NSF
1.0
PLB
RATIO
1.0
Parameter
Name
SSY
Default Value
0.0
Description
SSZ
0.0
TMAIN
400
TMP
0 = Permanent Loading
1 = Temporary Loading
TRACK
0.0
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member
Length
12B.3.1 Notes
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The first
method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local displacement. See
Section 5.44 of the Technical Reference Manual for details on local displacement.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection. Let
(DX1, DY1,DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node defined by
DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2, DZ2)
represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the member.
Compute Delta =
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 and DJ2 or, between start node and end node, as
the case may be.
Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta
Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff
b. If CAN = 0, the "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of
local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection
Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the
"Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the
reference line from which local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and
three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be equal to the total
length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this
situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and
local deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for steel
design.
Note: As with other design checks, the unity check value can be modified by use of the RATIO
parameter.
The von Misers stresses are evaluated and checked as follows:
2
x + 3 xy
f
< 1.0
Where:
Longitudinal stress in beam element:
x =
Fx
Ax
My
Zy
Mz
Zz
F = Axial force
x
A = Cross-sectional area,
x
xy =
Mx
Zx
Fy 2
Ay
Fz 2
Az
I = Torsional constant
x
In the STRESSES output category, stress value of (numerator of the von Mises stress equation) is
output as the value of fm. Along with slenderness ratios, stresses, and deflections, von Mises stress
equation is checked. When its left-hand side yields the maximum ratio value, it is printed as
RATIO and VON MISES is printed as CRITICAL COND.
Problem
A cantilever beam of length 0.3 meters is subjected to a permanent joint load of 3 kN in the Y
direction and 2 kN in the Z direction as well as a 0.008 kNm torque applied at the end. Axial
tension of 10 kN is also applied to the member. An H100x50x5 section is used from the Japanese
steel tables.
Given
Section properties
D = 100 mm, B = 50 mm, t = 7 mm, t = 5 mm
f
I = 15,000
x
mm 4
Z = I /t
x
x max
The maximum of the left hand side of the von Mises stress equation apparently occurs at the fixed
end of the beam. Section forces at the fixed end are as follows:
-10.0 kN (Tension)
0.6 kNm (Bending-Y)
0.9 kNm (Bending-Z)
-3.0 kN (Shear-Y)
-2.0 kN (Shear-Z)
-0.008 kNm (Torsion
Material
FYLD = 300 MPa
E = 2.05E+05 MPa
G = E/2.6 MPa
Solution
From these section forces, and
x
Fx
x =
Ax
My
Zy
Mz
Zz
xy
10, 000
1, 185
600, 000
5, 920
900, 000
37, 400
N/mm2
xy =
Mx
Zx
Fy 2
Ay
Fz 2
Az
8, 000
2, 143
3, 000 2
500
2, 000 2
467
N/mm2
From and , f
is calculated:
xy m
fm =
x2 + 3xy2 =
Since ft = FYLD/1.5 = 300.0 MPa/15 = 200.0 N/mm2 and k = 1 for permanent loading,
Ratio = 135.22/(200.0 1) = 0.676 < 1, So OK.
Comparison
Table 12B.2-Comparison of results for a AIJ 2005 verification problem
Hand
Calculation
STAAD.Pro
Result
Comments
135.22
135.2
None
1 TABLE ST H100X50X5
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 1 LC1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10 FY 3 FZ 2 MX 0.008
PERFORM ANALYSIS
LOAD LIST 1
PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 1
PARAMETER 1
CODE JAPANESE 2005
TMP 0 ALL
UNL 0.002 ALL
MISES 1 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2.0 output portion is as follows:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (
AIJ 2005)
********************************************
v1.1
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN CM UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
===|===
------------ |
|MEMBER
1 * | JAPANESE SECTIONS
|
|
AX = 11.85 |
|
* | ST H100X50X5
|
|
--Z AY =
5.00 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
|
AZ =
4.67 |
| AIJ-2005 * ===============================
===|===
ZY =
5.92 |
|
*
ZZ = 37.40 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (ME=
0.30 --->|
iY =
1.12 |
|*************
iZ =
3.97 |
|
ZX =
2.14 |
|
0.90(KN-MET)
|
|PARAMETER
|L1
STRESSES
|
|IN
N
MM
|
L1
IN
N
MM|
|--------------- +
L1
-------------|
| KL/R-Y=
26.8 |
L1
FA = 189.5 |
| KL/R-Z=
7.6 +
fa =
8.4 |
| UNL
=
2.5 |
L1
FCZ = 200.0 |
| CB
=
1.75 +
FTZ = 200.0 |
| PLB
=
0.60 |
L1
FCY = 200.0 |
|
+
L1
FTY = 200.0 |
| FYLD = 300.0 |
L0 fbz =
24.1 |
| NSF
=
1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---|
fby = 101.4 |
| DFF
=
0.0 -0.05
FV = 115.5 |
| dff
=
0.0
ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE
fv =
6.0 |
|
(WITH LOAD NO.)
FT = 200.0 |
|
fm = 135.2 |
|
MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KN-MET)
Sx = 133.9 |
|
------------------------Tou =
11.1 |
|
|
|
AXIAL
SHEAR-Y
SHEAR-Z
MOMENT-Y
MOMENT-Z
|
|
|
|
VALUE
-10.00
3.00
2.00
0.60
0.90
|
|
LOCATION
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
|
|
LOADING
1
1
1
1
1
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY (KN-MET)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
VON MISES
0.676
1
|
|
10.00 T
0.60
-0.90
0.000
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
12C.1 General
12C.1 General
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and
allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. Two
major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations.
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable stresses or
capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. The
code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness requirements and the stability
criteria. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel design:
l
Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
12C.3 MemberPropertySpecifications
For specification of member properties of standard Japanese steel shapes, the steel section library
available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign
properties from the built-in steel table. Members properties may also be specified using the User
Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical
Reference Manual.
properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear
deformation is always considered for these members during the analysis. An example of member
property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section.
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained
using the tools of the graphical user interface.
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.
12C.4.1 I shapes
I shapes are specified in the following way:
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be
excluded.
1 TO 9 TA ST I300X150X11
12 TO 15 TA ST I350X150X9
12C.4.2 H shapes
H shapes are specified as follows:
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be
excluded.
1 TO 8 TA ST H200X100X4
13 TO 17 TA ST H350X350X12
12C.4.3 T shapes
T shapes are specified as follows:
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be
excluded.
20 TO 25 TA ST T250X19
12C.4.4 Channels
Channel sections are specified as follows.
25 TO 34 TA ST C125X65X6
46 TO 49 TA ST C200X90X8
In the above commands, members 17 to 27 are a back-to-back double channels C300X90X10 with no
spacing in between. Members 45 to 76 are a double channels C250X90X11 with a spacing of 2 length
units. Members 28 to 30 are front-to-front double channels C200X90X8 with a spacing of 2.5 length
units.
12C.4.6 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle specification is as
follows.
The letter L (signifying that the section is an angle) is followed by the length of the legs and then
the thickness of the leg, all in millimeters. The word ST signifies that the section is a standard
angle meaning that the major principal axis coincides with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 1
of Section 1.5.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
1 4 TA ST L150X90X9
If the minor principal axis coincides with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 2 of the User's
Manual, the word RA (Reverse Angle) should be used instead of ST as shown below.
7 TO 23 TA RA L90X75X9
The first example indicates a short legs back-to-back double angle comprised of 100X65X7 angles
separated by 2 length units. The latter is a long legs back-to-back double angle comprised of
300X90X11 angles separated by 3 length units.
12C.4.8 Tubes
Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units and a wall thickness of 0.5
length units. Only code checking, no member selection can be performed on TUBE sections.
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 267.0 mm and a thickness of 7.0 mm. Only code checking,
no member selection, can be performed on PIPE sections.
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 660.4 mm and a thickness of 16.0 mm. Only code
checking, no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
specifies a tube with a depth of 200 mm, a width of 100 mm, and a thickness of 12 mm. Only code
checking, no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
specifies a square tube with a width of 200 mm and a thickness of 12 mm. Only code checking, no
member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
Sample Input file containing Japanese shapes
STAAD SPACE
UNIT KIP FEET
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 12 11 0 0
MEMB INCIDENCE
1 1 2 11
UNIT INCH
MEMBER PROPERTY JAPANESE
* H-SHAPE
1 TA ST H200X100X4
* I SHAPE
2 TA ST I250X125X10
* T SHAPE
3 TA ST T200X19
* CHANNEL
4 TA ST C125X65X6
* DOUBLE CHANNEL
5 TA D C200X90X8
* REGULAR ANGLE
6 TA ST L100X75X7
* REVERSE ANGLE
7 TA RA L90X75X9
* DOUBLE ANGLE - LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD L125X75X7 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLE - SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
9 TA SD L300X90X11 SP 1.5
* TUBE
10 TA ST TUBE DT 3.0 WT 2.5 TH 0.25
* PIPE
11 TA ST PIPE OD 3.0 ID 2.5
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
12C.5.2 Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as required by AIJ
specifications. The design procedure consist of following three steps.
1. Calculation of sectional properties
The program extract sectional properties like sectional area (A ), Moment of Inertia about Y
axis and Z axis (Iyy, Izz) from in-built Japanese Steel Table and calculates Zz, Zy, iy, iz using
appropriate formula. For calculation of i (radius of gyration needed for bending ), program
calculates moment of inertia (Ii )and sectional area (Ai ) for 1/6th section and then uses
following formula:
i=
Ii / A i
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable for I shape, H shape
and Channel sections.
2. Calculation of actual and allowable stresses
Allowable stresses for structural steel under permanent loading shall be determined on the
basis of the values of F given in the following table.
Table 12C.1-Table: Values of F (N/mm 2)
Steel for
Construction
Structures
Thickne
ss
SN400
SN490
SS400
SNR40
0
SNR49
0
STK40
0
STKN4
00
STKN4
90
STKR4
00
SS49
0
SS54
0
SM40
0
SMA4
00
SSC400
SM490
SM490
Y
SM5
20
SM5
70
SMA49
0
STKR4
90
SWH40
0
STK49
0
t 40
235
325
235
275
375
235
325
355
400
40< t
100
215
295
215
255
215
295*
335
400
2
1 0.4 F
when
fc =
0.227F when >
( )
( )
E
0.6F
3
2
()
cy
,Z
cz
tz
Note: The web is ignored in the calculation of Zz for H-shape, I-shape, and channel
sections when the MGB parameter = 1.
Allowable bending stress for M
(fbcy) = ft
Allowable bending stress for Mz
(fbcz) = {1 - .4 x (lb / i)2 / (C 2 )} ft max
= 900/ (lb x h / Af)
For Temporary case, f
bcz
= 1.5 x (f
bcz
Where:
C = 1.75 - 1.05 (M2 / M1) +0.3 (M2 / M1)2
Allowable bending stress for M , f
=f
=f
y bty
z btz
t
bcz
ww
qz = Qz / Aff
Where:
A = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange area
ff
to member length) etc. The allowable stresses in bending (compressive and tensile) are calculated
as per the criteria of Clause 5.1 (4) of the code.
Default Value
Description
BEAM
0.0
Locations of design:
0. Design only for end moments or
those at locations specified by the
SECTION command.
1. Calculate moments at twelfth
points along the beam, and use the
maximum Mz location for design.
Parameter
Name
CAN
Default Value
Description
CB
DFF
None
(Mandatory for
deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
100 cm
DMIN
0.0 cm
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
LZ
Member
Length
FYLD
235 MPA
MAIN
0.0
MBG
MISES
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
Sidesway:
0. Sidesway in local y-axis.
1. No sidesway
SSZ
0.0
Parameter
Name
TMAIN
Default Value
400
Description
TMP
Loading condition:
0. Permanent Loading
1. Temporary Loading
TRACK
0.0
UNL
Member
Length
UNF
1.0
YNG
12C.7.1 Notes
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The first
method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local displacement. See
Section 5.44 of the Technical Reference Manual for details on local displacement.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection. Let
(DX1, DY1,DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node defined by
DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2, DZ2)
represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the member.
Compute Delta =
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 and DJ2 or, between start node and end node, as
the case may be.
Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta
Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff
b. If CAN = 0, the "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of
local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection
Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the
"Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the
reference line from which local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and
three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be equal to the total
length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this
situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and local
deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for steel
design.
BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on the forces at the start and end joints
of the member. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition,
the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of
the governing forces and moments are also printed.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking.
Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code
Checking command.
Note: As with other design checks, the unity check value can be modified by use of the RATIO
parameter.
The von Misers stresses are evaluated and checked as follows:
2
x + 3 xy
f
< 1.0
Where:
Longitudinal stress in beam element:
x =
Fx
Ax
My
Zy
Mz
Zz
F = Axial force
x
A = Cross-sectional area,
x
xy =
Mx
Zx
Fy 2
Ay
Fz 2
Az
I = Torsional constant
x
In the STRESSES output category, stress value of (numerator of the von Mises stress equation) is
output as the value of fm. Along with slenderness ratios, stresses, and deflections, von Mises stress
equation is checked. When its left-hand side yields the maximum ratio value, it is printed as
RATIO and VON MISES is printed as CRITICAL COND.
13
Mexican Codes
13 Mexican Codes
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (40 cm depth and 20 cm width) and
the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular
with 20 cm diameter. Note that no area (AX) is provided for these members. For concrete design,
this property must not be provided. If shear areas and moments of inertias are not provided, the
program calculates these values from YD and ZD. Notice that in the above example the IZ and IY
values provided are actually 50% of the values calculated using YD and ZD. This is a conventional
practice which takes into consideration revised section parameters due to cracking of section.
Note that the third and the fourth set of members in the above example represent a T-shape and a
TRAPEZOIDAL shape respectively. Depending on the properties (YD, ZD, YB, ZB, etc.) provided, the
program will determine whether the section is rectangular, trapezoidal or T-shaped and the BEAM
design will be done accordingly.
Default Value
CODE
Parameters
Parameter
Name
BTP
Default Value
Parameters
CCL
CFB
FALSE
CLB
3 cm
CLS
3 cm
CLT
3 cm
DAG
2 cm
DCP
TRUE
DEPTH
DIM
YD
TRUE
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Parameters
TRUE
DSD
EFACE
EXP
FALSE
200 Kg/cm 2
FC
FYMAIN
4,200 Kg/cm 2
FYSEC
4,200 Kg/cm 2
LSS
LTC
FALSE
MAXMAIN
12
MINMAIN
2.5
MINSEC
2.5
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Parameters
MMY
1.0
MMZ
1.0
MOE
198,000
Kg/cm 2
NSECTION
12
PHI
90 degrees
PSS
TRUE
REINF
SFACE
TEQ
FALSE
FALSE - No
TRUE - Yes
Parameter
Name
Default Value
TRACK
Parameters
Beam Design
0. Critical Moment will not be printed
out with beam design report.
1. Will mean a print out.
2. Will print out required steel areas for
all intermediate sections specified by
NSECTION.
Column Design
0. Will print out detailed design results.
1. Will mean a print out column
interation analysis results in addition
to TRACK 0 output.
2. will print out a schematic interaction
diagram and intermediate interaction
values in addition to all of the above.
WIDTH
ZD
* These values must be provided in the current unit system being used.
Note: When using metric bars for design, provide values for these parameters in actual mm
units instead of the barnumber. The following metric bar sizes are available: 4.2mm, 6 mm, 8
mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm and 60 mm.
Effective depth is chosen as Total depth - (Clear cover + diameter of stirrup + half the dia. of main
reinforcement), and a trial value is obtained by adopting proper bar sizes for the stirrups and main
reinforcements. The relevant clauses in Sections 1.5, 1.6, 2.1.1-2-5, 3.10 and 5.2.2 of NTC Concrete are
utilized to obtain the actual amount of steel required as well as the maximum allowable and
minimum required steel. These values are reported as ROW, ROWMX and ROWMN in the output
and can be printed using the parameter TRACK 1.0 (see Table 13A.1). In addition, the maximum,
minimum and actual bar spacing are also printed.
It is important to note that beams are designed for flexural moment MZ only. The moment MY is
not considered in the flexural design.
13A.5.4 Output
Level
Serial number of bar level which may contain one or more bar group
Height
Height of bar level from the bottom of the beam
Bar Info
Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and bar size
From
Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcement bar
To
Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcement bar
Anchor (STA/END)
States whether anchorage, either hook or continuation, is needed at the start (STA) or at
the end (END).
Row
Actually required flexural reinforcement (As/bd) where b = width of cross section (ZD for
a rectangular or square section) and d = effective depth of cross section (YD minus the
distance from extreme tension fiber to the centroid of main reinforcement).
ROWMN
Minimum required flexural reinforcement (Amin/bd)
ROWMX
Maximum required flexural reinforcement (Amax/bd)
Spacing
Distance between centers of adjacent bars of main reinforcement
Vu
Factored shear force at section
Vc
Nominal shear strength provided by concrete
Vs
Nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement
Tu
Factored torsional moment at section
Tc
Nominal torsional moment strength provided by concrete
Ts
Nominal torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement
NO.
PER CODE NTC FOR THE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES,DDF
LEN -
6000.00(mm)
FY -
412.
FC -
20.
SIZE -
253.75 X
253.75(mm)
LEVEL
HEIGHT
BAR INFO
FROM
TO
ANCHOR
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
STA END
_____________________________________________________________________
1
2
42.
212.
B E A M
5 - 2.MM
5 - 2.MM
N O.
2468.
0.
2 D E S I G N
6000.
2782.
NO
YES
YES
NO
R E S U L T S - SHEAR
(Mny/Mycap ) +(Mnz/Mzcap )
Where = 1.24. If the column is subjected to uniaxial moment: = 1
6. If the Interaction equation is satisfied, find an arrangement with available bar sizes, find the
uniaxial capacities and solve the interaction equation again. If the equation is satisfied now,
the reinforcement details are written tothe output file.
7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied, the assumed reinforcement is increased (ensuring
that it is under 6% or 4% respectively)and steps 2 to 6 are repeated.
By the moment to check shear and torsion for columns the sections have to be checked as beams
and the most strict of both shear and torsion reinforcement adopted.
Des. Pn = Pu/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Pu is the axial load for the
critical load case.
Des.Mnx = Mux*MMAGx/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Mu is the
bending moment for the appropriate axis for the critical load case.
Mu = (Mux.Mmagx)+ (Muy.Mmagy)
COLUMN
FY - 411.9
NO.
FC -
19.6 MPa
SQRE SIZE
30.0 x
END
0.700
TRACK 2 generates the interaction diagram output in addition to all the above:
|
P0 |*
| *
Pn,max|__*
|
*
Pn
|
*
NOMINAL|
*
AXIAL|
*
COMPRESSION|
*
Pb|-------*Mb
|
*
___________|____*_______
| * M0
Mn,
| *
BENDING
P-tens|*
MOMENT
|
Pn
1668.66
1529.60
1390.55
1251.49
1112.44
973.38
Pn
1668.66
1529.60
1390.55
1251.49
1112.44
973.38
Mn
Pn
12.60
29.22
43.18
54.53
63.31
70.55
Mn
Mn
834.33
695.27
556.22
417.16
278.11
139.05
Pn
12.60
29.22
43.18
54.53
63.31
70.55
(@ Z )
76.51
81.63
86.29
87.72
83.38
76.67
Mn
834.33
695.27
556.22
417.16
278.11
139.05
(@ Y )
76.51
81.63
86.29
87.72
83.38
76.67
Element design will be performed only for the moments MX and MY at the center of the element.
Design will not be performed for FX, FY, FXY, MXY. Also, design is not performed at any other
point on the surface of the element. Shear is checked with Q.
A typical example of element design output is shown below. The reinforcement required to resist
Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My
moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLB, CLS, CLT, DIM, and
EXP listed in Table 11A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned are not used in
slab design.
Figure 13A.2 - Element moments: Longitudinal (L) and Transverse (T)
LONG. REINF
(SQ.MM/MM)
MOM-X /LOAD
(KN-MM/MM)
TRANS. REINF
(SQ.MM/MM)
MOM-Y /LOAD
(KN-MM/MM)
0
1
13B.1 General
13B.1 General
The design philosophy considered is that of the Load Cases and Resistance Method or Limit States
Design usually known as Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD).
Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they
would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized-ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength
and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are
used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading
conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards for steel structures, members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, and stability.
It allows to check deformation to verify serviceability.
Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as
augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or
other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that main code
requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the Mexican specifications as implemented in
STAAD steel design. A brief description of the fundamental concepts is presented here.
On the left side of the inequality, the required strength is the summation of the various load
effects, Q , multiplied by their respective load factors, Y . The design strength, on the right side, is
i
i
the nominal strength or resistance, R , multiplied by a resistance factor, FR.
n
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards, it is assumed that the user will use
appropriate load factors and create the load combinations necessary for analysis. The design portion
of the program will take into consideration the load effects (forces and moments) obtained from
analysis. In calculation of resistances of various elements (beams, columns etc.), resistance (nominal
strength) and applicable resistance factor will be automatically considered.
Table
13B.1), that always refers to the gross section. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given
member based on these two limit states and proceeds with member selection or code check
accordingly.
In addition to the tension resistance criterion, the user defines if tension members are required to
satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of use of the member (main load
resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both the member selection and code checking
process, STAAD immediately does a slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing
with other procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member.
Note: The local X axis goes into the page; the Global Y axis is vertical upwards; the shaded area
indicates area under compression; the area not shaded indicates area under tension.
Stress areas due to bending about Z axis (MZ)
It is considered that the frames are part of structures that have shear walls or rigid elements so that
the lateral displacements of a floor could be disregarded. The program has included formulas to
include structures with lateral displacements in the future considering for B2 the columns
individually and not the complete floor analysis.
It is taken into account if the elements have transverse loads and if the ends are angularly
restrained.
Default Value
Description
BEAM
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
CB
CMB
DFF
DJ1
None
(Mandatory for
deflection check,
TRACK 4.0)
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
114 cm
DMIN
0.0 cm
DSD
FU
4,230 Kg/cm 2
FYLD
2,530 kg/cm 2
Parameter
Name
IMM
Default Value
Description
INO
IRR
KX
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LDR
LX
Member length
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
LY
Member length
LZ
Member length
NSF
RATIO
1.0
STIFF
Longer of Member
length or depth
TRACK
UNB
Member length
UNT
Member length
1. For deflection check, parameters DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 from Table 2B.1 may be used. All
requirements remain the same.
2. Top and Bottom represent the positive and negative side of the local Y axis (local Z axis
ifSET Z UP is used).
14
Norwegian Codes
14 Norwegian Codes
stability check including local plate buckling of un-stiffened pipe walls according to NPD
channel
user table (wide flange, I-sections, tapered I, tube, channel and RA angle)
The code check is not available for the following cross-section types:
l
Double angles
Tapered tubes
NS 3472 and NPD code checking covered in this document are available through two
separate STAAD.Pro Code check packages.
This document is not a lecture in use of NS 3472 or NPD. This document explains how, and
which parts of, the Norwegian steel codes that have been implemented in STAAD.Pro.
When L-sections are used, the Code Check requires RA angle definition.
The prismatic section defined in the code check (rectangular massive box) is not identical to
the general prismatic profile defined in the STAAD.Pro analysis package.
EDR does not accept any liability for loss or damage from or in consequence for use of the program.
14A.1.1 Nomenclature
NS - refers to NS 3472 ref. [1]
NS2 - refers to NS 3472 ref. [6]
NPD - refers to NPD94 ref. [5]
14A.1.2 References
1. NS 3472 3.utg. 2001
Prosjektering av stlkonstruksjoner
Beregning og dimensjonering
2. STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual, Release 2002
3. NS 3472 1.utg. 1973
Prosjektering av stlkonstruksjoner
Beregning og dimensjonering
4. Roark &Young`s 5th edition
5. NPD utg. 1994
Veiledning om utforming, beregning og dimensjonering av stlkonstruksjoner. Sist
endret 1. oktober 1993.
6. NS 3472 2.utg.1984
Prosjektering av stlkonstruksjoner
Beregning og dimensjonering
specific details about the treatment of pipes. Section 3.4 explains how this is adopted when NS is
selected for code checking.
The NPD however have a more thorough check of pipe members, and consider the effect of local
buckling of the pipe wall in conjunction with the stability check. In addition, the NPD code gives
joint capacity formulae for brace to chord connections for pipe members.
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and
ultimate limit state design. Two major failure modes are recognized:
l
failure by overstressing
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the characteristic stresses or capacities
and the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. It is generally
assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements like the provision of stiffeners
and check the local effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc.
The user is allowed complete control over the design process through the use of the parameters
listed in Table 2.1. Default values of parameters will yield reasonable results in most circumstances.
However, the user should control the design and verify results through the use of the design
parameters.
sidesway and transverse loading can be specified through the use of parameters SSY and SSZ. For
members that cannot sway, without transverse loading, coefficients b are calculated and proper
dimensioning moments are used in the interaction formulae.
(x + by + bz )2 + 3(x + y + z )2
fy
m
NS 3472
The material factor default value is 1.10. Other values may be input with the MF parameter. The
nominal stresses should satisfy
j
fy
m
= fd
NPD
The general requirement is according to NPD 3.1.1. For stability the NPD 3.1.1 and 3.1.3 requires that
the structural coefficient is considered.
S d fkd =
fk
m mk(S d )
Where:
S = reference stress or load effect resultant
d
f = characteristic capacity
k
kd
= design capacity
= material coefficient
mk
= structural coefficient
shall be equal to 1.0 for frames. For pipe members is a function of the reduced slenderness.
mk
mk
In the STAAD.Pro implemented NPD code this is calculated automatically.
Default
Value
Description
none
Reference
0.0
Sec. NS
12.2.2
1.0
BZ
1.0
CB
1.0
Sec. NS2
A5.5.2 Fig.
NS2
A5.5.2a)-e)
Valid for
the NPD
code only
Sec. NS
12.3.4 Fig.
NS 6.
vi
CMY
1.0
CMZ
0.49
Fig. NS 3
Sec. NS
12.3
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
CY
Default
see NS
3472
CZ
DMAX
100.0
[cm]
DMIN
0.0 [cm]
FYLD
235
MF
Reference
Fig. NS 3
Sec. NS
12.2 NS
Table 11
1.1
Material factor / Resistance factor,
m
(NS3472)
1.15
(NPD)
Sec. NS
10.4.2 Sec.
NPD 3.1
RATIO
1.0
Sec. NS
12.3.4.2
SSY
0.0
Sec. NS
12.3.4 Tab.
NS 12 Sec.
NPD
3.2.1.4
Sec. NS
12.3.4 Tab.
NS 12 Sec
NPD
3.2.1.4
SSZ
0.0
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default
Value
0.0
Description
Reference
UNL
Member
length
Sec. NS
12.3
The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure in pipe members.
The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters.
The parameter CB defines the value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral buckling
moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.
14A.3.1 Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to the Norwegian
steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
* Code check according to NS3472
PARAMETERS
CODE NS3472
BEAM 1.0 ALL
FYLD 340 ALL
MF 1.10 ALL
CY 0.49 MEMB 1
CZ 0.49 MEMB 1
BY 0.9 MEMB 1
BZ 0.7 MEMB 1
SSY 1.1 MEMB 1
SSZ 1.3 MEMB 1
CB 0.9 MEMB 1
RATIO 1.0 ALL
TRACK 9.0 ALL
UNIT KNS METER
LOAD LIST 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
FINISH
14A.4.1 Buckling
nmax + kz mz + ky my 1
+ kLT
mz
+ k ymy 1
LT
Where:
i = z,y
nmax = n/min
n = Nf/Nd
min = min(z,y)
i = Nkd,i/Nd
ki = 1 i
n
i m
1.5
i = i(2Mi - 4) 0.9
Mi
ref. NS Tab. 12
kLT = 1 LT
n
y m
1.0
LT = 0.15(yM - 1) 0.9
i = i/1
i = Lki/ii
i =
i =
fy
1
2
= 0.5[1 + ( - 0.2) +2 ]
ref. NS Tab 10 & 11
LT =
1
2
LT +
LT LT
2
LT = 0.5 1 + LT 0.4 + LT
LT =
M cr
Mcr = Mvio
ref. NS2 A5.5.2 Sect. a - d
M vio =
EI zGIT 1 +
2 EC w
2
L GI T
= 1.8 - 0.7
= 1.3
= 1.4
M0
M0
( )
LT
Moment diagram
M = M , +
M0
M
( )
M,0
LT
M ,
The user can override the calculated factor with the following parameters:
y=SSY
z=SSZ
I Ix 1 +
2 2.6C w
2
Ix
L
concern double symmetric cross sections where y is given in NS fig. A5.5.2, (input parameter CB), L
= member length for lateral buckling (input parameter UNL), Cw and Ix , see section 5.
For single symmetric cross sections, the ideal lateral buckling moment is
M vix =
2EI y
L
5a
rx
3
ys
5a
+ C2 2 +
rx
3
ys
Where:
C2 =
C w + 0.039L 2I T
Iy
= distance from profile CoG to point where the load is acting, assumed to be on top
flange.
The parameter (ref NS fig. A5.5.2.g) is controlled by the input parameter CB.
Figure 14A.4 - -coefficients for the cantilevered beam with single loads and distributed loads. Dashed curves apply
load on the surface.
IR =
N
N kd
+
Md
Mz
(1
N
N Ezd
My
+
1.0
N
M d 1 N Eyd
Where:
N
N kd
N
N
= max
,
N kzd N kyd
vd
IR =
N kd
My
N
M yd 1
N Eyd
Mz
M zd 1
N
N Ezd
1.0
Where:
N
N kd
kyd
N
N
= max
,
N
N
kzd
kyd
and N
kzd
are found from NS 3472 fig. 5.4.la C-curve for y- and z-axis, respectively.
For (2)
eff = 0.60 +0.57
For > (2)
eff =
Where:
=
fy
k = lk/i
i=
I/ A
Possible lateral buckling effects and torsional buckling (NS A5.4.5) is not included in the code
check. This has to be evaluated by the user separately.
fy
m
Where:
= N/A = axial compressive stress
c
mk
= structural coefficient
= c / fE
fE =
2E 2
l k2
i = I/ A
fy
b* = c 11
fk
fk
mfE
l = kl
k
0.5
E
fy
0.1
E
fy
fy
1+
Where:
j =
f y ao
fea
b0
feb
p0
fep
fe
(a + b ) 2 a + b p + p2 + 3 2
0 when
a
a0 = 0
< 0 when
a
a0 = - a
0 when
b
b0 = 0
< 0 when
b
b0 = - b
0 when
p
p0 = 0
< 0 when
p
p0 = p
= design axial stress in the shell due to axial forces (tension positive)
a
= design bending stress in the shell due to global bending moment (tension
b
positive)
= = design circumferential stress in the shell due to external pressure (tension
p
positive)
= design shear stress in the shell due to torsional moments and shear force.
S
fe = k
t 2
12(1 ) l
E
()
where k is a buckling coefficient dependent on loading condition, aspect ratio, curvature, boundary
conditions, and geometrical imperfections. The buckling coefficient is:
k = 1+
( )
p
The values of , , and p are given in Table 4.1 for the most important loading cases.
Table 14A.3-Table 4.1 Buckling coefficients for un-stiffened cylindrical shells
0.702 Z
5.34
0.856 Z0.75
Lateral pressure
1.04 Z0.5
Hyrdostatic pressure
1.04 Z0.5
0.5 1 +
r
150t
0.5
0.6
12
1 2
rt
For long shells the elastic buckling resistance against shear stresses is independent of shell length.
For cases with:
1
r
> 3.85
r
t
t 2
r
()
j < fkd
where the design buckling resistance is
fkd =
fk
m mk
fy
= Ba 1 1
fk
fk
fe
+ B 1 b
Where:
B=
=
fe =
1
1
f y / fe
2E
For all profiles other than angle sections absolute values of the stresses are used. For
double symmetric profiles there will always be one stress point.
The stresses are calculated in several stress points at each member section. At each stress
2o + p2 o p + 3 (x + y + z )
j =
fy
m
Where:
tot = | x + by + bz |
stress from hydrostatic pressure.
p
Section Properties
A , I , I , and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database
x
Az = (2/3) b t 2
y = Fy/Ay
z = Fz/Az
A and A are not used in the code check
y
2 3
Cw =
(h t ) b t
24
ref. NS app. C3
Ty = dA z
Tz = dA y
Stress calculation
General stresses are calculated as:
= x + by + bz =
= x + y + z =
Mx
Ix
Fx
Ax
c+
My
Iy
V yT z
Iz
z+
Mz
Iz
VzT y
Iy
Where the component stresses are calculated as shown in the following table:
Table 14A.4-Stress calculations at selected stress points for a wide flange section
Point No
by
Mz b
Mx
Iz 2
Ix
bz
F y bth
2
I z 2t
Fz tb 2
My b
Iy 2
0
Fx
Ax
Mz
Iz
F y bth
2
h1
Mx
Ix
I y 8t
Iz
F y bth 2 + 0.5h 1 s
Iz
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The reported torsional
stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional stresses a separate evaluation has to
be carried out. Actual torsional stress distribution is largely dependent on surface curvature at
stress point and warping resistance.
Figure 14A.6 - Stress points checked for a singly symmetric wide flange section
Section properties
A , I , I , and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database, except for tapered sections
x x y
z
where these values are calculated for each section checked. (i.e., Iz, Iy values are taken
from the middle of the member.)
A z = 2 / 3(b t + b 1 t 1 )
3
Cw =
b t b 1 t 1(h t / 2 t 1 / 2)
12 b
3
t + b 1t 1
ref. NS app. C3
See "Double symmetric wide flange profile" on page 649 for equations used in section property
calculations.
Stress calculation
See "Double symmetric wide flange profile" on page 649 for equations used in general stress
calculations.
Where the component stresses are calculated as shown in the following table:
by
bz
F y bt (h + t / 2)
1
Fz tb
I y 8t
My b
Iy 2
Mz
Iz
h2
Mx
Ix
Iz
2t
My b
Iy 2
0
Mz
Iz
Iz
Mx
Ax
F y bt (h + t / 2)
1
h1
Fx
Mz
Iz
Ix
h3
Iy 2
My b
1
Iy 2
Mz
Iz
h4
Mx
Ix
F y bt h 1 + t / 2 + 0.5h 1 s
Iz
My b
1
F y b t (h + t / 2)
1 1 3
1
Iz
s
F y b t (h + t / 2)
1 1 3
1
Iz
2t 1
I y 8t 1
Fz t 1b 2
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The reported torsional
stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional stresses a separate evaluation has to
be carried out. Actual torsional stress distribution is largely dependent on surface curvature at
stress point and warping resistance.
Section properties
d = D - 2t
r = 0.5 (D-t )
a = tan-1 M /M
Ax = /4
z
(D2
- d 2)
A = A = 0.5A
y
I = 2I =/32 (D4 - d 4)
x
I = I = /64 (D4 - d 4)
y
Note: In the STAAD.Pro analysis package slightly different values are used for A ,
y
A and I , however this has insignificant influence on the force distribution.
z
A = A = 0.6A
Y
I =
2R3t
Section Properties
Section forces
The section forces from the STAAD.Pro analysis are about the principle axis y and z.
The second moment of area (Ty L TZ):
T =AZ
y
T =AY
z
M = F Y4
T
Note: Note that b may not be much greater than h. If that is the case, define the member with
h > b and Beta angle 90 instead.
Section Properties
ref. [4] tab. 20, case 4 at midpoint the largest side i.e., point 2
moments will be transformed into the plane defined by the joint itself and the far end joints of the
brace and chord, defined as in- and out-of plane moments.
The ASCII file should be edited to reflect the correct classification of the joints, gap, can or stub
dimensions, yield stress and other geometric options if required. The program will not change the
brace or chord definition if this is changed or modified in the input file GEOM1. See Appendix A
page xx for GEOM1 example file.
Joint classification parameters in the file GEOM1 are:
KO K joint overlapped
KG K joint with gap
TY T or Y joint
X X joint
Input example for the classification run.
*CLASSIFICATION OF JOINTS, TRACK 99
UNITS MM NEWTON
PARAMETER
CODE NPD GEOM1
FYLD 350 ALL
TRACK 99 ALL
BEAM 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
This section gives design formulae for simple tubular joints without overlap and without gussets,
diaphragms or stiffeners. Tubular joints in a space frame structure shall satisfy:
N Nk / m
Where:
N k = Q uQ f
fyT
sin
Q is given in Table 6.1 and Q is a factor to account for the nominal longitudinal stress in the
u
f
chord.
Qf = 1.0 - 0.03A2
A2 =
2
2
2
ax
+ IP
+ OP
0.64f 2y
In-plane
bending
Out-of-plane
bending
T and Y
2.5 +19
5.0()
3.2/(1-0.81)
(2.7 +13)
Q
0.90(2+21)
Q
When 0.9, Q is set to 1.0. This is also applicable for moment loading. For cases with tension in
f
the chord, Qf is set to 1.0. This is also applicable for moment loading.
The brace end moments shall be accounted for in the following cases:
a. Out-of-plane bending moment when > 0.85
b. When the brace acts as a cantilever
c. When the rotational stiffness of the connection is considered in the determination of
effective buckling length, and / or the structural coefficient = 1.00 for the beam-column
mk
design of the brace or chord. See Section 3.1.3.
The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to in-plane bending moment shall be determined
by:
df y T
MIPk = Q uQ f
sin
Qf = 1.0 - 0.045A2
The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to out-of-plane bending moment shall be
determined by:
MOPk = Q uQ f
df y T
sin
Qf = 1.0 - 0.021A2
For combined axial and bending loads in the brace, the following interaction equation should be
satisfied:
N
Nk
( )
M IP
M IPk
M OP
M OPk
1
m
For overlapping tubular joints without gussets, diaphragms, or stiffeners, the total load component
normal to the chord, NN, shall not exceed
NN =
2f y t wl 2
N k l1
sin +
m l
3 m
The above formula for the capacity of overlapping joints is valid only for K joints, where
compression in a brace is essentially balanced by tension in brace(s) in the same side of the joint.
Description
99
98
49
Prints member end forces for members entering each joint (at the
end of the member connected to the joint)
31
32
Description
Member number
Unit
kN
Symbol
Description
Unit
FX
kNm
MYs
kNm
MYm
kNm
MYe
kNm
MYb
kNm
RATIO
Interaction ratio
LOAD
TABLE
MZs
kNm
MZm
kNm
MZe
kNm
MZb
kNm
COND
Critical condition
DIST
Note: Myb and Mzb are the design moments used for max unity ratio.
NS3472 (VERSION 06002)
UNITS ARE KN
AND
METE
MEMB
FX
MYs
MYm
MYe
MYb
RATIO LOAD
TABLE
MZs
MZm
MZe
MZb
COND
DIST
===============================================================================
1
12.80 C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 5.08
1
FAIL PIPS40
(AISC SECTIONS)
31.9
-15.9
-36.2
36.2 STAB
10.00
4
24.20 C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 1.30
1
FAIL PIPS40
(AISC SECTIONS)
-0.2
-1.4
-2.9
2.9 STAB
14.14
3
26.31 C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 0.78
1
PIPS40
2
4.02 C
PIPD60
5.02 T
PIPS40
5.1
0.0
36.4
0.0
3.6
(AISC SECTIONS)
1.3
2.5
0.0
0.0
(AISC SECTIONS)
-38.1
-6.8
0.0
0.0
(AISC SECTIONS)
-1.8
1.7
5.1 STAB
0.0 0.58
0.00
1
38.9 STAB
0.0 0.34
5.83
1
2.8 VMIS
0.00
Symbol
Description
Unit
CURVESt
CURVEWk
Beta Z
Beta Y
FYLD
Betamz
about z-axis
Betamy
about y-axis
Fak Z
Fak Y
MYD
kN-m
MZD
kN-m
MVD
kN-m
IR1
IR2
N/mm
2
m
m
FX
MYs
MYm
MYe
MYb
RATIO LOAD
TABLE
MZs
MZm
MZe
MZb
COND
DIST
===============================================================================
1
12.80 C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 5.08
1
FAIL PIPS40
(AISC SECTIONS)
31.9
-15.9
-36.2
36.2 STAB
10.00
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00
Beta Y 1.00
FYLD= 235. N/MM2 |
| Betamz=1.295
Betamy=1.000
FakZ=1.500
FakY=1.500
|
| MYD =.112E+2 KNM MZD =.112E+2 KNM MVD =.112E+2 KNM
|
| IR1
= 5.076 IR2
= 5.076 VON MISES = 3.251
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
2
4.02 C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 0.58
1
PIPD60
(AISC SECTIONS)
36.4
-38.1
-6.8
38.9 STAB
5.83
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00
Beta Y 1.00
FYLD= 235. N/MM2 |
| Betamz=1.377
Betamy=1.000
FakZ=1.021
FakY=1.033
|
| MYD =.701E+2 KNM MZD =.701E+2 KNM MVD =.701E+2 KNM
|
| IR1
= 0.575 IR2
= 0.575 VON MISES = 0.557
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
3
26.31 C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 0.78
1
PIPS40
(AISC SECTIONS)
5.1
1.3
2.5
5.1 STAB
0.00
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00
Beta Y 1.00
FYLD= 235. N/MM2 |
| Betamz=2.152
Betamy=1.000
FakZ=0.602
FakY=1.500
|
| MYD =.112E+2 KNM MZD =.112E+2 KNM MVD =.112E+2 KNM
|
| IR1
= 0.784 IR2
= 0.784 VON MISES = 0.510
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
4
24.20 C
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 1.30
1
FAIL PIPS40
(AISC SECTIONS)
-0.2
-1.4
-2.9
2.9 STAB
14.14
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00
Beta Y 1.00
FYLD= 235. N/MM2 |
| Betamz=1.510
Betamy=1.000
FakZ=1.500
FakY=1.500
|
| MYD =.112E+2 KNM MZD =.112E+2 KNM MVD =.112E+2 KNM
|
| IR1
= 1.304 IR2
= 1.304 VON MISES = 0.310
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Member in compression:
The code check is available for the pipe cross sections only.
The design of conical transitions and joints with joint cans is not performed.
Design of members per NTC 1987 requires the STAAD ECC Super Code SELECTCode Pack.
Sd Rd
The design resistance is evaluated for each condition and this check is applied as described in the
following sections.
If any of these conditions are not met for a member selected for design, a warning will be issued by
the engine and the design of that member is aborted.
Note: N-004 uses Y to define the action effects that is in plane and Z to define out of plane
effects. This is the opposite to what STAAD uses, where Z defines the in plane effects and Y the
out of plane effects. This document will follow the STAAD.Pro convention for the Z and Y axes.
The N-004 code also segregates members into those that are subject to hydrostatic pressure and
those that are not subject to hydrostatic pressure. The program allows you to specify whether a
member is subject to hydrostatic pressure or not and, if so, to specify the hydrostatic pressure for
the element. By default the program will assume that all members are not subject to any
hydrostatic pressure. The design parameter HYD is used to specify the maximum water level with
respect to the origin.
If the HYD parameter is specified, the program will take that to be the water level and will evaluate
the pressure distribution on each element assuming a linear increase in pressure with depth (The
density of water is assumed to be 9.8 KN/m 3). Also, if the HYD parameter is specified, the program
will assume that the hydrostatic loads have not been included in the analysis. For members that are
subject to a combination of loads (i.e., bending plus compression) along with a hydrostatic
pressure, the design will be done according to Clause 6.3.9 of the code. In the absence of any
hydrostatic pressure on the member the design will be performed in accordance with Clause 6.3.8
of the code.
Sd
t,Rd
= Af /
y m
Where:
N
Sd
Axial Compression
Clause 6.3.3 states that tubular members subject to axial compression shall satisfy the following
condition:
N
Sd
c,Rd
= Af /
c m
Where:
N
Sd
The design axial compressive strength for a member that is not subject to any hydrostatic pressure
will be taken as the smaller of in plane or out of plane buckling strengths determined by the
equations given below:
f = [1.0 - 0282]f when 1.34
c
f =
c
0.9/2f
y
= (f /f ) = kl/(i)(f /E)
cl E
cl
Where:
f = Characteristic local buckling strength
cl
y cle
y cle
f =f
cl
cle
when f /f
y cle
y cle
1.911 (Elastic/Plastic)
Where:
f
cle
D = Outside diameter
t = wall thickness
For a member that is subject to pure compression, if f /f > 0.170, the section will be classed as a
y cle
CLASS 4 (slender section). In such cases, the value of the material factor ( ) used in the above
m
checks is increased according to equation 6.22 (Cl. 6.3.7) of the code.
Bending
Clause 6.3.4 states that tubular members subject to pure bending alone shall satisfy:
M
Sd
Rd
= f W/
m
Where:
M
Sd
is calculated as:
m
m
m
Shear
Clause 6.3.5 states that tubular members subject to shear shall satisfy:
V
Sd
Rd
= Af /(23
y
Where:
V
Sd
f = Yield strength
y
m)
When torsional shear stresses are present, the following condition shall also be satisfied:
M
T,Sd
T,Rd
= 2I f /(D3
py
m)
Where:
M
T,Sd
Hydrostatic Pressure
Clause 6.3.6 states that tubular members subject to an external pressure shall primarily be checked
for hoop buckling. The condition to be satisfied is:
p,Sd
h,Rd
= f /
h m)
Where:
= p D/(2t)
p,Sd
Sd
Sd
m)
f = f when f
h
f =
h
> 2.44f
0.7f (f /f )0.4
y he y
f =f
h
he
he
when f
he
when 2.44f f
y
y
he
he
> 0.55f
0.55f
he
= 2C Et/D
h
Where:
C = 0.44t/D when 1.6D/t
h
Where:
M
is the design bending moment about the y axis (out-of plane axis)
is the design bending moment about the z axis (in plane axis)
y,Sd
z,Sd
Sd
Rd
t,Rd
and
Where:
N
Sd
C and C are the reduction factors corresponding to the Y and Z axes respectively.
my
mz
You may specify a value for these using the CMY and CMZ design parameters,
respectively (default is 0.85 for both).
N
ey
and N
ez
are the Euler buckling loads about y & z axes and are given by:
k is the effective length factor and is given in table 6-2 of the code.
N
cl, Rd
The reduction factors used in this clause depend on the structural element type and will be as
given in Table 6-2 of N-004. This requires the member to be classified under any one of the section
types given in the table.
M /M
Sd
Rd
Sd
Rd
Sd
Rd
Sd
Sd
Rd
Rd
If the member is subject to shear forces due to torsion along with bending moments, the condition
to be satisfied is:
M /M
M /M
Sd
Red,Rd
Sd
Red,Rd
Sd
Rd
Sd
Sd
Rd
Rd
Where:
M
Red,Rd
m,Red
T,Sd
= Wf
= f [1 - 3(
m,Red m
/f )2]
T,Sd d
M
/(2R2t)
T,Sd
f = f /
d
y m
a,Sd
q,Sd
Where:
my,Sd
mz,Sd
th,RD
mh,RD
B=
y m
/f
psd
h,Rd
= 5 - 4f /f
h y
a,Sd
<
q,Sd
Where:
f
cl,Rd
= f /
cl m
c,Sd
> 0.5f /
he m
and
f
cle
>0.5f
he
Where:
c,Sd
Where:
ac,Sd
and
Where:
a,Sd
is the design axial stress that excludes the stress from hydrostatic pressure
Additionally, when:
c,Sd
> 0.5f /
he m
and
f
cle
>0.5f
he
ac,Sd
q,Sd
and
ac,Sd
<
q,Sd
c,Sd
> 0.5f /
he m
and
f /
cle m
>0.5f /
he m
Where:
c,Sd
Default
Value
CODE
none
Description
FYLD
235 [MPa]
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
CMY
0.85
Reduction factor C
CMZ
0.85
Reduction factor C
LSR
HYD
m
m
PSD
0.0
Parameter
Name
SGR
Default
Value
0.0
Description
DMAX
100.0 [cm]
DMIN
0.0 [cm]
DFF
MAIN
None
(Mandatory
for
deflection
check)
0.0
TMAIN
180.0
TRACK
0.0
RATIO
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
BEAM
0.0
Description
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint
of member
14B.2.1 Notes
a. C1 and C2 Parameters
The default values of these coefficients are taken from Table 6-4 of N-004 and depend on the
joint and load type:
Table 14B.2-Default values for C1 and C2 parameters
C1
C2
25
11
20
22
20
22
25
30
Joint Type
Note: These values can be changed by setting the K, X, and Y values in the external
geometry file.
14B.2.2 Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to the NORSOK N004 steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
* Check tubular members according NORSOK N-004
CODE NORSOK
HYD 3.0 MEMB 1 TO 3
PSD 10 MEMB 7 10
SGR 2 MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
Prior to completing a joint design, the joint should be classified into one of the three categories
given by the code. Joint classification is the process whereby a BRACE member connecting into a
CHORD member is classified into one of these categories based on the axial force components in
the brace. The classification normally considers all the members at a joint that lie in a plane. N-004
defines three joint classification categories: K, X, or Y (or a combination of these).
Joint
Classification
Description
Note: Typical examples of these joint types are given in Figure 6-3 of the N-004 code. It is worth
noting that the joint class for each brace will be different for each load case.
Note: STAAD.Pro does not perform an automatic classification of the joints. This is left up to the
engineer. All joints will initially be classified as Y in the generation of the external geometry
file. Joints should be re-classified as necessary before performing the final joint capacity checks.
The checks for joint capacity are given in Cl. 6.4.3.2 to 6.4.3.6 and STAAD.Pro performs the checks
as per these clauses. However, the program does not deal with conical joint transitions and joints
with joint cans. The code also specifies checks and limits for the gaps and eccentricity of joints.
This implementation will not perform such geometry checks.
The details of the checks done and the methodology will be discussed in the following sections.
MRd =
fyT 2
Msin
f y T 2d
Msin
Q uQ f
Q uQ f
Where:
N
Rd
Rd
is the angle between the chord and the brace (max = 90 degrees)
Q = Strength factor which varies with the joint type and the action type in the
u
brace. Refer to Table 6-3 and Clause 6.4.3.3 of N-004 for these equations.
Q = 1.0 A2
f
2
2
2
my,Sd
+ mz,Sd
a,Sd
A 2 = C1
+ C2
2
fy
1.62f y
p,Sd
my,Sd
mz,Sd
C1 is the coefficient used for the axial stress term in calculating the joint resistance.
C2 is the coefficient used for the bending stress term in calculating the joint
resistance. The default values of C1 and C2 are as given in Table 6-4 of N-004. The
actual values used are dependent on the values of K, X, and Y specified for the joint
in the external geometry file.
See also Figures 6-3 to 6-6 of N-004 for definition of the various terms for various
joint classes.
M z,Sd
+
+
M
z,Rd
M y,Sd
M y,Rd
Where:
N
N
Sd
Rd
z,Sd
y,Sd
z,Rd
y,Rd
14B.7.2 Example
LOAD LIST 1 2 4
JOINT NODE
K
1
3
0
2
3
0
X
0
0
Y
1
1
CHORD
2
2
CLEN
5.0
5.0
D
0.168
0.168
T
0.10
0.10
BRACE
1
16
BLEN
4.0
6.043
d
0.140
0.075
t
0.010
0.005
GAP
0
0
RESULTS
prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be
an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
CRITICAL COND
the section of the N-004 code which governs the design.
RATIO
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING
the load case number which governed the design.
FX, MY, and MZ
provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis, and the moment in local Z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are the
ones which are of interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design
forces govern.
Note: If the parameter TRACK is set to 2.0, the program will block out part of the table and will
print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ),
allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress (FV).
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
PIP13910.0
(BRITISH SECTIONS)
PASS
Eq. 6.44
0.170
1
0.01 C
1.01
6.39
0.00
=======================================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel
= S 355
Modulus of elasticity
= 204999.98 N/mm2
Design Strength (py)
=355.00 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)
Member Length =
400.00
Gross Area of cross section =
40.70
Moment of inertia
Plastic modulus
Elastic modulus
Radius of gyration
Effective Length
DESIGN PARAMETER (units
Height of water lavel
CMZ :
0.85
CMY
KZ
:
1.00
KY
SECTION CLASSIFICATION
:
:
:
:
:
z-axis
862.000
168.554
123.407
4.602
400.000
y-axis
862.000
168.554
123.407
4.602
400.000
- m)
N004/2004
:
3.000
:
0.85
:
1.00
:
Class 1
1256.4
790.1
52.0
362.7
44.0
none
Description
ACTAGE
BRACE
70 years
0
CLEAR
25 mm
DRYCIR
100%
EFACE
ELY
ELZ
ENVIR
Environment class
1. LA Least aggressive
2. NA Aggressive
3. MA Very aggressive
Parameter Default
Name
Value
Description
FC
35
N/mm 2
FYMAIN
500
N/mm 2
LAGE
7 days
MAX
MAIN
32
MINMAIN
10
MOY
moy factor
MOZ
moz factor
NMAG
nmag factor
REIANG
RELHUM
70%
RFACE
SFACE
STIRANG
90
STIRDIA
10 mm
TORANG
45
Stirrup diameter
Torsion angle, in degrees.
Parameter Default
Name
Value
TRACK
10
Description
15
Russian Codes
15 Russian Codes
15A.1 General
15A.1 General
Russian Code SNiP 2.03.0184* plain concrete and concrete structures is based on the method of
limit states. Code SNiP 2.03.0184* defines two groups of limit states.
Analysis according to the first group of limit states is performed to avoid the following phenomena:
l
fatigue failure,
failure due to the action of load actions and unfavorable environmental effects.
Analysis according to the second group of limit states is performed to avoid the following
phenomena:
l
excessive and long-term opening of cracks if they are allowed according to service
conditions,
excessive displacements.
Analysis of structures for the first group of limit states is performed with the use of the maximum
(design) loads and actions. Analysis of structures for the second group of limit states is made in
accordance with the operational (normative) loads and actions. Ratio between design and
normative loads is called reliability coefficient for loads which is determined according to SNiP
2.01.07.-85 Loads and actions.
Reliability coefficient n for destination according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 shall be considered in
determination of loads and their combinations.
Program STAAD.Pro makes it possible to calculate reinforcement for concrete members according
to codes of many countries round the World and Russian Code SNiP 2.03.01-84* inclusive.
Algorithms for calculation of reinforcement of concrete linear (beams, columns) and 2D (two
dimensional) (slabs, walls, shells) members are incorporated in program STAAD.Pro. Not only Code
SNiP 2.03.01-84* but also the Guide for design of plain concrete and reinforced concrete structures
from normal weight and lightweight concrete (to SNiP 2.03.01-84) have been used in creation of
these algorithms.
It is possible using program STAAD.Pro to calculate reinforcement for beams of rectangular or T
section and for columns of rectangular or circular section (Fig.1).
Flange of T-shape beams may be situated at the top zone of the section if the angle BETA=0, or at
the bottom zone of the section, if BETA=180.
Commands for calculation of reinforcement are located in the input data file after the command of
analysis and as a rule, after output commands to print results of calculation.
Example:
* Command of analysis
PERFORM ANALYSIS
.
.* Output command to print results of calculation (according to users judgment)
.
* Command of loading and their combinations considered in design
LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9
* Command to start reinforcement calculation procedure
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE RUSSIAN
.* List of parameters being used in reinforcement calculation
.
.
In tables 1, 2 and 3 information about parameters used for calculation of reinforcement for beams,
columns and 2D (two dimensional) members is presented. Values of parameters do not depend on
UNIT command. In the file of input data only such parameters have to be taken, the values of
which differ from determined in the program.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is specified
again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 15A.1-Names of parameters for Concrete design according to Russian Code
- 2.03.01-84* for beams.
No. Parameter Default
name
Value
1
NLT
Description
RCL
Description
RCL
1 = A240;
2 = A300;
3 = A400;
4 = A500;
5 = B500;
6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
11 = S240;
12 = S400;
13 = S500;
USM
1.
Description
UB2
0.9
DD1
16.
DD2
16.
BCL
15.
BCL
UBM
15.
1.
Description
10 = B10;
15 = B15
20 = B20;
25 = B25;
30 = B30;
35 = B35;
40 = B40;
45 = B45;
50 = B50;
55 = B55;
60 = B60;
8.10 = C8/10
12.15 = C12/15;
16.20 = C16/20
25.30 = C25/30
30.37 = C30/37
35.45 = C35/45
40.50 = C50/50
45.55 = C45/55
50.60 = C50/60
60.75 = C60/75
70.85 = C70/85
80.95 = C80/95
90.105 = C90/105
TEM
0.
Description
10
CL1
0.05
11
CL2
0.05
12
WST
0.4
13
WLT
0.3
14
SSE
RSH
Description
RSH
Description
1 = A240;
2 = A300;
3 = A400;
4 = A500;
5 = B500;
6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l
11 = S240;
12 = S400;
13 = S500;
16
FWT
ZD
17
FWB
ZB
18
DEP
YD
19
SFA
0.
20
EFA
0.
21
NSE
13
NLT
Description
RCL
Description
1 = A240;
2 = A300;
3 = A400;
4 = A500;
5 = B500;
6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
USM
1.
11 = S240;
12 = S400;
13 = S500;
UB2
0.9
DD1
16.
DD2
16.
BCL
UBM
15.
1.
Description
10 = B10;
15 = B15
20 = B20;
25 = B25;
30 = B30;
35 = B35;
40 = B40;
45 = B45;
50 = B50;
55 = B55;
60 = B60;
8.10 = C8/10
12.15 = C12/15;
16.20 = C16/20
25.30 = C25/30
30.37 = C30/37
35.45 = C35/45
40.50 = C50/50
45.55 = C45/55
50.60 = C50/60
60.75 = C60/75
70.85 = C70/85
80.95 = C80/95
90.105 = C90/105
TEM
0.
Description
10
CL1
0.05
11
ELY
1.
12
ELZ
1.
13
RSH
1.
1 = A240;
2 = A300;
3 = A400;
4 = A500;
5 = B500;
6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l
11 = S240;
12 = S400;
13 = S500;
Parameter Default
Name
Value
NLT
Description
No.
Parameter Default
Name
Value
RCL
Description
1 = A240;
2 = A300;
3 = A400;
4 = A500;
5 = B500;
6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
USM
1.
11 = S240;
12 = S400;
13 = S500;
UB2
0.9
SDX
16.
SDY
16.
No.
Parameter Default
Name
Value
BCL
UBM
15.
1.
Description
10 = B10;
15 = B15
20 = B20;
25 = B25;
30 = B30;
35 = B35;
40 = B40;
45 = B45;
50 = B50;
55 = B55;
60 = B60;
8.10 = C8/10
12.15 = C12/15;
16.20 = C16/20
25.30 = C25/30
30.37 = C30/37
35.45 = C35/45
40.50 = C50/50
45.55 = C45/55
50.60 = C50/60
60.75 = C60/75
70.85 = C70/85
80.95 = C80/95
90.105 = C90/105
TEM
0.
No.
Parameter Default
Name
Value
Description
10
CL
0.05
11
CRA
0.05
12
WST
0.4
13
WLT
0.3
14
STA
15
SELX
0.
16
SELY
0.
15A.3 Beams
No.
Parameter Default
Name
Value
17
MMA
Description
18
MMB
RSH
1.
19
1 = A240;
2 = A300;
3 = A400;
4 = A500;
5 = B500;
6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l
11 = S240;
12 = S400;
13 = S500;
15A.3 Beams
Reinforcement for beams of rectangular and T cross-section can be calculated. In calculation of
longitudinal reinforcement bending moment about local axis
considered, but influence of longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axis
is ignored. In calculation of transverse reinforcement shear forces parallel to local axis
torsional moments are taken into account.
and
Reinforcement for beams can be calculated either from conditions of strength or from conditions of
open crack width limitation (see parameter SSE).
Parameters SFA and FA are considered only in calculation of transverse reinforcement.
15A.3 Beams
In general case calculation of reinforcement for beams is carried out two times according to
strength conditions and according to conditions of open crack width limitation. In reinforcement
calculations from conditions of strength design values of load have to be taken and in calculations
from conditions of crack width limitation characteristic (normative) load values are used. Both
calculations can be carried out in one session with the use multiple analysis possibility of the
program STAAD.Pro.
In most cases calculation of reinforcement is carried out with account only of a part of loadings. In
such cases command LOAD LIST is used, in which numbers of loads considered in calculation are
indicated. Number of permanent and long-term loads equal to parameter NLT must be included
into the list of considered loads.
It has to be noted, that values of parameters DD1 and DD2 have influence not only on the width of
opened crack but also in some cases, on design and normative reinforcement resistances.
Parameter BCL can be equal to any value of concrete compression strength class given in SNiP
2.03.01-84* and to any intermediate value as well.
It should be remembered, that accuracy of results of calculation of transverse reinforcement
increases with the value of parameter NSE.
Parameters SFA and EFA are considered only in calculations of transverse reinforcement. Beam 1 is
shown in Figure 2 with rigid intervals the lengths of which are: at the start of the beam 0.3m and
at the end 0.2m. In modeling of the beam the following command can be used.
MEMBER OFFSET
1 START 0.3 0 0
1 END -0.2 0 0
15A.3 Beams
In both cases calculated quantity of transverse reinforcement will be the same. Calculated quantity
of longitudinal reinforcement in the second case will be greater.
For beam the following output is generated:
l
beam number;
method of calculation (according to conditions of strength or limitations of opened crack
width);
length and cross-sectional dimensions;
distance from resultant of forces acting in bottom/top reinforcement to bottom/top edge of
the section;
distance from the side edge of cross-section of the beam web to the centroid of longitudinal
bars located at this edge;
concrete class;
In nine columns of the first table the following results are presented:
Table 15A.4-Beam design output 1
Result
Section
Description
distance of the section from the start of
the beam,
As-
As+
Acrc2
15A.3 Beams
* Opened crack width is presented only in the case when calculation is performed according to
conditions limiting opened crack width.
In ten columns of second table the following results are presented:
Table 15A.5-Beam design output 2
Result
Section
Description
distance of the section from the start of
the beam, mm
Qsw
Asw
Load N.
Acrc1 Acrc2
mm sq.cm kNm mm mm
15A.3 Beams
--------------------------------------------------------------------0.
10.92
0.41 -152. / 2.
6 / 4 0.237
0.121
500.
4.74
0.41 -60.
/ 0.
5 / 0 0.294
0.157
1000.
1.13
1.13
-5.
/ 17.
4 / 6 0.000
0.000
1500.
1.13
6.41 -8.
/ 75.
4 / 6 0.295
0.147
2000.
1.13
9.24 -11.
/ 115.
4 / 6 0.298
0.149
2500.
1.13
11.53
-14.
/ 139.
4 / 6 0.271
0.134
3000.
1.19
12.16
-18.
/ 144.
4 / 6 0.263
0.127
3500.
1.41
10.86
-21.
/ 132.
4 / 6 0.277
0.130
4000.
1.63
8.28 -24.
/ 103.
4 / 6 0.296
0.129
4500.
1.95
4.54 -27.
/ 56.
4 / 6 0.299
0.093
5000.
3.23
0.58 -39.
/ 9.
5 / 3 0.293
0.157
5500.
0.74
0.41 -124. / 0.
5 / 0 0.271
0.142
6000.
16.89
0.41 -226. / 0.
5 / 0 0.155
0.078
S H E A R R E I N F O R C E M E N T
SectionQswAsw, cm^2, if Sw=
Q T Load
mmkN/m10cm15cm20cm25cm30cmkN kNm N.
0.
251.3
1.44 2.15
2.87
3.59
4.31
-203.9
0.0 6
500.
251.3
1.44 2.15
2.87
3.59
4.31
-168.9
0.0 6
1000.
174.5
1.00 1.50
1.99
2.49
2.99 -133.9
0.0 6
1500.
63.9
0.36 0.55
0.73
0.91
1.09
0.0 6
-98.9
2000.
-63.9
0.0 6
2500.
-28.9
0.0 6
3000.
12.7
0.0 5
3500.
47.7
0.0 5
4000.
82.7
0.0 5
4500.
95.0
0.55 0.82
1.09
1.37
1.64
117.7
0.0 5
5000.
242.5
1.39 2.08
2.77
3.46
4.16
152.7
0.0 5
5500.
302.5
1.73 2.59
3.46
4.32
5.19
187.7
0.0 5
6000.
302.5
1.73 2.59
3.46
4.32
5.19
216.1
0.0 5
Here Minimum detailing requirements! means that reinforcement is not required according to
calculation.
15A.4 Columns
15A.4 Columns
Reinforcement for columns of rectangular or circular cross-section can be calculated. Flexibility of
columns can be evaluated in two ways. In the case of usual analysis (command PERFORM
ANALYSIS) flexibility is assessed by parameters ELY and ELZ, values of which should conform with
recommendation of the Code SNiP 2.03.01-84*. If P-DELTA (analysis according to deformed
diagram) or NONLINEAR (nonlinear geometry) analysis is performed, values of parameters ELY and
ELZ should be close to zero, for example ELY = ELZ=0.01.
Longitudinal reinforcement for columns is calculated only from condition of strength.
Longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axes
account in longitudinal reinforcement calculations.
and
column number;
distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar from the nearest edge of the cross-section;
concrete class;
quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to the local axis
;
quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to the local axis
.
In nine columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT the
following output is presented:
Table 15A.6-Column design output 1
Result
Section
Astot
15A.4 Columns
Result
Asy
Asz
, sq.cm
sq.cm
Percent
and
, determining cross-
15A.4 Columns
L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T
Section
Astot
Asy
Asz
Percent
Nx
Mz
My
Load
sq.cm
sq.cm
sq.cm
kN
kNm
kNm
0.
16.42
3.01
6.20
1.34
285.5
81.9
0.0
4000.
15.35
3.01
5.67
1.25
397.3
95.3
0.0
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars, total quantity of longitudinal bars as well as quantity
of longitudinal bars at each edge of the section obtained from calculation should be considered as
recommendation. In this case arrangement of reinforcement in the section depends on the
orientation of the local axes and is as follows:
Calculated values of reinforcement cross-sectional areas are presented in the table and they may
differ from recommended on the lower side.
When it is not possible according to detailing provisions to arrange in the column longitudinal
reinforcement determined from calculation additional message is derived.
For columns of circular section the following output is generated:
l
column number;
In seven columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT the
following results are presented:
Section distance of the section from the start of the column, mm
Astot
Per
cent
15A.4 Columns
Nx,
Mz, My
axis
and
reinforcement
Load.
N.
reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results for a column of circular section is presented below.
COLUMN NO. 80 DESIGN RESULTS
(circular section)
Length - 4000 mm.
Diameter: D= 350 mm.
Distance from edge of column cross section to center of each longitudinal
reinforcement bar - 50 mm.
Concrete class - 20.0 (Rb=10.35 Pa; Gb2=0.9).
Class of longitudinal reinforcement - -III (Rs=365.0 Pa; Rsc=365.0 Pa).
Diameter range of longitudinal reinforcement bars:
Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars from calculation D=20 mm.
Total number of reinforcement bars Ntot =7.
L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T
Section
Astot
Percent
Nx
Mz
My
Load
sq.cm
kN
kNm
kNm
0.
17.96
1.87
195.1
59.8
0.0
4000.
21.86
2.27
195.1
80.2
0.0
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars, total quantity of longitudinal bars as well as quantity
of longitudinal bars at each edge of the section should be considered as recommendation.
Arrangement of reinforcement in section in this case is shown below:
Calculated cross-sectional areas of reinforcement presented in the table may differ from
recommended on the lower side.
When according to detailing provisions it is not possible to arrange in the column longitudinal
reinforcement obtained from calculation additional message is derived.
Asx
Mx
Nx
sq.cm/
m
kNm/
m
kN/
m
60 TOP
0.00
- 4.9
0.00
BOT
3.53
- 9.9
61 TOP
0.00
BOT
62 TOP
BOT
Load.
N.
Asy
My
Ny
Loa
d N.
(X)
sq.cm/
m
kNm/
m
kN/
m
0.00
- 4.5
0.00
0.00
3.46
- 8.9
0.00
- 5.3
0.00
0.00
- 4.7
0.00
3.87
- 10.7
0.00
3.65
- 9.4
0.00
0.00
- 5.6
0.00
0.00
- 4.8
0.00
4.10
- 11.2
0.00
3.77
- 9.6
0.00
(Y)
Here:
Description
number of finite element, TOP - top zone of member, BOT bottom zone of member (top zone of member is determined
by positive direction of local axis
Asx
-see Fig.2)
Mx
), sq.cm/m
Nx
Load N.(X)
Asy
My
), sq.cm/m
Ny
Load N.(Y)
15B.1 General
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1990)
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Russian code II-23-81*
II (SNiP 2.23-81* Part II Design Standards for
Steel Construction).
In STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 5) or later, design of members per SNiP 2.23-81* requires the
STAAD ECC. Super Code SELECTCode Pack.
15B.1 General
Design Code SNiP Steel Structures as is the case in the majority of modern codes is based on the
method of limit states. The following groups of limit states are defined in the Code.
l
The first group is concerned with losses of general shape and stability, failure, qualitative
changes in configuration of structure. Appearance of non-allowable residual deformations,
displacements, yielding of materials or opening of cracks.
The second group is concerned with states of structures making worse normal their service
or reducing durability due to not allowable deflections, deviations, settlements, vibrations,
etc.
Analysis of structures for the first limit state is performed using the maximum (design) loads and
actions, which can cause failure of structures.
Analysis of structures for the second limit state is performed using service (normative) loads and
actions. Relation between design and normative loads is referred to as coefficient of load reliability,
which is defined in SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 Loads and Actions.
Coefficient of reliability for destination GAMA n according to SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 shall be taken in to
account determining loads or their combinations.
In this version of the program only members from rolled, tube and roll-formed assortment sections
and also from compound such as double angles of T-type sections, double channels are presented.
Design of other members of compound section will be presented in other versions of the program.
Economy of selected section is indicated by ratio (RATIO) /Ryyc presented in calculation results. A
section is economical when said ratio equals to 0,9 0,95.
Section Type
Designation form
ST I12
ST B1-10
ST SH1-23
ST K1-20
ST C14
ST L100x100x7
ST L125x80x10
RA L100x100x7
RA L125x80x10
ST PIP102x5.5
Pipes (welded and for gas
piping)
or
ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID
0.055
ST TUB160x120x3
or
ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT
0.12 DT 0.16
Double channels
Section Type
Designation
form
D C14 SP
0.01
(SP clear
distance
between
channel
walls)
LD
L100x100x7
SP 0.01
(SP clear
distance
between
angle walls)
LD
L125x80x10
SP 0.01
(SP clear
distance
between
angle walls)
SD
L125x80x10
SP 0.01
(SP clear
distance
between
angle walls)
T I12
T B1-10
T SH1-23
T K1-20
15B.2.1 Example
UNITS METER
MEMBER PROPERTY RUSSIAN
* I-beam
1 TO 6 TABLE ST B1-10
* Channel
7 TO 11 TABLE ST C14
* Unequal legs angle
12 TO 30 TABLE RA L125x80x10
* Round assortment pipe
31 TO 46 TABLE ST PIP102x5.5
* round pipe of cross-sectional dimensions defined by client
47 TO 60 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID 0.055
* Square tube from assortment
61 TO 68 TABLE ST TUB120x120x3
* Rectangular tube of cross-sectional dimension defined by client
69 TO 95 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT 0.12 DT 0.16
* Double channel (distance between walls 10 )
96 TO 103 TABLE D C14 SP 0.01
* Double unequal legs angles with short legs back-to-back (distance between walls 10 )
104 TO 105 TABLE SD L125x80x10 SP 0.01
* member of Tee section
106 TO 126 TABLE T SH1-23
* Flange of T-beams at the bottom of cross-section
BETA 180. MEMB 116 TO 126
* Orientation of the local angle axes in relation to the global axes of the structure
BETA RANGLE MEMB 12 TO 30
15B.3.1 Example
* Command of analysis
PERFORM ANALYSIS
* Command of loadings and their combinations considered in design
LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9
* Command to start design according to Russian Code
PARAMETER
CODE RUSSIAN
* List of parameters used in checking and selecting
BEAM 1. ALL
Obligatory parameter
LY
LZ
4. MEMB 1 TO 4
4. MEM 1 TO 4
MAIN 1. ALL
SGR 3. ALL
SBLT 0 ALL
* Parameter of output amount of information on calculation results
TRACK 2. ALL
.
* Command to start section check procedure
CHECK CODE ALL
* Command to start section selection procedure
SELECT ALL
.
* Command of output to print content of assortment tables
PRINT ENTIRE TABLE
* Command of output to print summary of steel according to sections
STEEL TAKE OFF
* Command of output to print summary of steel according to members and sections
STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF
not exceed design value of steel shear strength Rss then according to clause 5.14 of SNiP 2.01.07.81* principal stresses are checked.
General stability of member subjected to bending in one plane are calculated in accordance with
clause 5.15 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*, and subjected to bending in two planes in accordance with
Guide to design of steel structures (to SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*). Coefficient b value is determined
according to appendix 7 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Additional data about load (concentrated or
distributed), numbers of bracing restrains of compression flanges, location of applied load are
required. For closed sections it is assumed that coefficient b = 1.0.
Simply supported (non-continuous) beams can be calculated in elastic as well as in elastic-plastic
state according to requirements of clause 5.18 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Calculation can be selected by
specification of structure in input data.
Stiffness of flexural members is verified comparing input value of deflection limit (through
parameter DFF) with maximum displacement of a section of flexural member allowing for load
reliability coefficient, which is specified, in input data. Limit values of deflection are determined in
accordance with SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 Loads and Actions. Addition chapter 10. Deflections and
displacements. Verification of deflection is performed only in the case of review (CHECK) problem.
Values of parameters do not depend on command UNIT. Only these values of parameters, which
differ from, defined in the program need to be included in the input data file.
Review of sections (command CHECK) can be performed according to the first and the second group
of limit states. Selection of section (command SELECT) can be performed only according to the first
group of limit states with subsequent recalculation and verification of selected section with
allowance for deflection.
Calculation for the first group of limit states involves selection of members according to strength
and stability. Parameters CMN and CMM give opportunity to set slenderness limit for compression and
tension members respectively for their stability calculation, or refuse consideration of slenderness by
setting default parameters. In this case selection of sections will be performed with consideration
only of strength check.
Check for deflection performed by setting parameter DFF (maximum allowable relative deflection
value) different from set in the program.
In the case of application of steel not defined by SNiP and/or GOST it is necessary to set their
design strength by parameters UNL and PY.
In determination of steel parameters SBLT and MAIN shall be approved (see Table 15B.4).
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is specified
again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 15B.3-Parameters for Steel design according to Russian Code (SNiP II 23
81*, edition 1990)
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Must be specified as RUSSIAN 1990
CODE
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Member design parameter:
l
BEAM
1
l
MM = 0, if slenderness is suppressed;
MM
0
l
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Slenderness limit value for compression members:
CMN
0.
DMAX
1.
0.
GAMC1
1.0
GAMC2
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
[m]
DMIN
[m]
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Type and position of loading on beam:
l
LEG
LY
[m]
LZ
[m]
MAIN
NSF
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Design steel strength (yield strength):
PY
0
1.0
[MPa]
RATIO
SBLT
SGR
TB
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
Output parameter:
TRACK
0
[MPa]
Table 15B.4-Steel types for design of steel structures according to SNiP 2.01.07.81* (table 51 and 51a)
SGR Value
Steel
Parameter MAIN
GOST
For members*
C235
GOST 27772-88
GT, F
C245
GT, F
C255
GT, F
C275
GT, F
C285
GT, F
C345
GT, F
C345K
GT, F
C375
GT, F
C390
10
C390K
11
C440
12
C590
13
C590
14
BSt3kp
GOST 10705-80*
Tube
GOST 10705-80*
15
BSt3ps
3
GOST 10706-76*
Tube
SGR Value
16
Steel
Parameter MAIN
GOST
GOST 10705-80*
GOST 10706-76*
BSt3sp
For members*
Tube
17
20
GOST 8731-87
Tube
18
16G2F
TY 14-3-567-76
Tube
Signs + and -indicate direction of acting longitudinal force, bending moments and shear forces
in accordance with sign rules assumed in program STAAD.
Check results in advanced form are presented with values of intermediate parameters by formulas
in analytical and numerical expression with indication of SNiP clause.
========================================================================
MEMBER
CROSS
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
SECTION NO.
FX
MZ
MY
LOCATION
========================================================================
1
I60
PASS
SNiP- 5.18
0.68
1
0.000E+00
-4.650E+02
0.000E+00
3.000E+00
1
I60
PASS
SNiP- DISPL
0.36
1
0.000E+00
-4.650E+02
0.000E+00
3.000E+00
MATERIAL DATA
Steel
Modulus of elasticity
Design Strength (Ry)
=C245
= 206.E+06 KPA
= 240.E+03 KPA
= 6.00E+00
= 1.38E-02
= 1.38E-02
z-axis
:
768.E-06
:
256.E-05
:
149.E-05
:
236.E-03
:
600.E-02
:
0.00E+00
y-axis
173.E-07
182.E-06
156.E-06
354.E-04
600.E-02
0.00E+00
y-axis
0.00E+00
500.E-02
15C.1 General
15C.1 General
Design Code SP Steel Structures as is the case in the majority of modern codes is based on the
method of limit states. The following groups of limit states are defined in the Code.
l
The first group concerns losses of general shape and stability, failure, and qualitative changes
in configuration of the structure (i.e., ultimate limit states). Appearance of non-allowable
residual deformations, displacements, yielding of materials or opening of cracks.
Analysis of structures for the first limit state is performed using the maximum (design)
loads and actions, which can cause failure of structures.
The second group concerns states of the structure which worsen their service or reduce
durability due to exceeding allowable deflections, deviations, settlements, vibrations, etc.
(i.e., service conditions)
Analysis of structures for the second limit state is performed using service (normative) loads
and actions. Relation between design and normative loads is referred to as coefficient of load
reliability, which is defined in SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 Loads and Actions.
The coefficient of reliability for destination GAMA n according to SP 20.13330.2011 shall be taken in
to account determining loads or their combinations.
According to the European standards, the strength of steel is represented by the characteristic
value. To obtain the design value, the steel reliability coefficient GAMM is used. The default value of
GAMM is 1.0.
Note: If there are doubts about the conformance of the European steel type and the standard, it is
necessary that the steel type designation used by the ENSGR parameter be set the same as the
standard selected in the ENMAIN parameter. If the chosen steel type is not present in the chosen
standard, then the program exits with the error code MEMBER NO.145 STEEL S275 IS NOT
PRESENT IN EN 10025-6 * ERROR * The calculation will be terminated if the thickness of the
designed member web or flange thickness is outside the limits of the steel standard. The error
code will be issued: MEMBER NO. 1000 CURRENT THICKNESS IS OUT OF EN 100219-1 * ERROR
*
Only members from rolled, tube, and roll-formed assortment sections, and compound sections
(such as double angles of T-type sections, double channels) are may be designed in STAAD.Pro.
Economy of selected section is indicated by ratio the ration (which can be set using the RATIO
parameter) /Ryyc presented in calculation results. A section is economical when said ratio equals to
0.9 0.95.
of the web and flanges of centrally loaded members is checked. Stiffener ribs are recommended if
necessary.
Section Type
Designation form
ST I12
ST B1-10
ST SH1-23
ST K1-20
ST C14
ST L100x100x7
ST L125x80x10
RA L100x100x7
RA L125x80x10
ST PIP102x5.5
Pipes (welded and for gas
piping)
or
ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID
0.055
ST TUB160x120x3
or
ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT
0.12 DT 0.16
Section Type
Designation
form
D C14 SP
0.01
Double channels
(SP clear
distance
between
channel
walls)
LD
L100x100x7
SP 0.01
(SP clear
distance
between
angle walls)
LD
L125x80x10
SP 0.01
(SP clear
distance
between
angle walls)
SD
L125x80x10
SP 0.01
(SP clear
distance
between
angle walls)
T I12
T B1-10
T SH1-23
T K1-20
Default Value
Description
BEAM
CB
Parameter
Name
CMM
Default Value
Description
CMN
DFF
None
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
1,000 in
DMIN
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
ENMAIN
ENSGR
GAMC1
1.0
GAMC2
1.0
GAMM
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LEG
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
Parameter
Name
MAIN
Default Value
Description
NSF
1.0
PY
RATIO
1.0
SBLT
Parameter
Name
SGR
Default Value
Description
TB
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
Description
Output details:
0. suppressed output information
1. extended output information for
the critical section under the
critical load case
2. full output information for the
critical section under the critical
load case
3. extended output information for
all sections under all load cases.
UNL
15C.4.1 Notes
1. It is common practice to design only Russian or European shapes to the SNiP codes. For
Russian steel sections, the steel design strength value, Ry, of a particular steel grade can be
obtained from Table C.5 of SP 16.13330.2011 and is used for the SGR parameter. For European
sections, the ENSGR and ENMAIN parameters are used accordingly. If steel sections from other
countries must be used, the PY parameter is used to specify the steel strength.
=S355
EN10025-2
= 206.E+06 kPa
= 355.E+03 kPa
= 8.00E+00
= 5.38E-03
= 5.38E-03
z-axis
:
836.E-07
y-axis
604.E-08
:
:
:
:
:
557.E-06
314.E-06
125.E-03
160.E-01
0.00E+00
805.E-07
625.E-07
335.E-04
800.E-02
0.00E+00
15D.1 General
15D.1 General
Russian Code SP 63.1330.20121 Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Structures - Basic Provisions is
based on the method of limit states. This code defines two groups of limit states.
Analysis according to the first group of limit states is performed to avoid the following phenomena:
l
Analysis according to the second group of limit states is performed to avoid the following
phenomena:
l
excessive opening of cracks (if they are allowed according to service conditions)
Analysis of structures for the first group of limit states is performed for the maximum (design)
loads and actions. Analysis of structures for the second group of limit states is made in accordance
with the operational (normative) loads and actions. Ratio between design and normative loads is
called reliability coefficient for loads which is determined according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 Loads and
actions.
STAAD.Pro calculates reinforcement for concrete members. Algorithms for calculation of
reinforcement of concrete linear (beams, columns) and 2D (two dimensional) (slabs, walls, shells)
members are incorporated into STAAD.Pro. In addition to SP5 2.13330.2011, the Guide for design of
plain concrete and reinforced concrete structures from normal weight and lightweight concrete (to
SNiP 2.03.01-84) has been incorporated in the calculation algorithms.
STAAD.Pro calculates reinforcement for beams of rectangular or T section and for columns of
rectangular or circular section (Fig.1).
The flange of T-shape beams may be situated at the top zone of the section if the angle BETA=0, or
at the bottom zone of the section, if BETA=180.
Description
Must be assigned as RUSSIAN
CODE
BCL
CL
15
0.05
CL1
0.05
(Columns) Distance from the edge of the column
cross section to the center of the longitudinal
reinforcing bars
CL2
0.05
Parameter Default
Name
Value
CRA
0.05
Description
(Slabs/Walls) Distance from top/bottom face of
slab/wall element to the center of the transverse
reinforcing bars located in the second local (y)
direction (i.e., secondary thickness of top/bottom
concrete cover for slab/wall elements)
(Beams) Diameter of the longitudinal reinforcement
bars in the beam tension zone
DD1
16
(Columns) Minimum diameter of longitudinal
reinforcement bars for the column
(Beams) Diameter of the shear reinforcement bars for
the beam
DD2
16
(Columns) Maximum diameter of longitudinal
reinforcement bars for the column
DEPTH
YD
EFA
ELY
ELZ
FWB
ZB
FWT
ZD
MMA
Parameter Default
Name
Value
Description
(Slabs/Walls) Design parameter of slab/wall
reinforcement:
MMB
NLT
NSE
13
RCL
2. A400
3. A500
4. A600
(Beams) Class of shear reinforcement:
1. A240
RSH
2. A400
3. A500
4. A600
SDX
16
SDY
16
SELX
SELY
SFA
Parameter Default
Name
Value
Description
(Beam) Limit state parameter for beam design:
0. reinforcement amount calculated for required
load capacity (i.e., the first limit state)
SSE
STA
TEM
1. fine-grain concrete
2. (Beams and Columns)fine-grain, steam
hardened concrete
UB2
0.9
UBM
USM
WLT
0.3
WST
0.4
15D.3 Beams
15D.2.1 Example
STAAD
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
* Columns of rectangular cross-section
1 TO 16 PRI YD 350. ZD 350.
* Columns of circular cross-section
17 TO 22 PRI YD 350.
* Beams of T cross-section
23 TO 40 PRI YD 450. ZD 550. YB 230. ZB 200.
UNIT METER
ELEMENT PROPERTY
41 TO 100 THICKNESS 0.14
101 TO 252 THICKNESS 0.16
* Flange of T beams is located at the bottom zone of cross-section
BETA 180. MEMB 23 TO 40
* Command of analysis
PERFORM ANALYSIS
15D.3 Beams
Reinforcement areas are calculated for beams of rectangular and T cross section. When calculating
the longitudinal reinforcement bending moment about the local axis Z and torsional moments are
considered; the influence of longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axis Y is
15D.3 Beams
ignored. When calculating transverse reinforcement shear forces parallel to local axis Y and
torsional moments are considered.
Reinforcement for beams can be calculated either for strength conditions or from crack width
limits using the SSE parameter.
In general, the calculation of reinforcement for beams is carried out two times: once according to
strength conditions and again according to crack width limitation. In reinforcement calculations
for strength conditions (i.e., the first limit state), design load values must be used. In
reinforcement calculations for crack width limitation (i.e., the second limit state), characteristic
(i.e., normative or service) load values are used. Using the multiple analysis capability of STAAD.Pro
allows you to carry out both calculations in a single analysis and design run.
In most cases, calculation of reinforcement is carried out with only a partial number of load cases.
In such cases, the LOAD LIST command is used to indicate the load case numbers. The load case
number indicated by the NLTparameter used to indicate the load cases for permanent and longterm loads must be included in the list of considered loads.
The parameter BCL can be equal to any value of concrete compression strength class given in SNiP
2.03.01-84*, as well as any intermediate value.
It should be noted that the accuracy of results in calculating transverse reinforcement increases
with the value of the NSEparameter.
Parameters SFA and EFAare considered only in the calculation of transverse reinforcement. Beam 1
shown in the following figure has rigid end-links of 0.3m at the start of the beam and 0.2m at the
end of the beam. In the STAAD input file, this is modeled as:
MEMBER OFFSET
1 START 0.3 0 0
1 END -0.2 0 0
15D.3 Beams
When the MEMBER OFFSET command not is used, the forces used in calculation of reinforcement
are for a beam whose length is taken from node 10 to node 11. In this case, it is necessary to assign
the distances to the design parameters SFA and EFA.
CODE RUSSIAN
SFA 0.3 1
EFA 0.2 1
Note: The sign is positive for the EFA parameter, as it is assumed to be taken away from the gross
beam length.
In both cases, the calculated quantity of transverse reinforcement is the same. The calculated
quantity of longitudinal reinforcement in the second case will be greater.
For beams, the following output is generated:
beam number;
method of calculation (according to conditions of strength or limitations of opened crack
width);
length and cross-sectional dimensions;
distance from resultant of forces acting in bottom/top reinforcement to bottom/top edge of
the section;
distance from the side edge of cross-section of the beam web to the centroid of longitudinal
bars located at this edge;
concrete class;
class of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement;
assumed in calculations bar diameters of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement;
calculation results of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement (in two tables).
In nine columns of the first table the following results are presented:
Section distance of the section from the start of the beam, ;
As- cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in the bottom zone of cross-section
of the beam, if angle BETA=0, or in the top zone, if BETA=180, sq.cm;
As+ cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in the top zone of cross-section of
the beam , if angle BETA=0, or in the top zone, if BETA=180, sq.cm;
Moments (-/+) values of bending moments, determining cross-sectional areas of
longitudinal reinforcement As* and As* , kNm;
Load. N. (-/+) numbers of loading versions, determining cross-sectional areas of
longitudinal reinforcement;
Acrc1 short-term opened crack width, mm;
Acrc2 long-term opened crack width, mm.
Opened crack width is presented only in the case when calculation is performed according to
conditions limiting opened crack width.
In ten columns of second table the following results are presented:
Section distance of the section from the start of the beam, mm;
Qsw intensity of transverse reinforcement, kN/m;
Asw cross-sectional area of transverse bars, sq.cm, if their step is 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 cm;
Q value of shear force parallel to the local axis, kN;
15D.4 Columns
15D.4 Columns
Reinforcement for columns of rectangular or circular cross section can be calculated. The flexibility
of columns can be evaluated in two ways.
l
In the case of linear analysis (i.e., the PERFORM ANALYSIScommand), the effective length is
evaluated using the ELY and ELZ parameters, conforming to provisions of SP5 2.13330.2011.
If a P-DELTA or NONLINEAR (i.e. nonlinear geometry) analysis is performed, the values of the
ELY and ELZ parameters should be close to zero (e.g., ELY = ELZ = 0.01).
Longitudinal reinforcement for columns is calculated only for the strength condition. Longitudinal
forces and bending moments in relation to local axes Y and Z are taken into account in
longitudinal reinforcement calculations.
For rectangular columns, the following output is generated:
column number;
column length and cross-sectional dimensions;
distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar from the nearest edge of the cross-section;
concrete class;
longitudinal reinforcement class;
range of longitudinal reinforcement bar diameters assumed in calculation;
diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars obtained in calculation;
total quantity of longitudinal bars;
quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to the local axis Y ;
quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to the local axis Z.
In nine columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT, the
following output is presented:
Section distance of the section from the start of the column, mm;
Astot total cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement, sq.cm;
Asy cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement bars at each edge of section, directed
parallel to the local axis Y , sq.cm;
Asz cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement bars at each edge of section, directed
parallel to the local axis Z , sq.cm;
Percent reinforcement percentage in the section;
Nx, Mz, My respective values of longitudinal force and bending moments in relation to the
local axes Z and Y , determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement;
Load.N. number of loading version, determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal
reinforcement.
limiting of width of cracks. In reinforcement calculations for strength conditions (i.e., the first
limit state), design load values must be used. In reinforcement calculations for crack width
limitation (i.e., the second limit state), characteristic (i.e., normative or service) load values are
used. Using the multiple analysis capability of STAAD.Pro allows you to carry out both calculations
in a single analysis and design run.
Symmetric or non symmetric reinforcement of elements is calculated according to either first or
second limit states by using the STA parameter.
It is necessary to pay close attention to the arrangement of local axis of the element with respect to
the direction of reinforcement for the calculation of reinforcement. This is controlled using the CL
and CRAparameters, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 15D.2 - Russian concrete design parameters CL and CRA
sq.cm/m
kNm/m
kN/m
(X)
sq.cm/m
kNm/m
kN/m
(Y)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------60 TOP
0.00
*4.9 0.0
1
0.00 *4.5 0.0
1
BOT
3.53
*9.9 0.0
3
3.46 *8.9 0.0
3
61 TOP
0.00
*5.3 0.0
1
0.00 *4.7 0.0
1
BOT
3.87
*10.7 0.0
3
3.65 *9.4 0.0
3
62 TOP
0.00
*5.6 0.0
1
0.00 *4.8 0.0
1
BOT
4.10
*11.2 0.0
3
3.77 *9.6 0.0
3
where:
Element number of finite element, TOP top zone of member, BOT bottom zone of
member (top zone of member is determined by positive direction of local axis Z see the
following figure);
Asx intensity of reinforcing in the first direction (parallel to the local axis X), sq.cm/m;
Mx distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis Y, kNm/m;
Nx distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the axis X, kNm/m;
Load N.(X) number of loading version, determining intensity of reinforcing in the first
direction;
Asy intensity of reinforcing in the second direction (parallel to the local axis Y), sq.cm/m;
My distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis X kNm/m;
Ny distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the local axis Y kN/m;
Load N.(Y) number of loading version, determining intensity of reinforcing in the second
direction.
Figure 15D.3 - Local coordinate system of 2D member and notation of forces
16
Singaporian Codes
16 Singaporian Codes
Default
Value
-
Description
BRACE
0.0
CLEAR
20 mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
ELY
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
ELZ
1.0
FC
4.0 ksi
FYMAIN
60 ksi
FYSEC
60 ksi
MAX
MAIN
50 mm
MINMAIN
8 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MMAG
1.0
NSE
CTION
12
SERV
0.0
Serviceability checks:
0. No serviceability check performed.
1. Perform serviceability check for beams as if
they were continuous.
2. Perform serviceability check for beams as if
they were simply supported.
3. Perform serviceability check for beams as if
they were cantilever beams.
SFACE
0.0
Parameter
Name
SRA
Default
Value
0.0
Description
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
17
South African Codes
Default Value
Description
BRACE
0.0
Column bracing:
0. Column braced in both directions.
1. Column braced about local Y
direction only
2. Column unbraced about local Z
direction only
3. Column unbraced in both Y and Z
directions
CLB
20mm
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
CLS
20mm
CLT
20mm
DEPTH
YD
ELY
1.0
ELZ
1.0
FC
30N/mm 2
FYMAIN
450 N/mm 2
FYSEC
450N/mm 2
MAXMAIN
50mm
MINMAIN
8mm
MINSEC
8mm
Parameter
Name
TRACK
Default Value
0.0
Description
Output detail
0. Critical Moment will not be printed
with beam design report. Column
design gives no detailed results.
1. For beam gives min/max steel %
and spacing. For columns gives a
detailed table of output with
additional moments calculated.
2. Output of TRACK 1.0 List of design
sag/hog moments and
corresponding required steel area at
each section of member
WIDTH
ZD
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x 300mm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be
circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear
area areas (AY & AZ ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with
YD and ZD. Also note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate
them from YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition
above.
M30
LENGTH:
Fe450 (Main)
6000.0 mm
SIZE:
715.0 mm X
Fe450 (Sec.)
380.0 mm
COVER: 40.0 mm
|
-84.04
1
|
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
N O.
M30
LENGTH:
D E S I G N
R E S U L T S
Fe450 (Main)
3000.0 mm
CROSS SECTION:
1 END JOINT:
Fe450 (Sec.)
715.0 mm X
2
380.0 mm
COVER: 40.0 mm
SHORT COLUMN
-14.6
About Z
About Y
INITIAL MOMENTS
MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC.
:
:
0.00
0.28
0.00
0.29
SLENDERNESS RATIOS
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maddz and Maddy)
:
:
7.89
0.00
4.20
0.00
45.17
9.41
============================================================================
17B.1 General
The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for
member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the
properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear
deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members.
Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
17B.4.1 I Shapes
The following example illustrates the specification of I- shapes.
1 TO 15 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
17B.4.2 H shapes
Designation of H shapes in STAAD is as follows.
For example,
18 TO 20 TABLE ST 152X37UC
17B.4.3 PG shapes
Designation of PG shapes in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST 720X200PG
A back-to-back double channel section 140X60X16C with spacing 0.01 unit length in between
should be specified as:
100 TO 150 TABLE D 140X60X16C SP 0.01
Note: The specification SP after the section designation is used for providing the spacing. The
spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
17B.4.6 Angles
To specify angles, the letter L succeeds the angle name. Thus, a 70X70 angle with a 25mm thickness
is designated as 70X70X8L. The following examples illustrate angle specifications.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST 70X70X8L
Note that the above specification is for standard angles. In this specification, the local z-axis (see
Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y-Y axis shown in the CSA table.
Another common practice of specifying angles assumes the local y-axis to correspond to the Y-Y
axis. To specify angles in accordance with this convention, the reverse angle designation facility has
been provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting the word ST with the word RA.
Refer to the following example for details.
100 TO 150 TABLE RA 45X45X3L
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles are shown in Fig. 2.6 of the STAAD
Technical Reference manual.
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of 40X40X5 angles with a
spacing of 0.01 length units.
17B.4.8 Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T specification instead of
ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE T IPE-AA180
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for width), and TH
(for thickness) specifications. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST TUBE TH 3 WT 100 DT 50
will describe a tube with a depth of 50mm, width of 100mm. and a wall thickness of 3mm. Note
that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in current length unit.
In addition to sections listed in the SAB tables, circular hollow sections may be specified by using
the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter) specifications.
For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST PIPE OD 50 ID 48
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 50 length units and inside diameter of 48 length
units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters must be provided in terms of current
length unit.
A sample input file to demonstrate usage of South African shapes:
STAAD PLANE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 30-Mar-05
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 9 0 0; 3 0 6 0; 4 3 6 0; 5 6 6 0; 6 9 6 0; 7 0 10.5 0;
8 9 10.5 0; 9 2.25 10.5 0; 10 6.75 10.5 0; 11 4.5 10.5 0; 12 1.5 11.4 0;
13 7.5 11.4 0; 14 3 12.3 0; 15 6 12.3 0; 16 4.5 13.2 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 7; 3 2 6; 4 6 8; 5 3 4; 6 4 5; 7 5 6; 8 7 12; 9 12 14;
10 14 16; 11 15 16; 12 13 15; 13 8 13; 14 9 12; 15 9 14; 16 11 14;
17 11 15; 18 10 15; 19 10 13; 20 7 9; 21 9 11; 22 10 11; 23 8 10;
MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN
1 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
2 TABLE T IPE120
3 TABLE ST 152X23UC
4 TABLE T 152X23UC
5 TABLE ST 812X200PG
6 TABLE T 812X200PG
7 TABLE ST 178X54X15C
8 TABLE D 178X54X15C
9 TABLE D 178X54X15C SP 0.1
10 TABLE ST 25X25X5L
11 TABLE RA 25X25X5L
12 TABLE LD 25X25X5L
13 TABLE SD 25X25X5L
14 TABLE LD 25X25X5L SP 0.1
15 TABLE SD 25X25X5L SP 0.1
16 TABLE ST TUB40X2.5SHS
17 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0 WT 0 DT 50
18 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.02 WT 100 DT 50
20 TABLE ST PIP48X2.0CHS
21 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.5 ID 0.48
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
17B.6.1 Axial
Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for these calculations.
resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KX, KY, KZ, LX, LY, and LZ (see Table
13B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity calculations are:
1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members, the axial
compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is calculated from Cl.13.3.1 using
the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are
applicable for this.
2. For single angles, asymmetric or cruciform sections are checked as to whether torsionalflexural buckling is critical. But for KL/r ratio exceeding 50,as torsional flexural buckling is
not critical, the axial compression capacities are calculated by using Cl.13.3. The reason for
this is that the South African code doesnt provide any clear guidelines for calculating this
value. The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this.
3. The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking flexural-torsional buckling into
account. Parameters KX and LX may be used to provide the effective length factor and
effective length value for flexural-torsional buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling capacity is
computed for single channels, single angles, Tees and Double angles.
4. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections with axial
compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a), 13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are applied.
For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a), K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.)
17B.6.3 Bending
The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the purpose of computing the
factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD with the help of the parameter UNL. If UNL is
less than one tenth the member length (member length is the distance between the joints of the
member), the member is treated as being continuously laterally supported. In this case, the
moment resistance is computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is greater than or equal to
one-tenth the member length, its value is used as the laterally unsupported length. The equations
of Clause 13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of resistance of laterally unsupported
members. Some of the aspects of the bending capacity calculations are:
1. The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is calculated as:
For Class 1 & 2 sections
Phi*Py*Fy
For Class 3 sections
Phi*Sy*Fy
Where:
Phi = Resistance factor = 0.9
Py = Plastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Sy = Elastic section modulus about the local Y axis
17B.6.6 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 13.4 of the
code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear
resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or
the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 17B.1), the section is considered
to have failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the web be within a
certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 29 of SABS 0162-1:1993). Checks for safety in shear are performed
only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users may by-pass this limitation by specifying a
value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.
Default
Value
-
Description
BEAM
CB
1.0
CMY
1.0
CMZ
1.0
DFF
DJ1
DJ2
DMAX
1000
DMIN
FU
345Mpa
FYLD
300Mpa
KT
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LT
Member
length
LY
Member
length
LZ
Member
length
MAIN
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SSY
Sidesway parameter
0 - Sideway about local Y-axis.
1 - No sideway about local Yaxis.
SSZ
Sidesway parameter
0 - Sideway about local Z-axis.
1 - No sideway about local Zaxis.
TRACK
Track parameter
0. Print the design output at the
minimum detail level.
1. Print the design output at the
intermediate detail level.
2. Print the design output at maximum
detail level
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
UNB
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
17B.8.1 Example
Sample input data for South African Code Design
PARAMETER
CODE SANS10162-1: 1993
MAIN 1 all
LY 4 MEMB 1
LZ 4 MEMB 1
UNL 4 MEMB 1
CB 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
CMZ MEMB 2 1 TO 23
CMY MEMB 2 1 TO 23
SSY 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
SSZ 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
FU 450000 MEMB 1 TO 23
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 1.0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 1 TO
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
23
MET
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
TABLE
406X67UB
(SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
PASS
SAB-13.8
0.543
1
0.00
0.00
-191.90
4.08
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| FACTORED RESISTANCES FOR MEMBER1 UNIT - KN,M
PHI = 0.90 |
|
MRZ=
353.27 MRY=
63.99
|
|
CR=
453.21 TR=
2308.50 VR=
642.00
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
Factored member resistances will be printed out. Following is a description of some of the items
printed out.
Output Term
Description
MRZ
MRY
CR
TR
VR
Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0. A typical output of track 2.0 parameter is
as follows.
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SANS10162-1:1993 )
**************************************
MET
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
TABLE
406X67UB
PASS
0.00
(SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
SAB-13.8
0.543
0.00
-191.90
1
4.08
MEMBER LENGTH =
PZ = 1.35E+03
PY = 2.37E+02
7.00E+02
FU = 345.0
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR
KL/RY = 175.514
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) =
0.000E+00
Description
Factored compressive resistance for column buckling
about the local y axis
CRZ
CTORFLX
TENSILE CAPACITY
COMPRESSIVE
CAPACITY
FACTORED MOMENT MRY = Factored moment of resistance in y direction
RESISTANCE
FACTORED SHEAR
RESISTANCE
Reference
Example 4.3.4.1, page 4.18, Structural Steel Design to SABS 0162-1 1993 (Limit States Design). Greg
Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical Publications. 1993
Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
Length = 6,000 mm
Comparison
Table 17B.2-SABS 0162-1:1993 Verification problem no.1 comparison
Criteria
Axial Compressive Strength (kN)
Input File
STAAD PLANE
START JOB INFORMATION
* ENGINEER DATE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 6 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN
1 TABLE ST 356X67UB
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 1.99947e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8191
ALPHA 6e-006
DAMP 0.03
TYPE STEEL
STRENGTH FY 248210 FU 399894 RY 1.5 RT 1.2
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -1500
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
CODE SANS10162-1: 1993
LZ 6 ALL
LY 3 ALL
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
1,516
1,516
none
Output
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SANS10162-01:1993 )
**************************************
MET
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
356X67UB
PASS
1500.00
(SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
COMPRESSION
0.989
0.00
0.00
1
0.00
MEMBER LENGTH =
PZ = 1.21E+03
PY = 2.43E+02
6.00E+02
FU = 450.0
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 0.850
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 6.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00
Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 3.65E+01
KL/RY =
75.220
KL/RZ =
39.730
ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000
17B.12.1 Reference
Example 4.5, page 4.37, Structural Steel Design to SABS 0162-1 1993 (Limit States Design). Greg
Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical Publications. 1993
17B.12.2 Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
17B.12.3 Comparison
Table 17B.3-SAB 0162 -1:1993 Verification Problem 2 comparison
Criteria
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
353.4
364.5
3%
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 3 PINNED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -104 4
1 UNI GY -4
2 UNI GY -2
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE SANS10162-1: 1993
CB 0 ALL
UNL 4 MEMB 1
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 85 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
FINISH
17B.12.5 Output
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SANS10162-01:1993 )
**************************************
MET
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
406X67UB
PASS
0.00
(SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
SAN-13.8
0.526
0.00
-191.90
1
4.08
MEMBER LENGTH =
PZ = 1.35E+03
PY = 2.37E+02
7.00E+02
FU = 450.0
CRY = 4.532E+02
CRZ = 2.016E+03
CTORFLX = 4.532E+02
TENSILE CAPACITY
= 2.308E+03
COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 4.532E+02
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.399E+01
MRZ = 3.645E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 6.420E+02
VRZ = 6.075E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 85.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 4.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 = 1.75
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = -6.305E+01
Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 4.33E+01
KL/RY = 175.514
KL/RZ =
41.522
ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
17B.13.1 Reference
Example 4.6.5, page 4.54, Structural Steel Design to SABS 0162-1 1993 (Limit States Design). Greg
Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical Publications. 1993
17B.13.2 Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
17B.13.3 Comparison
Table 17B.4-SAB 0162-1:1993 Verification Problem 3 comparison
Criteria
Shear Capacity (kN)
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
687.1
687.1
none
ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1
E 2E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 977
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 8195
ALPHA 2E-005
DAMP 03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -70
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE SANS10162-1: 1993
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
17B.13.5 Output
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SANS10162-01:1993 )
**************************************
MET
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
TABLE
1 ST
457X67UB
FAIL
0.00
(SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
SAN-13.8
1.411
0.00
-560.00
1
4.00
MEMBER LENGTH =
PZ = 1.47E+03
PY = 2.37E+02
8.00E+02
FU = 450.0
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
-------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 8.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 1.697E-05
Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 5.04E+01
KL/RY = 194.263
KL/RZ =
43.142
ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
17C.1 General
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the South African code SANS 10162-1:2011
Design of steel structures.
17C.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state design.
Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they
would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength
and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are
used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading
conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without
exceeding the limit states of strength, stability, and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic
section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the designer in
specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code
checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are
met and identifies the governing criteria.
The next few sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of SANS 101621:2011. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and
assumptions is available in the specification document.
See "Built-in Steel Section Library" on page 795 for details on using the built-in library of South
African steel shapes.
n = 1.34 for hot-rolled, fabricated structural sections, and hollow structural sections
manufactured according to SANS 657-1
f
f
= kl
=
2
fe
Doubly symmetric sections which may be governed by torsional-flexural buckling shall also meet
the requirements of 13.3.2.
The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this.
fey + fez
2
1 1
4fey fez
2
(fey + fez )
where
fey
2E
K yL y
ry
2EC
1
= 2 w2 + GJ 2
K ZL Z
Ar 0
fez
x 2+ y 2
= 1 0 2 0
r0
= the principal coordinates of the shear center with respect to the centroid of the
,y
0 0 cross-section.
r02 = x02 + y02 + rx2 + ry2
For asymmetric sections, fe is the smallest root of:
(fe fex )(fe fey )(fe fez ) f e2 (fe fey )
x0 2
( )
r0
f e2 (fe fex )
y0 2
( )
r0
=0
where
fex
2E
2
( )
K xL x
rx
The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this.
17C.6.5 Shear
Per section 13.4.1, the factored shear resistance, Vr, developed by the web of a flexural member, shall
be taken as
Vr = Av fs
where
Av = the shear area t h
w
hw
tw
a. f = 0.66f when
s
kv
440
fy
where
kv = the shear buckling coefficient defined as:
=4+
5.34
(s / h w )2
= 5.34 +
440
kv
fy
b. f = f when
s
cri
if s / h w < 1
4
(s / h w )2
<
hw
if s / h w 1
500
tw
kv
fy
where
fcri
= 290
fykv
(h w / t w )
kv = is as defined in (a)
500
kv
<
fy
c. f = f + f when
s
cri
t
hw
tw
620
kv
fy
where
ft the tension field post-buckling stress defined as:
= ka (0.50fy - 0.866fcri)
ka the aspect coefficient defined as:
1
1 + (s / h w )
620
d. f = f + f when
s
cre
t
where
kv
fy
<
hw
tw
= ka (0.50fy - 0.866fcre)
180, 000k v
(h w / t w )2
kv as defined in (a)
17C.6.6 Bending
The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the purpose of computing the
factored moment resistance is specified using the parameters UNB and UNT.
M r = 1.15M p1
0.28M p
M cr
cr
2
KL
EI yGJ +
( )IC
E
KL
M r = 1.15M y1
0.28M y
M cr
but not greater than My for class 3 sections and the value given in 13.5(c)(iii) for class
4 sections.
ii. When Mcr 0.67My,
Mr = Mcr
where Mcr and 2 are as defined in 13.6(a).
c. For closed sections and circular sections, Mcr shall be determined in accordance with section
13.5.
d. For biaxial bending, the member shall meet the following criterion:
M ux
M rx
M uy
M ry
1.0
Note: STAAD.Pro uses AISC LRFD guidelines for the design of channels, double angles,
tees, and single angle sections.
i. For tees and double angles:
=
EI yGJ
Lb
(B + 1 + B 2 )
where
B = 2.3(d / UNL) I y / J
minus sign considered for conservative side
ii. For channel sections:
When Mcr 0.67My:
My
M r = 1.15M y 1 0.28
0.9M y
M cr
M n = M ob 0.92 0.17 ob
My
M n = M y 1.92 1.17
My
M ob
1.5M y
where
Mob = 4.9E I z CB 2 + 0.052(lt / r )2 +
z
w
w
l2
for unequal leg angles.
Note: w is conservatively assumed as zero.
= CB
0.46Eb 2t 2
b
t
0.85U1xM ux
M rx
U1yM uy
M ry
1.0
where
Cu and
Mu
M ux
M rx
M uy
M ry
1.0
where
Mrx and Mry = as described in 13.5 or 13.6, as appropriate
U1xM ux
M rx
U1yM uy
M ry
1.0
Section Values of U1
In lieu of a more detailed analysis, the value of U1 for the axis under consideration, accounting for
the second-order effects due to the deformation of a member between its ends, shall be taken as:
U1 =
1
1 Cu / Ce
where
1 = for the axis under consideration as defined in 13.8.4
Ce 2EI
= 2
L
for the axis under consideration
a.
Tr
Mu
Mr
1.0
where
b.
Mr
Mu
Mr
T uZ pl
1.0
M rA
T uZ e
M rA
where
Mr = as defined in 13.5 or 13.6
Default
Value
-
Description
BEAM
CAN
Parameter
Name
CB
Default
Value
1.0
Description
CMY
1.0
CMZ
1.0
DFF
DJ1
DJ2
DMAX
1,000
DMIN
FU
345 Mpa
FYLD
300 Mpa
KT
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LT
Member
length
LY
Member
length
LZ
Member
length
Parameter
Name
MAIN
Default
Value
0
Description
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SSY
Sidesway parameter
0 - Sideway about local Y-axis.
1 - No sideway about local Yaxis.
SSZ
Sidesway parameter
0 - Sideway about local Z-axis.
1 - No sideway about local Zaxis.
STIFF
Member
length
TRACK
Track parameter
0. Print the design output at the
minimum detail level.
1. Print the design output at the
intermediate detail level.
2. Print the design output at maximum
detail level
UNB
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
18
Spanish Codes
18 Spanish Codes
Default Value
Description
BEAM
C1
C2
Parameter
Name
CB
Default Value
Description
DFF
None
DJ1
Start node
of member
DJ2
DMAX
25.4 meter
DMIN
ETA
255 MPa
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LVV
Member Length
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
Parameter
Name
MAIN
Default Value
Description
NSF
1.0
RATIO
TB
TRACK
UNF
UNL
Member Length
Default
Value
Description
CLB
1.5 in
CLS
1.5 in
CLT
1.5 in
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0 Face
of
Support
FC
4.0 ksi
FYMAIN
60 ksi
FYSEC
60 ksi
MAX
MAIN
Number
55 bar
MINMAIN
Number
10 bar
MINSEC
Number
10 bar
MMAG
1.0
NSE
CTION
12
REINF
0.0
Parameter
Name
SFACE
Default
Value
Description
0.0
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
19
Swedish Codes
19 Swedish Codes
Default
Value
-
Description
BEAM
BY
BZ
CB
CMY
CMZ
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
CY
CZ
1
1
DMAX
1 meter
DMIN
FYLD
235 MPa
MF
1.15
RATIO
SSY
SSZ
TRACK
UNL
Member
Length
Default
Value
-
Description
ACTAGE
70
BRACE
0.0
CLEAR
25 mm
DRYCIR
100
EFACE
0.0
ELY
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
1.0
ELZ
ENVIR
Environment class
1. LA Least aggressive
2. NA Aggressive
3. MA Very aggressive
FC
FYMAIN
35 N/mm 2
500 N/mm 2
LAGE
7 days
MAX
MAIN
32
MINMAIN
10
MOY
moy factor
MOZ
moz factor
NMAG
nmag factor
REIANG
RELHUM
40
RFACE
SFACE
STIRANG
90
STIRDIA
10 mm
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
TORANG
45
TRACK
10
20
American Aluminum Code
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing aluminum member design based on the ASD1994
Specifications for Aluminum Structures, Sixth Edition (October, 1994).
Design of members per ASD 1994 requires the STAAD US Specialized Design Codes SELECTCode
Pack.
Example
1 TO 5 TA ST CS12X11.8
9 TA ST I8.00X13.1
11 33 45 67 TA ST LS8.00X8.00X0.625
18 TA ST 1.50PipeX160
15 TA ST T(A-N)6.00X8.00X11.2
23 25 29 TA ST 20X12RectX.500Wall
Example
3 TA BACK C(A-N)7X3.61 SPACING 1.5
5 TA BACK C15X17.33 SP 0.75
Example
2 TA FRONT CS12X10.3 SP 1.0
4 TA FR CS10X10.1 SP 0.5
Example
14 TA LD LS4.00X3.00X0.375 SP 1.5
Example
12 TA SD L3.5X3X0.5 SP 0.25
13 TA SD L8X6X0.75 SP 1.0
Default Value
Description
ALCLAD
ALLOY
34
BEAM
0.0
DMAX
1000 in.
Parameter
Name
Default Value
DMIN
KT
Description
0.0 in
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LT
Member length
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
LY
Member length
LZ
Member length
PRODUCT
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
0.0
SSY
0.0
STIFF
Member length
Parameter
Name
STR
UCTURE
Default Value
Description
TRACK
UNL
Member length
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
WELD
Name
1100-H12
1100-H14
2014-T6
2014-T6510
2014-T6511
2014-T651
3003-H12
3003-H14
3003-H16
10
3003-H18
11
3004-H32
12
3004-H34
13
3004-H36
Value
Name
14
3004-H38
15
5005-H12
16
5005-H14
17
5005-H32
18
5005-H34
19
5050-H32
20
5050-H34
21
5052-H32
22
5052-H34
23
5083-H111
24
5086-H111
25
5086-H116
26
5086-H32
27
5086-H34
28
5454-H111
29
5454-H112
30
5456-H111
31
5456-H112
32
6005-T5
33
6105-T5
34
6061-T6
35
6061-T6510
36
6061-T6511
37
6061-T651
38
6063-T5
39
6063-T6
40
6351-T5
20A.5.1 Example
Sample input data for Aluminum Design
PARAMETER
CODE ALUMINUM
BEAM 1 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
ALLOY 35 ALL
PRODUCT 2 ALL
TRACK 3 ALL
SELECT ALL
ALCLAD 1 ALL
STRUCT 1 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
21
American Transmission Tower Code
21A. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE 10-97
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the American Transmission Tower code
ASCE10-97 Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures.
Design of members per ASCE 10-97 requires the STAAD USStd Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
The detailing requirements, such as provisioning of stiffeners and checking the local effects like
flange buckling, web crippling, etc.must be performed manually. It is assumed that you are
familiar with the basic concepts of Steel Design facilities available in STAAD. Please refer to
Section 2 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed information on this topic.
Default Value
Description
BEAM
1.0
CMY
CMZ
0.85 for
sidesway and
calculated for
no sidesway
DMAX
45.0 in.
DBL
0.75 in.
DMIN
0.0 in.
ELA
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
ELB
30 KSI
FYB
36 KSI
36.0 KSI
FYLD
KT
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LEG
0.0
LT
Member
Length
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
Parameter
Name
MAIN
Default Value
Description
NHL
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
SSZ
0.0
TRACK
0.0
UNB
Member
Length
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member
Length
Parameter
Name
Default Value
UNT
Member
Length
Description
Default
Value
Description
Must be specified as ASCE 52.
CODE
BEAM
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
DBL
0.75 in.
DMAX
45.0 in.
DMIN
0.0 in.
ELA
ELB
FVB
30 KSI
FYB
36 KSI
36.0 KSI
FYLD
KT
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LEG
0.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
LT
Member
Length
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
Description
MAIN
NHL
NSF
1.0
1.0
RATIO
0.0
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member
Length
CODE CHECKING procedures are similar to that of the AISC based design.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking.
Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code
Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of
the Member Selection command.
22
Steel Design per American Petroleum
Institute Code
The API Steel Design facility in STAAD is based on the API 2A-WSD standard, titled Recommended
Practice for Planning, Design and Constructing Fixed Offshore Platforms-Working Stress Design,
21st Edition (December 2000). Joint checks includes Errata and Supplements 1, 2 & 3 of the code.
Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design;
Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values; and
These operations may be repeated any number of times depending upon the design requirements.
The basic process is as follows:
1. Define the STAAD model geometry, loading, and analysis.
2. Run the analysis and API design which creates the Geometry file (file extension .PUN) and
give preliminary design results.
3. Check and modify the Geometry file as necessary.
4. Re-run the analysis to read the modified Geometry file for the final design results.
22A.1.1 Limitations
The parameter SELECT 1.0 should not be used while carrying out punching shear checks. It can
be used in initial runs for member selection.
No classification of the joint is performed using the loading. For the initial run of an API code
check, all joints will be assumed to be a T/Y joint. See "22A.8 Joint Design" for details.
No hydrostatic checks are performed.
F is the maximum torsional shear stress per Clause 3.2.4-3 of the API code.
vt
2 2
E
Fy
xe
or F
xc
is substituted for F .
xy
Where:
F = the elastic local buckling stress calculated with C, the critical elastic buckling
xe
coefficient = 0.3 (3.2.2-3)
F
xc
Definitions
= Brace included rage
g = Gap between braces
t = Brace wall thickness at intersection
T = Chord wall thickness at intersection
d = Brace outside diameter
D = Chord outside diameter
= d/D
= D/(2T)
= t/T
Joint Validity
The validity range of the joints that are identified will be checked as per Cl. 4.3.1 of the code. The
conditions to be checked for each joint are as given below:
0.2 1.0
10 50
30 90
F = 90 ksi (500 MPa)
y
If any of these conditions are not satisfied for the joint under consideration, the programissues a
warning message corresponding to the invalid parameter(s). The program will, however, perform
the joint checks as the code allows for the design of such joints with modified values of yield
strength. You can use the FYLD parameter to reset the yield strength.
Joint Capacity
The capacity of the joint, both the axial capacity and the moment capacity is
The allowable capacity for brace axial load, P , is evaluated as:
a
Pa = Q uQ f
F ycT
FSJsin
M a = Q uQ f
F ycT d
FSJsin
Where:
F = the yield stress of the chord member at the joint (or 0.8 of the tensile stress, if
y
less)
FSJ = the factor of safety parameter (1.6 by default)
Q and Q are the strength factor and the Chord factor that are to be determined
u
f
based on the joint type. The strength factor, Q , is to be determined as given in
u
Section 4.3.3 of the code (ref. Table. 4.3-1 of the APIcode).
FSJPc
FSJM c
2
Q f = 1 + C1
C2 M C3A
P
y
p
A=
FSJPc
FSJM c
P + M
y
p
P = axial load
c
2
2
M ipb
+ M opb
Mc =
Joint Type
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.8
Joint Type
X joints under brace
axial loading
0.9
0.2
0.5
= 1.0
-0.2
0.4
0.2
0.4
Note: For values of between 0.9 and 1.0, coefficients are linearly interpolated between listed
values.
For joints that are a mixture of K, X, or Y joints, the capacity of the joint is evaluated as a weighted
average of the capacities of each joint.
In case the joint is subjected to combined axial load and bending moments (in-plane and/or outof-plane), the program performs the following interaction check as given by Cl 4.3.6 of the code:
P
Pa
( )
M
M a ipb
M
Ma
1.0
opb
Default Value
Description
Parameter
Name
BEAM
Default Value
1.0
Description
Beam parameter:
0.0 = design only for end
moments or those at
locations specified by the
SECTION command.
1.0 = calculate moments
at twelfth points along
the beam, and use the
maximum Mz location
for design.
2.0 = Same for BEAM 1.0,
but additional check is
made at each end.
CB
1.0
CMY
DMAX
100.0 in
DMIN
0.0
FSJ
1.6
CMZ
FYLD
36 ksi
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
Parameter
Name
MAIN
Default Value
0.0
Description
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
SSZ
0.0
TRACK
0.0
UNF
1.0
UNL
Member Length
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
WELD
1.16 in.
WSTR
0.4 X FLYD
Minimum thickness
Allowable welding stress
Note: The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used for member selection.
Member selection can be performed with all types of hollow steel sections.
Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a user created table will be
limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as
prismatic.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of
the Member Selection command.
22A.6.1 Reference
1 Ref I: Boone, TJ. Yura, JA. and Hoadley, PW. Ultimate Strength if Tubular Joints Chord Stress
Effects, OTC 4828, 1984
MEMBER
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
6 ST PIP40610.0
(BRITISH SECTIONS)
PASS
API 3.3.1-2
2.76 T
0.00
7 ST PIP40610.0
(BRITISH SECTIONS)
PASS
API 3.3.1-3
98.14 C
0.00
0.024
5.12
2
3.00
0.078
5.12
2
0.00
(BRITISH SECTIONS)
PASS
API 3.3.1-3
0.130
2
67.16 C
0.00
0.29
4.24
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| MEMB=
14, UNIT NEW-MMS ,L= 4243. AX= 4670. SZ= 208157. SY= 208157.|
| KL/R-Y= 64.6 CB= 1.00 YLD= 248.21 ALLOWABLE STRESSES: FCZ= 186.2 |
| FTZ= 186.2 FCY= 186.2 FTY= 186.2 FA= 117.6 FT= 148.9
FV=
99.3 |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
7
7
7
CHORD NO:
CHORD NO:
CHORD NO:
7
7
11
BRACE NO:
BRACE NO:
BRACE NO:
10
13
14
RATIO:
RATIO:
RATIO:
0.049
0.245
0.222
PASS
PASS
PASS
AXIAL
:
66.995
2
273.398
0.245
PASS
IP BENDING
:
0.080
2
33.228
0.002
PASS
INTERACTION :
2
0.245
PASS
---------------------------------------------------------------------CRITICAL
:
2
0.245
PASS
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Material Strength
The API code states in Cl. 4.2.1 that the value of yield stress of the chord member to be used in the
calculation of the joint capacity should be limited to 0.8 times the tensile strength of the chord for
materials with a yield stress less than or equal to 500 MPa.
The yield stress to be used in the joint capacity checks value is specified in the joint data file
(filename.PUN). For every joint, the value specified in the FYLD column will be used as the yield
strength to be used for the joint capacity checks. When the file is created for the first time by the
program, a default value of 36 ksi is used for all joints. The value used for each joint check will also
be reported in the output file.
Note: All the fields in the joint data file (*.PUN file) are to be in imperial units.
ratios will be reported as the critical ratio. The program also reports a PASS/FAIL status for the
joint.
See "22A.2.6 Simple Joints: Capacity Checks" for details of capacity checks performed.
Joint Classification
Clause of 4.2.4 of the API code essentially classifies a joint into one of the three basic types: K, X,
and Y. Joint classification is the process whereby the axial load in a given brace is subdivided into
its K, X, and Y components corresponding to the three joint types. A jointas considered in the
codeis the connection between a "chord" and a "brace" that are in the same plane. The program
considers any two members to be in the same plane if they lie in planes that are within 15 degrees
of each other. The classification of a joint can also be a mixture of any of the basic types mentioned
above. Once the classification of a joint has been identified, the capacity of that joint is then
evaluated per Section 4.3 of the code.
The program automatically identifies the joints in a structure and identifies the chord and the
brace members. The program applies the 15 rule to determine the members in a plane and then
determines the joint as being the intersection point of these members. Since a joint is between a
chord and a brace member, the program considers two members at a time and then proceeds to
identify the chord and the brace member at that joint. The program assumes the member with the
larger diameter among the two members as the chord member and the other is considered as the
brace. If both members have the same diameter, the chord is assumed to be the member with the
thicker wall. If both the diameter and thickness of the members are identical, the program will
assume the most horizontal member to be the chord. To be automatically considered as a chord
member, the member has to be continuous across the joint. The user can always edit the joint data
file (*.PUN) to add or delete new BRACE-CHORD joints.
The chord and brace member numbers (from the STAAD input file) are saved under the CHORD and
BRACE columns in the filename.PUN file.
When the joint data file (.PUN)is created by the program, a default joint Class Y is assumed for the
initial joint checks. This is indicated by the K, X, and Y column values being set to 0, 0, and 1
respectively. Since the API code allows for a mixed joint classification, you must manually vary the
contribution factors for K, X, and Y joint classes for a given joint. For example, if a joint is to be
25% K, 25% X, and 50% Y, then you must assign K column value of 0.25, X column value of 0.25,
and a Y column value of 0.50 for that joint. The program will verify that the supplied contributions
sum to 1.0.
If the joint has a gap (i.e., a K-GAP joint), the gap distance (in inches) must be supplied in the
GAPcolumn. The value to be provided will be the actual gap between the brace members at the
joint. An overlap can be specified by setting the gap to a negative value. The overlapping brace in
this case can then be indicated by specifying the member number at the OBRACE (Overlapping
brace) column in the data file.
Overlapping Joints
Clause 4.4 of the API discusses overlapping joints. Checks for overlapping joints will be performed
as described Section 22A.2.6. The difference will be in that the gap value, g, will be taken as
negative in evaluating the various factors.
If the axial loads in the overlapping brace and the through brace have the same sign, the axial load
in the through brace will be increased to allow for the loads in the overlapping brace. This will be
achieved by allowing a portion of the overlapping brace load equal to the proportion of the
overlapping brace area to be added to the axial load in the through brace.
Note: The program issues a warning for any joint overlap is less than 0.25D.
General Format
*BRACE CHORD K X Y D T d t GAP FYLD OBRACE TW SWAP
b# c# K% X% Y% Dc Tc db tb gap fy ob tw swap
Where:
b# = the brace member number
c# = the chord member number
K%, X%, and Y% = The fractional contributions of K-type, X type and Y-type,
respectively. Initially the joints will be classed as Y (i.e., K=0, X=0 and Y=1).
db, tb = Diameter and thickness of BRACE member
Dc, Tc = Diameter and thickness of CHORD member
gap = Distance required to calculate gap factor for K bracing. Initially, the value of
GAP is assumed as 0. An overlap can be specified by setting the gap to a negative
value.
fy = the yield stress to be used in the joint capacity checks
ob = member number of the overlapping brace in an overlap joint (i.e., a gap value less
than zero)
tw = Used in overlap K-joint, taken as the lesser of the weld throat thickness or
thickness t of the thinner brace in inches
swap = If parameter SWAP 0 is used then major moment Mz is taken for In Plane
Bending (IPB). SWAP 1 uses the minor moment My as the IPB.
Example
*BRACE
10
13
14
CHORD
7
7
11
K
0.000
0.000
0.000
X
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y
1.000
1.000
1.000
D
16.000
16.000
16.000
T
0.394
0.394
0.394
d
16.000
7.626
7.626
t
0.394
0.315
0.315
GAP
0.00
0.00
0.00
23
ANSI/AISC N690 Design Codes
C myfby
SMY Fby 1
F ey
fa
C mzfbz
f
SMZ Fbz1 a
F
ez
1.0
and Q1.6-1b:
fa
SFC 0.6F y
fby
SMY Fby
fbz
SMZ Fbz
1.0
fby
SMY Fby
fbz
SMZ Fbz
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would result in a
misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and [0.6 0.4(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy equation
Q1.6-3:
fa
SFT 0.6F y
fby
SMY Fby
fbz
SMZ Fbz
1.0
Where:
SFC, SFT, SMZ, and SMY are stress limit coefficient parameters used to control the
components of the interaction equations. Refer to Table 23A.1 for details.
Default
Value
-
Description
BEAM
Beam parameter
0. Perform design at ends and those
locations in the SECTIONcommand.
1. Perform design at ends and at 1/12th
section locations along the member
length.
Parameter
Name
CAN
Default
Value
0
Description
CB
1.0
CMY
CMZ
COMPOSITE
0.85 for
sidesway
and
calculated
for no
sidesway
0
CONDIA
CONHEIGHT
CYCLES
DFF
0.625 in
2.5 in
500,000
None
(Mandatory
for
deflection
check)
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
Description
DLR2
0.4
DLRATIO
0.4
DMAX
45 inch
DMIN
0.0 inch
EFFWIDTH
1/4 Member
Length
FYLD
36 KSI
FPC
3 KSI
FSS
FU
60 KSI
FYLD
46 KSI
KX
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LX
Member
Length
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
0.0
NSF
1.0
OVR
1.0
PLTHICK
PLTWIDTH
None
PROFILE
RATIO
1.0
RIBHEIGHT
RIBWIDTH
SFC
1.0
SFT
1.0
Parameter
Name
SHE
Default
Value
0
Description
SHORING
SLABTHICK
4 in
SMY
1.0
SMZ
1.0
SSY
SSZ
STIFF
Member
length or
depth
whichever is
greater
STYPE
0.0
Parameter
Name
TAPER
Default
Value
1
Description
TMAIN
TORSION
TRACK
0.0
UNB
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
WELD
WMAX
1 in
WMIN
0.625 in
WSTR
0.4Fyld
23A.3 Examples
23A.2.1 Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units
2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command
23A.3 Examples
These example problems are included for the verification of design results.
23A.3.1 Example 1
This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\N690\N690_case1.std
Solution
Allowable Compressive Stress:
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r)max = 171.31
Yield Stress of Steel, F = 36 ksi
y
Comparison
Table 23A.2-ANSI-AISC N690-1994 Code Verification
Problem 1
Value of
F (ks)
a
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 30-Nov-07
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 4 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
5.21
5.22
Negligible
23A.3 Examples
Output
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is shown below:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ANSI N690-1994)
v1.0
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN INCH UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
===|===
------------ |
|MEMBER
1 * | AISC SECTIONS
|
|
AX =
3.55 |
|
* | ST W6X12
|
|
--Z AY =
1.25 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
|
AZ =
1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* ===============================
===|===
SY =
1.50 |
|
*
SZ =
7.33 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (FT)=
13.12 --->|
RY =
0.92 |
|*************
RZ =
2.50 |
|
|
|
7.4 (KIP-FEET)
|
|PARAMETER
|
L1
STRESSES
|
|IN KIP INCH
|
IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- +
L1
L1
-------------|
| KL/R-Y= 171.31 |
FA =
5.22 |
| KL/R-Z= 63.12 +
L1
L1
fa =
0.60 |
| UNL
= 157.48 |
FCZ = 14.15 |
| CB
=
1.00 +
L1
L1
FTZ = 21.60 |
23A.3 Examples
| CMY
=
0.85 |
L1
L1
FCY = 27.00 |
| CMZ
=
0.85 +
FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0
L0 fbz = 12.07 |
| NSF
=
1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---|
fby =
0.00 |
| DFF
=
0.00 -0.4
Fey =
4.65 |
| dff=
0.00
ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE
Fez = 34.26 |
| (KL/R)max = 171.31
(WITH LOAD NO.)
FV = 14.40 |
|
fv =
0.90 |
|
|
|
MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)
|
|
------------------------|
|
|
|
AXIAL
SHEAR-Y
SHEAR-Z
MOMENT-Y
MOMENT-Z
|
|
|
|
VALUE
2.1
1.1
0.0
0.0
7.4
|
|
LOCATION
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.6
|
|
LOADING
3
1
0
0
1
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
ANSI Q1.6-2
0.968
3
|
|
2.14 C
0.00
-7.38
6.56
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
23A.3.2 Example 2
This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\N690\N690_case2.std
Solution
Allowable Compressive Stress:
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r)max = 85.65
Yield Stress of Steel, F = 36 ksi
y
Cc =
[(22 E)/Fy]1/2
= 127.68
23A.3 Examples
Comparison
Table 23A.3-ANSI-AISC N690-1994 Code Verification
Problem 2
Value of
F (ks)
a
Reference
9.07
STAAD.Pro
9.08
Difference
Negligible
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 30-Nov-07
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
3 0 0 1; 4 2 0 1;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
2 3 4;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
2 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
3 PINNED
4 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
UNIT METER KIP
2 CON GY -2.24809 1
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 2 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 2
JOINT LOAD
4 FX -1
LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3
1 1.0 2 9.5
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
23A.3 Examples
Output
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is shown below:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ANSI N690-1994)
v1.0
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN INCH UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
===|===
------------ |
|MEMBER
2 * | AISC SECTIONS
|
|
AX =
3.55 |
|
* | ST W6X12
|
|
--Z AY =
1.25 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
|
AZ =
1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* ===============================
===|===
SY =
1.50 |
|
*
SZ =
7.33 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (FT)=
6.56 --->|
RY =
0.92 |
|*************
RZ =
2.50 |
|
|
|
3.7 (KIP-FEET)
|
|PARAMETER
|
L1
STRESSES
|
|IN KIP INCH
|
IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- +
L1
L1
-------------|
| KL/R-Y= 85.65 |
FA =
9.08 |
| KL/R-Z= 31.56 +
L1
fa =
0.60 |
| UNL
= 78.74 |
L1
FCZ = 21.60 |
| CB
=
1.00 +
L1
L1
FTZ = 21.60 |
| CMY
=
0.85 |
L1
FCY = 27.00 |
| CMZ
=
0.85 +
L1
FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0
L0 fbz =
6.04 |
| NSF
=
1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---|
fby =
0.00 |
| DFF
=
0.00 -0.2
Fey = 18.60 |
| dff=
0.00
ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE
Fez = 137.05 |
| (KL/R)max = 85.65
(WITH LOAD NO.)
FV = 14.40 |
|
fv =
0.90 |
|
|
|
MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)
|
|
------------------------|
|
|
|
AXIAL
SHEAR-Y
SHEAR-Z
MOMENT-Y
MOMENT-Z
|
|
|
|
VALUE
2.1
1.1
0.0
0.0
3.7
|
|
LOCATION
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
3.3
|
|
LOADING
3
1
0
0
1
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
ANSI Q1.6-2
0.346
3
|
|
2.14 C
0.00
-3.69
3.28
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
23A.3 Examples
23A.3.3 Example 3
This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\N690\N690_case3.std
Solution
Allowable Compressive Stress:
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r)max = 122.06
Yield Stress of Steel, F = 36 ksi
y
Cc =
[(22 E)/Fy]1/2
= 127.68
Comparison
Table 23A.4-ANSI-AISC N690-1994 Code Verification
Problem 3
Value of
F (ks)
a
Reference
7.08
STAAD.Pro
7.08
Difference
None
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 30-Nov-07
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 2.85 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
23A.3 Examples
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -10 2
UNIT METER KIP
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 2 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 2
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -1
LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3
1 1.0 2 9.5
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is shown below:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ANSI N690-1994)
v1.0
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
Y
PROPERTIES
|
|*************
|
IN INCH UNIT |
|
* |=============================|
===|===
------------ |
|MEMBER
1 * | AISC SECTIONS
|
|
AX =
3.55 |
|
* | ST W6X12
|
|
--Z AY =
1.25 |
|DESIGN CODE * |
|
|
AZ =
1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* ===============================
===|===
SY =
1.50 |
|
*
SZ =
7.33 |
|
* |<---LENGTH (FT)=
9.35 --->|
RY =
0.92 |
|*************
RZ =
2.50 |
|
|
|
4.2 (KIP-FEET)
|
|PARAMETER
|
L1
STRESSES
|
|IN KIP INCH
|
L1
IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- +
L1
-------------|
| KL/R-Y= 122.06 |
L1
FA =
7.08 |
| KL/R-Z= 44.97 +
L1
fa =
0.60 |
| UNL
= 112.20 |
FCZ = 19.86 |
| CB
=
1.00 +
L1
L1
FTZ = 21.60 |
| CMY
=
0.85 |
L1
FCY = 27.00 |
| CMZ
=
0.85 +
L1
FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0
L0 fbz =
6.84 |
| NSF
=
1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---|
fby =
0.00 |
| DFF
=
0.00 -0.2
Fey =
9.16 |
| dff=
0.00
ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE
Fez = 67.49 |
| (KL/R)max = 122.06
(WITH LOAD NO.)
FV = 14.40 |
|
fv =
0.54 |
|
|
|
MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)
|
|
------------------------|
|
|
|
AXIAL
SHEAR-Y
SHEAR-Z
MOMENT-Y
MOMENT-Z
|
23A.3 Examples
|
|
|
VALUE
2.1
1.6
0.0
0.0
4.2
|
|
LOCATION
0.0
7.0
0.0
0.0
6.2
|
|
LOADING
3
1
0
0
1
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|*
DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)
*|
|*
-------------*|
|*
*|
|*
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
*|
|
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
|
|
======================================================
|
|
PASS
ANSI Q1.6-2
0.429
3
|
|
2.14 C
0.00
-4.18
6.23
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
23B.1.1 Slenderness
The maximum allowable slenderness ratio in Compression (KL/r_min), as per clause Q1.8.4 of the
code shall not exceed 200. And the maximum allowable slenderness ratio in Tension (L/r_min)
shall not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for bracing members and other secondary
members.
This can be controlled by using the existing MAIN and TMAIN parameters respectively.
The default value of MAIN is 200 and for TMAIN is 240.
23B.1.3 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as 0.60Fy, but not more than 0.5Fu on the
Effective Net area, as per section Q1.5.1.1.
The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with Q1.14, and the NSF parameter can be
utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (Ae) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted by
bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be computed
from the formula (ref. Q1.14),
Ae = CtAn
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
23B.1.4 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns which meet the provisions of section Q1.9, except
those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by Q1.5.1.3. The allowable
compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be in accordance to
section Q1.5.9.
A. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) Cc,
Fa = [1 - (Kl/r)2 /(2Cc2 )]Fy / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8Cc)] - [(Kl/r)3 /(8Cc3 )]}
Where:
Cc = [(22 E)/Fy]1/2
2. When (Kl/r) > Cc,
Fa = 122 E/[23(kL/r)2 ]
B. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
1. When (Kl/r) 120,
Fa = Fy/2.15 - [(Fy/2.16 - 6)/120](kL/r)
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,
Fa = 12 - (KL/r)/20
If the provisions of the section Q1.9 are not satisfied,
A. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor Q is introduced. Detailed values
s
of Qs for different shapes are given in Section QC2.
B. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width b is introduced.
e
C myfby
f
SMY Fby 1 a
F ey
C mzfbz
f
SMZ Fbz1 a
F ez
1.0
and Q1.6-1b
fa
SFC 0.6F y
fby
SMY Fby
fbz
SMZ Fbz
1.0
fby
SMY Fby
fbz
SMZ Fbz
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would result in a
misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and [0.6 0.4(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy equation Q
1.6-1b:
fa
SFT 0.6F y
fby
SMY Fby
fbz
SMZ Fbz
1.0
Where SFC, SFT, SMZ, and SMY are stress limit coefficient parameters used to control the
components of the interaction equations. Refer to Table 23B.1 for details.
Default
Value
Description
CAN
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
CB
1.0
Description
CMY
CMZ
0.85 for
sidesway and
calculated
for no
sidesway
CT
DFF
0.75
None
"Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local
(Mandatory deflection
for deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
45 inch
DMIN
0.0 inch
FU
60 KSI
FYLD
36 KSI
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
Parameter
Name
MAIN
Default
Value
0.0
Description
NSF
PROFILE
1.0
None
RATIO
1.0
SFC
1.0
SFT
1.0
SMY
1.0
SMZ
1.0
STIFF
Member
length or
depth
whichever is
greater
STYPE
0.0
TMAIN
300 for
Truss
member
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
0.0
TRACK
0 = Minimum detail
1 = Intermediate detail level
2 = Maximum detail
UNB
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
23B.3.1 Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units
2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command
23B.5 Examples
These example problems are included for the verification of design results.
23B.5 Examples
Problem
A 10 ft long simply supported beam subject to axial (+/- 10 kip) and bending loads (3 kip/ft) in both
the local y and z axis. The beam is a 5" diameter, Schedule 40 Pipe section made from Grade 36
steel.
Solution
Section Properties:
Ax = 4.30 in.2
Iy = Iz = 15.20 in.4
r = (15.20/4.30)1/2 = 1.88 in.
O.D. = 5.56 in., t = 0.26 in.
Sx = Sy = 15.20 in.4 2/5.56 in. = 5.468 in.3
Cc =
[(22 E)/Fy]1/2
= 127.68
(Kl/r)max < Cc
23B.5 Examples
1.0
Fc = Fy
5
3
2
(Kl / r )
2
2C c
3(Kl / r )
8C c
(Kl / r )
8C c3
1.0
3
= 36ksi
5
3
2
(63.83 )
2
2(127.68 )
3(63.83 )
8(127.68 )
(63.83 )
= 17.06ksi
8(127.68 )
Comparison
Table 23B.2-ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code Verification Problem 1
Condition
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
0.144
Tension
0.108
(0.107, CT = 1.0)
Compression
0.136
0.136
None
23B.5 Examples
Condition
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
0.815
2.51%
0.844
Negligible
0.853
Tension +Bending
(0.817, CT = 1.0)
Compression +Bending
0.845
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 09-Dec-09
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 10 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176e+006
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT INCHES KIP
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST PIPS50
UNIT FEET KIP
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX
LOAD 1 TENSION ONLY
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10
LOAD 2 COMPRESSION ONLY
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -10
LOAD 3 TENSION+BENDING
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GZ 0.3
LOAD 4 COMPRESSION+BENDING
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -10
MEMBER LOAD
23B.5 Examples
1 UNI GZ 0.3
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
UNIT INCHES KIP
LOAD LIST 1
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 all
CHECK CODE ALL
** Following to check if the net area is used in calculating tensile stress
PARAMETER 11
CODE AISC N690 1984
FU 40 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 2
PARAMETER 2
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 3
PARAMETER 3
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
23B.5 Examples
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 4
PARAMETER 4
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST ALL
PARAMETER 5
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2 output for the final parameter set is shown here:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AISC N690 1984)
********************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KIP
MEMBER
TABLE
v1.0
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
23B.5 Examples
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1
(AISC SECTIONS)
PASS
Q1.6-Eqn 2
0.844
4
10.00 C
44.84
47.02
120.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK:
ACTUAL RATIO: 63.83 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES:
(UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.71E+01 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.38E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.38E+01 |
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 2.33E+00 FBZ: 8.60E+00 FBY: 8.20E+00 SHEAR: 9.12E-01
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX:
4.30 AYY:
2.27 AZZ:
2.27 RZZ: 1.88 RYY: 1.88
|
| SZZ:
5.46 SYY:
5.46
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 63.83
KL/R-Y: 63.83
UNL:
30.0
CMZ: 0.60
CMY: 0.60
|
| CB: 1.00
FYLD:
36.00
FU:
58.00
NET SECTION FACTOR: 1.00
|
| CT: 0.75
STEEL TYPE: 0.0
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE
RATIO LOAD
FX
VY
VZ
MZ
MY
|
|
|
|
|
ST
PIPS50
TENSION
COMPRESSION
COMP&BEND
TEN&BEND
0.108
0.136
0.844
0.815
1
2
4
3
1.00E+01
1.00E+01
1.00E+01
1.00E+01
4.70E+01 4.48E+01
4.70E+01 4.48E+01
|
|
|
|
| SHEAR-Y
0.063
3
1.96E+00
|
| SHEAR-Z
0.060
3
1.87E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Problem
A 12 ft long simply supported beam subject to uniform load (3 kip/ft). The beam is a W6x12 section
made from Grade 36 steel.
Solution
Section Properties:
A = 3.55 in.2
d = 6.03 in.
tw = 0.230 in.
23B.5 Examples
Sz = 7.31 in.3
Allowable Bending Stress:
Fbz = 0.66Fy = 0.66(36 ksi) = 23.76 ksi
Actual Bending Stress (include member selfweight in Y dir.):
Mz = 0.312 kip/ft (12 ft)2 /8 (12 in./ft) = 67.4 inkip
fbz = 67.4 inkip/7.31 in.3 = 9.22 ksi
Stress Ratio = 9.22 ksi/ 23.76 ksi = 0.388 < 1.0, OK
Allowable Shear Stress:
Fv = 0.4Fy = 0.4(36 ksi) = 14.40 ksi
Actual Shear Stress:
Vz = 0.5(12 ft)(0.312 kip/ft) = 1.872 kip
fvz = 1.872 kip/(6.03 in. x 0.230 in.) = 1.35 ksi
Stress Ratio = 1.35 ksi/ 14.40 ksi = 0.094 <1.0, OK.
Comparison
Table 23B.3-ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code Verification Problem 3
Condition
Reference
STAAD.Pro
Difference
Bending
0.388
0.387
Negligible
Shear
0.094
0.094
None
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 09-Dec-09
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 12 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176e+006
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
23B.5 Examples
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
SELFWEIGHT Y -1 ALL
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
*UNIT KIP INCH
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 3 ALL
UNT 3 ALL
UNIT KIP INCH
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2 output for the final parameter set is shown here:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AISC N690 1984)
********************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KIP
MEMBER
v1.0
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1
TABLE
ST
W6X12
(AISC SECTIONS)
PASS
Q1.6-Eqn 2
0.387
1
0.00 T
0.00
-67.40
72.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK:
ACTUAL RATIO: 156.64 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 300.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES:
(UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 6.09E+00 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.70E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.70E+01 |
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 0.00E+00 FBZ: 9.20E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 0.00E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX:
3.55 AYY:
1.39 AZZ:
1.49 RZZ: 2.50 RYY: 0.92
|
| SZZ:
7.33 SYY:
1.50
|
23B.5 Examples
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 57.71
KL/R-Y:156.64
UNL:
36.0
CMZ: 0.60
CMY: 0.60
|
| CB: 1.00
FYLD:
36.00
FU:
58.00
NET SECTION FACTOR: 1.00
|
| CT: 0.75
STEEL TYPE: 0.0
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE
RATIO LOAD
FX
VY
VZ
MZ
MY
|
| TENSION
0.000
1
0.00E+00
|
| COMPRESSION 0.000
1
0.00E+00
|
| COMP&BEND
0.387
1
0.00E+00
6.74E+01 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND
0.000
1
0.00E+00
6.74E+01 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y
0.094
1
1.87E+00
|
| SHEAR-Z
0.000
1
0.00E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
24
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Nuclear Facility (ASME NF) Codes
24A.1.1 Slenderness
As per clause XVII-2223 of NF-3000 1974, the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall
not exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240
for main members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default
limit for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
24A.1.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than (0.5*F ) on
y
u
the Net area.
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with the clause XVII-2283 of NF-3000 1974,
n
and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
24A.1.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns shall be as required by clause XVII-2213 of NF-3000
1974.
(KL / r )
1
2C 2
c
Fa = Fy
5/3+
3(KL / r )
8C c
(KL / r )
8C c3
Where:
2 2E
Cc =
Fy
Fa =
12 E
23(KL / r )2
Fa [Eq.(a1 ) or Eq.(a2 )]
( )
1.6
l
200r
253t
f
50.3
1
(b / t )
253t
f
44.3
1
(b / t )
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual area is
a
introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members
containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
2
(KL / r )
Q sQ a 1
2C 2
c
Fa = Fy
5/3+
3(KL / r )
8Cc
3
(KL / r )
3
8C c
Where:
C c =
2 2E
Q sQ aF y
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not exceed
190/F .
y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than boxshaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /F nor 20000/(d/A )F .
f
b. For noncompact and slender elements, clause XVII-2214.2 and XVII-2214.5 of NF-3000 1974
are followed respectively.
c. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is:
F = 0.60*F
b
F = 0.75*F
b
C mzfbz
Fa
(1 fa / F ex )Fbx
C myfby
(1 fa / F ey )Fby
1.0
and
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would result in a
misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and 0.6 0.4(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
Where:
Cv =
Cv =
45, 000k
F y (h / t ) 2
190
h/t
k
Fy
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and the
web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
Default Value
Description
Parameter
Name
CAN
Default Value
Description
CB
1.0
CMY
CMZ
0.85 for
sidesway and
calculated for
no sidesway
CT
0.75
DFF
None
(Mandatory
for deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
DMAX
45 inch
DMIN
0.0 inch
FYLD
36 KSI
FU
60 KSI
Parameter
Name
KBK
Default Value
1.0
Description
KS
1.0
KV
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
0.0
NSF
PROFILE
RATIO
1.0
None
1.0
Parameter
Name
SRL
Default Value
Description
STIFF
Member
length or
depth
whichever is
greater
TMAIN
300 for
Truss
member
TRACK
0.0
UNB
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
24A.5 Example
A cantilever beam of length 30 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and 5 kip
lateral load. The beam is assigned with W24X104 steel member and is designed in accordance with
ASME NF3000 1974.
The corresponding input of STAAD input editor file is shown as below:
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 18-Jun-08
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT INCHES KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 30 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST W24X104
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5 FY -5
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS
PRINT MEMBER FORCES
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1974
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
24A.5 Example
KY 0.9 ALL
KZ 0.9 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
v2.0
MEMBER
TABLE
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST
W24X104
(AISC SECTIONS)
PASS
NF-74-EQN-21
0.032
1
5.00 C
0.00
150.00
0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK:
ACTUAL RATIO:
9.30 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES:
(UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 2.07E+01 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.70E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.70E+01 |
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.63E-01 FBZ: 5.83E-01 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 4.15E-01
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX: 30.70 AYY: 12.05 AZZ: 12.80 RZZ: 10.05 RYY: 2.90
|
| SZZ:
257.26 SYY:
40.47
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 2.69
KL/R-Y: 9.30
UNL:
30.0
CMZ: 1.00
CMY: 1.00
|
| CB: 1.75
FYLD:
36.00
FU:
58.00
NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.85
|
| KS:1.000 KV:1.000 KBK:1.000
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE
RATIO LOAD
FX
VY
VZ
MZ
MY
|
| TENSION
0.000
0
0.00E+00
|
| COMPRESSION 0.008
1
5.00E+00
|
| COMP&BEND
0.032
1
5.00E+00
1.50E+02 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND
0.000
1
5.00E+00
1.50E+02 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y
0.029
1
5.00E+00
|
| SHEAR-Z
0.000
0
0.00E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
24B.1.1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200, and
the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main members
and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS
members in Tension is set at 300.
24B.1.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than (0.5*F ) on
y
u
the Effective Net area.
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c), and
n
the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted by
e
bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be computed
from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A =C *A
e
t
n
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and
(3).
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
24B.1.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel
shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from
austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable compressive stress for
member elements other than columns constructed by any material, including austenitic stainless
steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) < Cc,
2
(KL / r )
1
2
2C c
Fa = Fy
5/3+
3(KL / r )
8C c
(KL / r )
8C c3
Where:
2 2E
Cc =
Fy
Fa =
12 E
23(KL / r )2
Fa [Eq.(a1 ) or Eq.(a2 )]
1.6
( )
l
200r
Fa = Fy 0.47
KL / r
444
Fa = Fy 0.40
KL / r
600
253t
f
50.3
1
(b / t )
253t
f
44.3
1
(b / t )
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual area is
a
introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members
containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
Fa = Fy
(KL / r )
Q sQ a 1
2C 2
c
5/3+
3(KL / r )
8C c
(KL / r )
8C c3
Where:
C c =
2 2E
Q sQ aF y
F = 0.66F
b
y
If meeting the requirements of this member of:
a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression
flange shall not exceed 65/F .
y
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not
exceed 190/F .
y
c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed
d / t =
d / t =
640
Fy
257
Fy
fa
1 3.74 F
y when f /F 0.16
a y
C mzfbz
(1 fa / F ex )Fbx
C myfby
(1 fa / F ey )Fby
and
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
1.0
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would result in a
misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and 0.6 0.4(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
Where:
Cv =
Cv =
45, 000k
F y (h / t ) 2
190
h/t
k
Fy
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and the
web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
Default Value
CODE
Description
CAN
CB
1.0
CT
0.75
Parameter
Name
CMY
Default Value
Description
DFF
None
(Mandatory for
deflection check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member
CMZ
DMAX
45 inch
DMIN
0.0 inch
FYLD
36 KSI
FU
60 KSI
KBK
1.0
KS
1.0
KV
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
MAIN
0.0
NSF
PROFILE
1.0
None
RATIO
1.0
SRL
STIFF
Member length or
depth whichever is
greater
STYPE
0.0
Parameter
Name
TMAIN
Default Value
Description
0.0
UNB
Member Length
UNT
Member Length
24B.5 Example
A cantilever beam of length 100 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and a
uniformly distributed load of 1 kip/inch over the whole span. The beam is assigned with B571806
steel member and is designed in accordance with ASME NF3000 1989.
The corresponding input of STAAD input editor file is shown as below:
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
24B.5 Example
v2.0
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
TABLE
ST
B571806
(AISC SECTIONS)
PASS
SHEAR Y
0.770
1
5.00 C
0.00
5000.00
0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK:
ACTUAL RATIO: 75.08 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES:
(UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.13E+01 FCZ: 2.08E+01 FCY: 2.31E+01 FTZ: 2.16E+01 FTY: 2.31E+01 |
24B.5 Example
| SHEAR: 5.18E+00
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.06E-01 FBZ: 5.86E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 3.99E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX: 47.00 AYY: 25.08 AZZ: 15.00 RZZ: 22.80 RYY: 3.60
|
| SZZ:
853.77 SYY:
67.54
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 11.84
KL/R-Y: 75.08
UNL: 360.0
CMZ: 1.00
CMY: 1.00
|
| CB: 1.75
FYLD:
36.00
FU:
58.00
NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.90
|
| CT: 0.75
STEEL TYPE: 1.0 KS:1.000 KV:1.000 KBK:1.000
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE
RATIO LOAD
FX
VY
VZ
MZ
MY
|
| TENSION
0.000
0
0.00E+00
|
| COMPRESSION 0.009
1
5.00E+00
|
| COMP&BEND
0.290
1
5.00E+00
5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND
0.000
1
5.00E+00
5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y
0.770
1
1.00E+02
|
| SHEAR-Z
0.000
0
0.00E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
24C.1.1 .1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200, and
the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main members
and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS
members in Tension is set at 300.
24C.1.2 .2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than (0.5*F ) on
y
u
the Effective Net area.
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c), and
n
the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted by
e
bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be computed
from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A =C *A
e
t
n
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and
(3).
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
24C.1.3 .3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel
shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from
austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable compressive stress for
member elements other than columns constructed by any material, including austenitic stainless
steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) < Cc,
2
(KL / r )
1
2
2C c
Fa = Fy
5/3+
3(KL / r )
8C c
(KL / r )
8C c3
Where:
2 2E
Cc =
Fy
Fa =
12 E
23(KL / r )2
Fa [Eq.(a1 ) or Eq.(a2 )]
1.6
( )
l
200r
Fa = Fy 0.47
KL / r
444
Fa = Fy 0.40
KL / r
600
In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and for projecting
elements of compression flanges of girder,
When
When
b / t > 195 / Fy / kc
Qs =
Fy / kc
26, 200kc
F y(b / t )2
Where:
kc =
4.05
(h / t ) 0.46
253t
f
50.3
1
(b / t )
253t
f
44.3
1
(b / t )
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual area is
a
introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members
containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
Fa = Fy
(KL / r )
Q sQ a 1
2C c
5/3+
3(KL / r )
8C c
(KL / r )
3
8C c
Where:
Cc =
2 2E
Q sQ aF y
C mzfbz
(1 fa / F ex )Fbx
and
C myfby
(1 fa / F ey )Fby
1.0
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would result in a
misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and 0.6 0.4(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
Where:
Cv =
Cv =
45, 000k
F y (h / t ) 2
190
h/t
k
Fy
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and the
web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
Default Value
Description
CAN
CB
1.0
Parameter
Name
CMY
CMZ
Default Value
Description
CT
0.75
DFF
None
(Mandatory for
deflection check)
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
DMAX
45 inch
DMIN
0.0 inch
FYLD
36 KSI
FU
60 KSI
KBK
1.0
Reduction Coefficient in
computing effective net area of an
axially loaded tension member.
[Refer NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)]
Parameter
Name
KS
Default Value
1.0
Description
KV
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
MAIN
0.0
NSF
PROFILE
RATIO
1.0
None
1.0
Parameter
Name
SRL
Default Value
Description
STIFF
Member length or
depth whichever is
greater
STYPE
0.0
TMAIN
0.0
UNB
Member Length
Parameter
Name
UNT
Default Value
Member Length
Description
Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units.
2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command.
24C.5 Example
A cantilever beam of length 100 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and a
uniformly distributed load of 1 kip/inch over the whole span. The beam is assigned with B571806
steel member and is designed in accordance with ASME NF3000 1998.
The corresponding input of STAAD input editor file is shown as below:
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 18-Jun-08
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT INCHES KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 100 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST B571806
24C.5 Example
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1998
STYPE 1 ALL
FYLD 36 ALL
KY 0.75 ALL
KZ 0.75 ALL
FU 58 ALL
NSF 0.9 ALL
CT 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
v2.0
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
TABLE
ST
B571806
(AISC SECTIONS)
PASS
SHEAR Y
0.635
1
5.00 C
0.00
5000.00
0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK:
ACTUAL RATIO: 20.85 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES:
(UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.20E+01 FCZ: 2.22E+01 FCY: 2.31E+01 FTZ: 2.22E+01 FTY: 2.31E+01 |
| SHEAR: 6.28E+00
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.06E-01 FBZ: 5.86E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 3.99E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX: 47.00 AYY: 25.08 AZZ: 15.00 RZZ: 22.80 RYY: 3.60
|
| SZZ:
853.77 SYY:
67.54
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 3.29
KL/R-Y: 20.85
UNL: 100.0
CMZ: 1.00
CMY: 1.00
|
| CB: 1.75
FYLD:
36.00
FU:
58.00
NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.90
|
| CT: 0.85
STEEL TYPE: 1.0 KS:1.000 KV:1.000 KBK:1.000
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE
RATIO LOAD
FX
VY
VZ
MZ
MY
|
| TENSION
0.000
0
0.00E+00
|
24C.5 Example
| COMPRESSION 0.009
1
5.00E+00
|
| COMP&BEND
0.272
1
5.00E+00
5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND
0.000
1
5.00E+00
5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y
0.635
1
1.00E+02
|
| SHEAR-Z
0.000
0
0.00E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
24D.1.1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200, and
the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main members
and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS
members in Tension is set at 300.
24D.1.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60F ), but not more than (0.5F ) on
y
u
the Effective Net area.
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c), and the
n
NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted by
e
bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be computed
from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
Ae = Ct An
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and
(3).
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
24D.1.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel
shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from
austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable compressive stress for
member elements other than columns constructed by any material, including austenitic stainless
steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
A. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) Cc,
Fa = [1 - (Kl/r)2 /(2Cc2 )]Fy / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8Cc)] - [(Kl/r)3 /(8Cc3 )]}
(Eq. A1)
Where:
Cc = [(22 E)/Fy]1/2
2. When (Kl/r) > Cc,
Fa = 122 E/[23(kL/r)2 ]
(Eq. A2)
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,
Fas = Fa [(Eq.A1) or (Eq. A2)]/{1.6 - [l/(200r)]}
B. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
1. When (Kl/r) 120,
Fa = Fy[0.47 - (Kl/r)/444]
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,
Fa = Fy[0.40 - (Kl/r)/600]
C. Member elements other than columns:
C mzfbz
(1 fa / F ex )Fbx
and
C myfby
(1 fa / F ey )Fby
1.0
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would result in a
misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and 0.6 0.4(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa
0.60F y
fbz
Fbz
fby
Fby
1.0
Where:
Cv =
Cv =
45, 000k
F y (h / t ) 2
190
h/t
k
Fy
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and the
web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
Default
Value
CODE
Description
CAN
Parameter
Name
CB
Default
Value
1.0
Description
CMY
CMZ
0.85 for
sidesway and
calculated
for no
sidesway
CT
0.75
DFF
None
(Mandatory
for deflection
check)
DJ1
Start Joint of
the member
DJ2
End Joint of
the member
DMAX
45 inch
DMIN
0.0 inch
FYLD
36 KSI
FU
60 KSI
1.0
KBK
1.0
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
KV
1.0
Description
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member
Length
LZ
Member
Length
MAIN
0.0
NSF
1.0
PROFILE
None
RATIO
1.0
SRL
STIFF
Member
length or
depth
whichever is
greater
Parameter
Name
STYPE
Default
Value
0.0
Description
TMAIN
300 for
"Truss"
member
TRACK
0.0
UNB
Member
Length
UNT
Member
Length
Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units.
2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command.
v2.0
RESULT/
CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/
LOADING/
FX
MY
MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
TABLE
ST
B571806
(AISC SECTIONS)
PASS
NF-3322.1(b)
0.635
1
5.00 C
0.00
5000.00
0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK:
ACTUAL RATIO: 20.85 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES:
(UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.20E+01 FCZ: 2.22E+01 FCY: 2.31E+01 FTZ: 2.22E+01 FTY: 2.31E+01 |
| SHEAR: 6.28E+00
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.06E-01 FBZ: 5.86E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 3.99E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX: 47.00 AYY: 25.08 AZZ: 15.00 RZZ: 22.80 RYY: 3.60
|
| SZZ:
853.77 SYY:
67.54
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 3.29
KL/R-Y: 20.85
UNL: 100.0
CMZ: 1.00
CMY: 1.00
|
| CB: 1.75
FYLD:
36.00
FU:
58.00
NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.90
|
| CT: 0.85
STEEL TYPE: 1.0 KS:1.000 KV:1.000 KBK:1.000
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE
RATIO LOAD
FX
VY
VZ
MZ
MY
|
| TENSION
0.005
1
5.00E+00
|
| COMPRESSION 0.009
1
5.00E+00
|
| COMP&BEND
0.272
1
5.00E+00
5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND
0.000
1
5.00E+00
5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y
0.635
1
1.00E+02
|
| SHEAR-Z
0.000
1
0.00E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Note: An asterisk following a critical load case number indicates that this load case is a generated
load combination. See Section 5.35 of the Technical Reference for additional information.
Service Level Conditions are basically the loading conditions for which the plant structure and its
components are to be designed. The same primary load can be multiplied by different factors to
signify the different service levels. Also the load combinations for various service levels are different
and pre-defined by the code.
Description
A. Normal
Working
B. Upset
C.
This situation can be termed as a major failure, and the
Emergency repairing of the structure can be done only after shutting down
the entire plant.
D. Faulted
These Service Levels are the attribute of the whole structure or the structural system. So, the
existence of different Service Levels to the different parts of the structure at the same point of time
is totally ruled out.
The Service Level Factors are basically few multiplying factor by which the Allowable Stress values
are to be multiplied based on the Service Level. The different actions (e.g. Tension, Compression,
Bending, Shear etc.) have different Service Level Factors.
However, this is to be noted, the stipulated multiplying factors for creating load combinations for
Service Level B, C, and D are to be user defined in this case. The facility of creating Auto Load
Combination for different Service Levels is out of the scope of this implementation. The user has to
take care of this.
the values are the same for the service level factors in each table, STAAD.Pro does not make any
differentiation between component and piping supports.
Note: Clause NF-3321.1 also indicates that the allowable stress shall be limited to two-thirds (2/3x)
the critical buckling stress. However, the critical buckling stress is not clearly defined so it is left
to the user to ensure that this code requirement is met.
The values used for the stress level factors in STAAD.Pro are as follows:
Service Level
Ks
Kv
Kbk
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.33
1.33
1.33
1.50
1.50
1.50
D*
KS
KV
KBK
* It is evident from the Table NF-3523(b)-1, that there are no predefined Stress Limit Factors for
Service Level D. So, for Service Level D, the Factors Ks, Kv and Kbk are to be user defined. Refer to
Appendix F in the code for guidance on values to specify in the design parameters.
where
Ks
Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design Allowable Tensile and Bending Stresses.
Kv
Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design Allowable Shear Stresses
Kbk
Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design Allowable Compressive Axial and Bending
stresses to determine the Buckling Limit.
The program uses the service level factorseither those specified for levels A through C or the user
defined values in level Das follows:
l
As per NF-3322.1.(e), for checking Combined Stresses as per equation 20, the value of Fey and
Fez the Euler Stress divided by the factor of safety, may also be multiplied by the
appropriate Stress Limit Factor. This is also implemented. Fe is to be multiplied by Kbk
Technical Support
Technical Support
These resources are provided to help you answer support questions:
l
Technical Support
Index
A
AIJ 1991 Seeconcrete design, AIJ 1991
AIJ 2002 Seesteel design, AIJ 2002
AIJ 2005 Seesteel design, AIJ 2005
Alclad 849
aluminum design
American 847
BS EN 1993-1-1 319
BS4360 74
analysis
P-Delta 12
ANSI/AISC N690 codes 887
API 871
AS 1170 19
BS 5950-5 97
IS801 537
S136-94 157
concrete design
AS 3600 9
Australian codes 7
B4 419
BBK 94 841
B
BS8007 93
BS8110 47, 50
CP65 781
equivalent slenderness 69
Cyprus 233
EHE 833
Eurocode 2 253
Eurocode 2 253
IS13920 483
Eurocode 3
IS456 463
NS 3473 705
EN 1993 275
Eurocode 5 399
SABS-0100-1 789
SP 63.1330.2012 767
extrusions 851
F
DD ENV 259
French
design
codes 427
Dutch
national annex Seenational annex,
Dutch
G
GB 1591 74
element design
IS 456 482
EN 1993 275
976 STAAD.Pro
IS 456
Norwegian 320
output 316
Polish 320
Singaporean 320
Swedish 320
National Annex 308
national annexes
Eurocode 2 253
national application documents 253
Japanese
concrete design Seeconcrete
design, AIJ 1991
NF EN 1993-1-1 320
Norwegian
M
Mexican codes 603
modulus of elasticity 24
moments
Wood and Armer 53
MS NE 1993-1-1 320
P
N
N690 codes 887
national annex 275
Belgian 320
PN EN 1993-1-1 320
Polish
national annex Seenational annex,
Polish
British 319
Dutch 320
R
Russian codes 709
Finnish 320
French 320
German 320
S
S136-94 Seesteel design, S136-94
Malaysian 320
IS 802 521
SS EN 1993-1-1 320
IS801 537
NBE-MV103-1972 831
steel design
S136-94 157
API 871
AS 4100 17
SP 16.133330.2011 753
Eurocode 294
B7 423
Australian 20
BS 5950-5 97
British 64
BS5400 89
Canadian 124
BS5950 63
French 440
BSK 99 839
German 454
CAN/CSA-S16-09 183
Japanese 585
978 STAAD.Pro
equations 53
moments 49, 95, 237, 785
CAN/CSA-086-01 165
Eurocode 5 399
U
UK
national annex Seenational annex,
British
V
verification problem
AIJ 2005 581
ASME NF 3000 1974 933
ASME NF 3000 1989 943
ASME NF 3000 1998 956
ASME NF 3000 2004 968
British Cold Formed Steel 107
CAN-CSA 086-01 174
CAN-CSA S16-01 140, 143, 146, 149
CAN-CSA S16-14 196, 201, 205, 209,
214, 218, 222, 224
Eurocode 5 409, 412
SAB0162-1 807, 810, 812